1. shopping
2. auctions

PROJECT MANUAL
VOLUME 1 OF 2
RENOVATIONS FOR CHILDREN & YOUTH
AGENCY
FOR:
LANCASTER COUNTY GOVERNMENT CENTER
150 NORTH QUEEN STREET, LANCASTER, PA 17603
CITY OF LANCASTER, LANCASTER COUNTY
ARCHITECT’S PROJECT NUMBER: 14106
1853 WILLIAM PENN WAY, LANCASTER, PENNSLYVANIA 17605
(717) 293-4475
JULY 29, 2014
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
RENOVATIONS FOR CHILDREN & YOUTH
AGENCY
FOR:
LANCASTER COUNTY GOVERNMENT CENTER
150 NORTH QUEEN STREET, LANCASTER, PA 17603
CITY OF LANCASTER, LANCASTER COUNTY
ARCHITECT’S PROJECT NUMBER: 14106
DATE: JULY 29, 2014
ARCHITECT
GREENFIELD ARCHITECTS, LTD.
Attn: Tom Marcinkoski, A.I.A.
1853 William Penn Way
Lancaster, PA 17601
Phone: (717)-390-4614
Fax: (717)-293-4499
OWNER REPRESENTATIVE
COUNTY OF LANCASTER
Attn: Barry Garman
150 North Queen Street, Suite 601
Lancaster, PA 17608-3480
Phone: (717)-397-9753
Fax: (717)-295-3508
ENGINEERING CONSULTANT (MEP/FP
JDB ENGINEERING, INC
Attn: Tim Warren
President
3687 Concord Road
York, PA 17402-8628
Phone: (717)-757-5602
Fax: (717)-755-9007
MECHANICAL ENGINEER
JDB ENGINEERING, INC
Attn: Jeff Pauley, PE
Mechanical Engineer
3687 Concord Road
York, PA 17402-8628
Phone: (717)-757-5602
Fax: (717)-755-9007
ELECTRICAL ENGINEER
JDB ENGINEERING, INC
Attn: Bob Stees / Craig Malesic
Electrical Engineers
3687 Concord Road
York, PA 17402-8628
Phone: (717)-757-5602
Fax: (717)-755-9007
PLUMBING & FIRE PROTECTION
JDB ENGINEERING, INC
Attn: Steve List
Plumbing Engineer
3687 Concord Road
York, PA 17402-8628
Phone: (717)-757-5602
Fax: (717)-755-9007
RENOVATIONS FOR CHILDREN & YOUTH
AGENCY
FOR:
LANCASTER COUNTY GOVERNMENT CENTER
150 NORTH QUEEN STREET, LANCASTER, PA 17603
CITY OF LANCASTER, LANCASTER COUNTY
ARCHITECT’S PROJECT NUMBER: 14106
DATE: JULY 29, 2014
HARDWARE CONSULTANT
SPEC GROUP INC.
Attn: Ed Linaugh
14 Cambridge Road
Downingtown, PA 17335
Phone: (610)-594-2157
OFFICE FURNISHINGS
BENJAMIN ROBERTS OFFICE INTERIORS
Attn: Jim Brown
240 North Prince Street
Lancaster, PA 17603
Phone: (717)-291-1001
Fax: (717)-392-0111
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION TABLE OF CONTENTS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
DIVISION 0 – in Volume 1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
DIVISION 1 - in Volume 1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
DIVISIONS 2 thru 14 - In Volume 1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION
DIVISION 21, 22, 23 and 25 - in Volume 2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION
DIVISION 26, 27 and 28 - in Volume 2
ADDENDA / BULLETIN - in Volume 2
RENOVATIONS FOR CHILDREN & YOUTH
AGENCY
FOR:
LANCASTER COUNTY GOVERNMENT CENTER
150 NORTH QUEEN STREET, LANCASTER, PA 17603
CITY OF LANCASTER, LANCASTER COUNTY
ARCHITECT’S PROJECT NUMBER: 14106
DATE: JULY 29, 2014
PROJECT MANUAL - VOLUME 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 0
Section 001000
Section 002000
Section 003001
Section 003002
Section 003003
Section 003004
Section 003100
Section 003200
Section 003300
Section 003400
Section 005000
Section 006100
Section 006200
Section 006500
Section 007000
Section 008000
Section 008100
Section 008200
DIVISION 1
Section 011000
Section 011200
Section 012200
Section 012500
Section 012600
INFORMATION, BIDDING, and CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Advertisement ................................................................................ Pages 1 – 1
Instructions to Bidders.................................................................... Pages 1 – 7
Bid Form – General Construction ................................................... Pages 1 – 2
Bid Form – Plumbing Construction................................................. Pages 1 – 2
Bid Form – HVAC Construction .................................................... Pages 1 – 2
Bid Form – Electrical Construction................................................. Pages 1 – 2
Special Instructions......................................................................... Pages 1 – 2
Bid Bond Form............................................................................... Pages 1 – 2
Non-Collusion Affidavit.................................................................. Pages 1 – 4
Public Works Employment Verification Form ................................. Pages 1 – 2
Agreement...................................................................................... Pages 1 – 3
Performance Bond.......................................................................... Pages 1 – 2
Payment Bond ................................................................................ Pages 1 – 2
Prevailing Wage Rates .................................................................... Pages 1 – 1
Prevailing Wage Project Rates Attachment ....................................Pages 1 - 15
General Conditions ....................................................................... Pages 1 – 38
Supplemental Conditions ................................................................ Pages 1 – 5
Statutory Requirements .................................................................. Pages 1 – 6
Minority and Women Business Participation
and Cooperation Plan (w/attached forms) ......................................Pages 1 - 13
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Summary........................................................................................ Pages 1 – 6
Multiple Contract Summary............................................................ Pages 1 – 6
Unit Prices...................................................................................... Pages 1 – 3
Substitution Procedures (w/attached form) ..................................... Pages 1 – 4
Contract Modification Procedures .................................................. Pages 1 – 3
DIVISION 1
AIA G701
AIA G709
AIA G710
AIA G714
Section 012900
AIA G702
AIA G703
AIA G706
AIA G706A
AIA G707
Section 013100
Section N/A
Section 013200
Section 013233
Section 013300
Section 014000
Section 014200
Section 015000
Section 016000
Section 017300
Section 017329
Section 017700
Section 017823
Section 017839
Section 017900
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (continued)
Change Order .................................................................................. Page 1 – 1
Proposal Request............................................................................. Page 1 – 1
Architect’s Supplemental Instructions ............................................... Page 1 - 1
Construction Change Directive ........................................................ Page 1 – 1
Payment Procedures ....................................................................... Pages 1 – 5
Application and Certificate for Payment .......................................... Pages 1 – 1
Continuation Sheet ......................................................................... Pages 1 – 1
Contractor’s Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims.................... Page 1 – 1
Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of Liens........................................ Page 1 – 1
Consent of Surety to Final Payment…………………………………Page 1 – 1
Project Management and Coordination ........................................... Pages 1 – 9
Request for Interpretation (RFI) Form............................................ Pages 1 – 1
Construction Progress Documentation.......................................... Pages 1 – 10
Photographic Documentation...........................................................Pages 1 - 3
Submittal Procedures...................................................................... Pages 1 – 9
Quality Requirements ..................................................................... Pages 1 – 9
References.................................................................................... Pages 1 – 17
Temporary Facilities and Controls................................................... Pages 1 – 7
Product Requirements .................................................................... Pages 1 – 7
Execution ....................................................................................... Pages 1 – 8
Cutting and Patching ...................................................................... Pages 1 – 5
Closeout Procedures....................................................................... Pages 1 – 5
Operation and Maintenance Data .................................................... Pages 1 – 8
Project Record Documents ..............................................................Pages 1 - 4
Demonstration and Training............................................................ Pages 1 – 6
DIVISION 2
Section 024119
EXISTING CONDITIONS
Selective Structure Demolition ....................................................... Pages 1 – 8
DIVISION 3
Section 035416
CONCRETE
Hydraulic Cement Underlayment .................................................... Pages 1 – 4
DIVISION 4
MASONRY (Not Used)
DIVISION 5
Section 055000
METALS
Metal Fabrications .......................................................................... Pages 1 – 9
DIVISION 6
Section 061053
Section 064023
Section 064200
WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry ............................................................... Pages 1 – 9
Interior Architectural Woodwork ........................................................... Pages 1 – 13
Wood Paneling ............................................................................. Pages 1 – 10
DIVISION 7
Section 072100
Section 078100
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Thermal Insulation...........................................................................Pages 1 - 7
Applied Fireproofing..................................................................... Pages 1 – 12
DIVISION 7
Section 078413
Section 078446
Section 079200
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION (continued)
Penetration Firestopping ................................................................Pages 1 - 10
Fire-Resistive Joint System ............................................................. Pages 1 – 4
Joint Sealants .................................................................................. Page 1 – 6
DIVISION 8
Section 081110
Section 081416
Section 087100
Section 088000
Section 088113.1
OPENINGS
Steel Doors and Frames (Hollow Metal) ...........................................Pages1 - 7
Flush Wood Doors ...........................................................................Pages1 - 7
Door Hardware (to be issued as an addendum)
Glazing.......................................................................................... Page 1 – 14
Decorative Glass Film..................................................................... Pages 1 – 4
DIVISION 9
FINISHES
Section 09211623 Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies ............................................ Pages 1 – 6
Section 092216 Non-Structural Metal Framing ........................................................ Pages 1 – 7
Section 092900 Gypsum Board ............................................................................... Pages 1 – 8
Section 093000 Ceramic Tiling .............................................................................. Pages 1 – 10
Section 095113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings................................................................ Pages 1 – 9
Section 096513 Resilient Base and Accessories........................................................ Pages 1 – 5
Section 096519 Resilient Tile Flooring.....................................................................Pages 1 – 5
Section 096813 Tile Carpeting................................................................................. Pages 1 – 8
Section 099123 Interior Painting.............................................................................. Pages 1 – 9
DIVISION 10
Section 100010
Section 101400
Section 102600
Section 102800
Section 104413
Section 104416
Section 106150
SPECIALTIES
Television Mounts .......................................................................... Pages 1 – 2
Signage .......................................................................................... Pages 1 – 6
Wall Protection............................................................................... Pages 1 – 7
Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories............................................ Pages 1 – 5
Fire Extinguisher Cabinets ...............................................................Pages 1 - 6
Fire Extinguishers........................................................................... Pages 1 – 4
Demountable Partitions (Moveable Partitions)
N.I.C. - Reference Only)..................................................................Pages 1 - 6
DIVISION 11
EQUIPMENT (Not Used)
DIVISION 12
Section 125900
FURNISHINGS
Systems Furniture (N.I.C. - Reference Only)....................................Pages 1 - 4
DIVISION 13
SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (Not Used)
DIVISION 14
CONVEYING EQUIPMENT (Not Used)
DIVISION 21
In Volume 2
FIRE SUPPRESSION
DIVISION 22
In Volume 2
PLUMBING
DIVISION 23
In Volume 2
HEATING VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING
DIVISION 25
In Volume 2
HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
DIVISION 26
In Volume 2
ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION
DIVISION 27
In Volume 2
COMMUNICATIONS
DIVISION 28
In Volume 2
ELECTRONIC SAFETY & SECURITY
DIVISION 31
In Volume 2
EARTHWORK
DIVISION 32
In Volume 2
EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
DIVISION 33
In Volume 2
UTILITIES
ADDENDA / BULLETIN
In Volume 2
END OF VOLUME 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 00100
ADVERTISEMENT
Sealed bids will be received for the RENOVATIONS FOR CHILDREN & YOUTH AGENGY at the
Lancaster County Government Center, 150 North Queen Street, Lancaster, PA., by the County
Controller, Suite 710 at the Lancaster County Government Center, 150 North Queen Street, Lancaster,
PA, until 11:00 A M, prevailing time, Wednesday August 20, 2014, and then be publicly opened and
read.
Proposed work will include but is not limited to:
The renovation and build-out of office space for two existing, unoccupied office suites comprising of
approximately 15,000 square feet total will include the following work: Spaces adjacent to the proposed
alterations will be occupied during this renovation. Work will include demolition, metal stud and drywall
wall, acoustical ceilings, carpet and vct flooring, millwork,. Existing structural steel will be spray
fireproofed to increase rating from 1-hour to 2-hour rating in specified locations. Existing lighting will be
reused in specified locations and replaced with new in other locations. The existing mechanical system
(VAV) boxes and ductwork will be modified as required. The existing building automation/energy
management system will be retained. Plumbing and fire protection systems will be modified to
accomodate the new layout.
A PRE-BID CONFERENCE will be held in Conference room 102-104 at the Lancaster County
Government Center, 150 North Queen Street, Lancaster, PA beginning at 1:00 PM on August 5,
2014,
Bid Documents for this Project will be available on to Bidders on July 29, 2014 from Print-O-Stat's
Lancaster, PA, "Online Planroom." Prospective Bidders may contact P-O-S (telephone 717-581-6680)
for procedures for viewing or acquiring Bidding Documents. Bidders may purchase documents directly
from the P-O-S "Online Planroom" or schedule purchase of documents with shipping via express mail
when providing P-O-S with an express mail account number. Each prime Bidder is obligated to purchase
one (1) complete set of Contract Documents.
Contract Drawings and Project Manual may be examined during normal business hours at the County’s
Facilities Management Office, 150 North Queen Street, Suite 612, Lancaster, PA.
Telephone
717.299.8323, Fax 717.295.3508.
Each bid shall be accompanied by a Bid bond or certified check in the amount of 10% of the total base
bid payable to the "County of Lancaster". Bids may not be withdrawn within 45 days after bid opening.
The County reserves the right to waive any irregularities in, or reject, any and all bids. Bid prices will
remain valid for sixty (60) days. Should the bidder default in execution of the contract within 10 days
after award of same, the Bid security will be forfeited as liquidated damages.
Each bid shall be accompanied by a fully executed copy of the following documents in accordance with
the instructions contained in the bid documents: Non-Collusion Affidavit Form, Public Works
Employment Verification Form, Bidders Representation Form, and the MB/WB Form 1.
This project includes Wage Determinations as defined by Pennsylvania Department of Labor and Industry
for prevailing wage determinations.
COUNTY OF LANCASTER, PENNSYLVANIA
ADVERTISEMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
001000-1
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 002000
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
IB-1 Bidder’s Responsibility
Each bidder shall familiarize himself, and will be held responsible to examine, and to fully comply with
all the Contract Documents, as defined in the form of Agreement set forth hereinafter.
Before submitting proposal, bidder shall carefully examine the specifications and satisfy himself as to
conditions relating to providing the materials, delivery and necessary labor that he will be obliged to
provide. Submission of a proposal will be deemed a warranty that such examination has been made; and
later claims for labor, equipment, or materials required, or for difficulties encountered, which could have
been foreseen had such an examination been made, will not be recognized.
IB-2 Standard of Quality
Equipment, material or articles herein specified are all of design or construction as selected for this
Contract, and they shall be construed as being a standard. Should the bidder desire to quote on
equipment, material, or articles claimed to be equal to that specified, he may do so, provided that he shall
first submit a request therefore (accompanied by cuts and complete descriptive matter of such other
equipment, materials or articles), and receive the Architect’s approval, before submitting bid. Such
request must be made seven (7) days before the bid opening to permit the Architect to make proper
investigation; and the Architect’s determination thereon shall be conclusive.
IB-3 Pre-Bid Conference
Pre-Bid Conference will be held at 1:00 P.M. on August 5, 2014, in Conference room 102-104 at the
Lancaster County Government Center, 150 North Queen Street, Lancaster, PA
IB-3.A Contractors Site Visit Prior to Bidding
Bidders may visit the site only when a scheduled appointment has been made with Barry Garman,
Facilities Management Department. Phone: 717-299-8323.
IB-4 Interpretation of Contract Documents prior to Bidding
If any bidder is in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the plans, specifications, or other Contract
Documents, or should discover any omissions or discrepancies therein, or desire to quote on alternate
equipment, materials or articles not rated by the Architect as "Approved Equivalent" of those specified,
he may submit to the Architect as written request for an interpretation, correction or addition, or an
authorization of an alternate. If any such request be granted, it will be only by an addendum or bulletin,
duly issued, and a copy will be mailed or delivered to each bidder. The Owner will not be responsible for
any other explanations, interpretations, corrections or changes in or of the proposed documents.
IB-5 Proposals
(a) Proposals shall be delivered to the County Controller on or before 11:00 A.M., prevailing time,
Wednesday, August 20, 2014, such delivery is the bidder's responsibility. No bids received after
commencement of bid opening will receive consideration. Proposals shall be addressed to:
INSTRUCTIONS
TO BIDDERS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
002000-1
County of Lancaster, Pennsylvania
c/o Controller's Office, Suite 710
150 North Queen Street
Lancaster, Pennsylvania, 17603
and enclosed in opaque, sealed envelopes, marked so as to indicate that it is a proposal for a
particular contract without the necessity of opening.
(b) Proposals must be submitted on Proposal form attached to these documents, which form may be
removed from other documents for enclosing in envelopes. Bid Documents can be picked up at
Greenfield Architects, Ltd.by an authorized representative of the company bidding. The legal company
name, address, phone and fax numbers must be provided at the time of pickup for mailing of future
addenda. Documents obtained from any website or other source will not be considered. Proposals must
be completely filled in. All unit prices and the total bid price must be written both in words and figures,
but written prices shall govern in case of discrepancies. No proposal will be considered which is not based
on these plans and specifications.
(c) The bid of an individual must be signed by him personally, his signature must be witnessed; and
his business address and any business trade name must be stated. The bid of a partnership must state the
names and addresses of all partners, and the partnership must state the names and partnership business
name and address; and it must be signed by all partners, with the signatures witnessed. The bid of a
corporation must show the state of incorporation and the principal office address, and must be signed by
the President or Vice-President, with the corporate seal affixed, attested by the Secretary or Assistant
Secretary.
IB-6 Acceptance or Rejection of Proposals
The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all proposals. Without limiting the generality of the
foregoing, any proposal which is incomplete, obscure, conditional, not on the prescribed form, or
otherwise irregular, or which has erasures or corrections in prices, or which include additions or
deductions not called for, or uninvited alternate bids, or in which unit prices are omitted or are obviously
unbalanced or which is not accompanied by required bid security, may be rejected. However, the Owner
reserves the right to waive informalities on the basis of its best interests.
IB-7 Bid Check or Bond
Each proposal must be accompanied by a certified, bank cashier's, or trust company treasurer's
check, or a bid bond for not less than ten percent (10%) of base bid, payable to the Owner as
security for execution of Contract, etc., under terms embodied in the form of proposal. If Bid Bond is
used, it MUST BE IN THE FORM FURNISHED WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, must
be executed by the Bidder as provided in Paragraph IB-4 (c) and must have corporate surety satisfactory
to the Owner and authorized to conduct business in Pennsylvania. Attorneys-in-fact who sign bid bonds
must file with each bond a certified and effective dated copy of their power-of-attorney.
Bid security shall be held until the Owner has an opportunity to compare the prices. After the prices have
been compared, the Owner shall return the bid security of all but the three lowest responsible and
responsive bidders. When the Agreement is executed, this bid security shall be returned as well.
Bid security shall be applied by the Owner towards damages in the event bidder fails to execute and
furnish bonds as required in the General Conditions of the Specifications and in accordance with the
Public Works Contractor's Bond Law of 1967, or in the event an award is made and the bidder fails to
INSTRUCTIONS
TO BIDDERS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
002000-2
execute the Contract and furnish evidence of insurance or Performance and Payment Bonds, or as
otherwise provided herein. In the event such bid security is applied towards damages, the Owner does not
waive its right to bring further action against such bidder for any additional damages suffered because of
the failure of such bidder to comply with the terms of his Bid Proposal.
IB-8 Qualifications of Bidders
Before any award is made, the Owner will require satisfactory evidence to show that bidder is fully
prepared in every way to execute the work promptly and satisfactorily, and has been regularly engaged in
such work.
IB-9 Limit of Bid Withdrawal
Bids may be withdrawn up to the time of the bid opening by Owner upon receipt of a written request from
the bidder. Bid security for any bid so withdrawn shall be returned promptly.
Except as authorized and provided in the Act of January 23, 1974, Act No. 4, no bid may be withdrawn at
the date and time for the opening of bids nor at any other time during the bid hold period described
herein. If the bidder elects to request the withdrawal of a proposal under and pursuant to the provision of
said Act No. 4, the rights and obligations of all parties shall be as set forth in said Act No. 4, and the
procedure to be followed shall be as provided in said Act, the provisions of which are incorporated herein
by reference.
The Owner shall award the contract to the lowest responsible and responsive bidder or reject all bids
within sixty (60) days from the date of the bid opening; provided, however, that if the award is delayed by
the required approval of another governmental agency, the sale of bonds, or the award of a grant, the
Owner shall reject all bids or award the contract to the lowest responsible and responsive bidder within
one hundred twenty (120) days from the date of the bid opening.
IB-10 Execution of Agreement and Bonds
If following the review and comparison of bids the Owner shall determine to proceed with the project, it
shall first issue a Notice of Intent to Award to the lowest responsible and responsive bidder.
The successful bidder will be required, within seven (7) calendar days following notification to furnish to
the Owner, in at least four counterparts, the Performance Bond and Payment Bond, all in the form
substantially prescribed for execution of proposals (Paragraph IB-4 (c)). Both bonds shall have corporate
surety satisfactory to the Owner, and authorized to conduct business in Pennsylvania; shall be paid for by
the Contractor and shall be for 100% of the contract price, except for the obligations of maintenance,
which shall be for 10% of said price. Following delivery of the properly executed bonds, the Owner may
award the contract. Following notice of award, the successful bidder shall sign and deliver to the Owner
in at least four counterparts, the agreement and insurance policies, or certificates of insurance required by
the contract documents. Such insurance policies or certificates shall state that the insurance cannot be
canceled without approval of or reasonable written notice to the Owner.
IB-11 Time for Beginning Project & Length of Contract
The Contractor shall within seven (7) calendar days after receiving the notice of contract award, proceed
with the work required under this contract and continue with the work so that all specified systems will be
operational in accordance with the schedule defined in the contract documents.
INSTRUCTIONS
TO BIDDERS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
002000-3
In case of failure on the part of the Contractor to complete the work within the time fixed or any
extensions thereof, the Contractor shall be liable to the County for and shall pay to the County the sum of
$500.00 each calendar day of delay from the date stipulated for the completion of the work.
IB-12 Location of Work
Partial Work Areas First & Second Floor (East Suite First Floor and South/East Suite Second Floor)
150 North Queen Street
Lancaster, Pennsylvania 17603
IB-13 Collusive Bids
More than one proposal or one contract from an individual, a firm or partnership, corporation, or an
association under the same name or different names will not be considered. Reasonable grounds for
believing that the bidder is interested in more than one proposal for the same work will cause the rejection
of all proposals in which such bidder is interested. Any or all proposals will be rejected if there is any
reason for believing that collusion exists among any of the bidders; participants in such collusion will not
be considered in future proposals.
Each proposal must be accompanied by an executed copy of the NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
as outlined in Specification Section 003300 “Non-Collusion Affidavit”.
IB-14 Public Works Employment Verification Act 127
Attention is called to the fact that Pennsylvania Act 127, known as the Public Works Employment
Verification Act became effective January 1, 2013. The law mandates all contractors (and
Subcontractors) enroll and use
E-verify for all new hires to ensure their employees are legal to work.
Act 127 applies to all public works contracts worth $25,000 or more.
Each proposal must be accompanied by an executed copy of the PUBLIC WORKS
EMPLOYMENT VERIFICATION as outlined in Specification Section 003400 “Public Works
Employment Verification”.
IB- 15 Pennsylvania Steel Products Procurement Act
Attention is called to the fact that the Pennsylvania Steel Products Procurement Act is applicable to the
project, and steel products must comply with the requirements of this Act.
IB-16 Pennsylvania Prevailing Wage Act
Wage rates are attached to the Contract.
IB- 17 Criminal History Report
Each successful bidder will be required to file a Criminal History Report with the County for any
employee who will be working at the site. Each successful bidder shall supply report forms and submit to
the State Police for review and approval.
INSTRUCTIONS
TO BIDDERS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
002000-4
IB-18 Minority and Women Business Participation and Cooperation Plan
The Owner has adopted a participation and cooperation plan for minority and women businesses, The
plan is outlined in Specification Section 008200 “Minority and Women Business Participation and
Cooperation Plan.”
Each proposal must be accompanied by an executed copy of the MB/WB Form I as outlined in
Specification Section 008200 “Minority and Women Business Participation and Cooperation Plan.”
The MB/WB Form I must be submitted with bid.
All other required paperwork must be submitted as outlined in Section 008200.
IB- 19 Interpretations and Addenda
All questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents are to be directed to ARCHITECT in
writing. Bidders may use the attached form (Bidding Contractors' Comments/Questions). Questions may
be submitted by facsimile or mail. Questions may not be submitted by telephone. Interpretations or
clarifications considered necessary by ARCHITECT in response to such questions will be issued by
Addenda mailed or delivered to all parties recorded by ARCHITECT as having received the Bidding
Documents. Questions received less than five days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be
answered. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other
interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect.
All written questions are to be directed to the ARCHITECT at: Greenfield Architects, Ltd. 1853
William Penn Way, Lancaster, PA 17605-0008. using the attached form. Addenda may also be
issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by OWNER or ARCHITECT.
INSTRUCTIONS
TO BIDDERS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
002000-5
OWNER:
PROJECT
NAME:
PART 1
Lancaster County
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
150 NORTH QUEEN STREET
LANCASTER COUNTY PA
1.
2.
LOG #
Job No.
BIDDER’S COMMENTS/QUESTIONS
Greenfield Architects FAX NO. (717) 293-4499
BIDDER INFORMATION
Contract Number:
Company Name:
Telephone Number: ( )
Facsimile Number:
( )
Company Name:
Company Address:
Contract Name:
Date:
COMMENT/QUESTIONS (Limited to one subject per sheet)
Contract Number:
Project Manual Number:
Specification Section No.
Part No.
Paragraph No.
Page No.
Drawing Sheet No(s)
,
,
,
,
,
Response:
Follow-Up Work Performed by:
________________________________________________________________________________
YES
NO
DATE FORWARDED:
Forward to Subconsultant:
____________________________________
Firm: ____________________________________; Contact Person: _______________________________
INCLUDE IN ADDENDUM
INSTRUCTIONS
TO BIDDERS
YES
NO
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
002000-6
See Instructions to Bidders, paragraph IB. 19.
Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or
clarifications will be without legal effect.
INSTRUCTIONS
TO BIDDERS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
002000-7
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
DOCUMENT NO. 003001
BID FORM
BID FOR:
GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
____________________________
Name of Bidder
RENOVATIONS for CHILDREN & YOUTH AGENCY
150 NORTH QUEEN STREET
LANCASTER, PA 17603
____________________________
Telephone No.
FOR OWNER:
COUNTY OF LANCASTER
150 NORTH QUEEN STREET
LANCASTER, PA 17603
AS PREPARED BY:
____________________________
Date
GREENFIELD ARCHITECTS, LTD
1853 WILLIAM PENN WAY
LANCASTER, PA 17601
1.
BASE BID
Having carefully examined the Contact Documents, together with all addenda thereto, and other
data as prepared by Greenfield Architects, Ltd., 1853 William Penn Way, Lancaster, PA 17601,
and having visited the site and becoming familiar with all conditions affecting the Work, hereby
proposed to furnish everything required for the completion of the above named Work for the
above named project, all in accordance with the law at the place of the Work for the following
amount.
BASE BID: (in Words)
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
DOLLARS ($_________________________).
2.
ADDENDA
A.
The undersigned hereby acknowledges receipt of, and has included in this Proposal, the
work covered by the following Addenda.
Addendum No.
BID FORM
Date
_______________
________________
_______________
________________
_______________
________________
_______________
________________
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
003001-1
3.
TIME OF COMPLETION
A.
The undersigned agrees to, if awarded the Contract, to bring all Work under the contract
to Substantial Completion on or before the following date:
________________________________________________________________________
4.
AWARD
The undersigned agrees to, within 10 days after notice of acceptance of this bid, provide
Insurance and Bonds and either into Contract, if so notified within 90 days from the date of Bid
Opening.
Signatures: The undersigned hereby certifies that this proposal is genuine and not a sham,
collusive or fraudulent or made in the interest of or on behalf of any person, firm or corporation
not herein named; and the undersigned has not, directly or indirectly, induced or solicited and
bidder to submit a sham bid, or any other person, firm or corporation from bidding, and that the
undersigned has not, in any manner, sought by collusion to secure for himself any advantage over
any other bidder.
DATE: _____________________________________________________________, 20 _______.
SIGN HERE IF
_______________________________________
CONTRACTOR
AN INDIVIDUAL
_______________________________________
ADDRESS
_______________________________________
SIGN HERE IF
NAME: ________________________________
A PARTNERSHIP
OR CORPORATION
BY: __________________________________
ATTEST:
______________________________
(SECRETARY)
TITLE: ________________________________
ADDRESS: _____________________________
COROPORATE SEAL HERE:
** END OF SECTION **
BID FORM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
003001-2
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
DOCUMENT NO. 003002
BID FORM
BID FOR:
PLUMBING CONSTRUCTION
____________________________
Name of Bidder
RENOVATIONS for CHILDREN & YOUTH AGENCY
150 NORTH QUEEN STREET
LANCASTER, PA 17603
____________________________
Telephone No.
FOR OWNER:
COUNTY OF LANCASTER
150 NORTH QUEEN STREET
LANCASTER, PA 17603
____________________________
Date
AS PREPARED BY: GREENFIELD ARCHITECTS, LTD
1853 WILLIAM PENN WAY
LANCASTER, PA 17601
1.
BASE BID
Having carefully examined the Contact Documents, together with all addenda thereto, and other
data as prepared by Greenfield Architects, Ltd., 1853 William Penn Way, Lancaster, PA 17601,
and having visited the site and becoming familiar with all conditions affecting the Work, hereby
proposed to furnish everything required for the completion of the above named Work for the
above named project, all in accordance with the law at the place of the Work for the following
amount.
BASE BID: (in Words)
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
DOLLARS ($_________________________).
2.
ADDENDA
A.
The undersigned hereby acknowledges receipt of, and has included in this Proposal, the
work covered by the following Addenda.
Addendum No.
BID FORM
Date
_______________
________________
_______________
________________
_______________
________________
_______________
________________
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
003002-1
3.
TIME OF COMPLETION
A.
The undersigned agrees to, if awarded the Contract, to bring all Work under the contract
to Substantial Completion on or before the following date:
________________________________________________________________________
4.
AWARD
The undersigned agrees to, within 10 days after notice of acceptance of this bid, provide
Insurance and Bonds and either into Contract, if so notified within 90 days from the date of Bid
Opening.
Signatures: The undersigned hereby certifies that this proposal is genuine and not a sham,
collusive or fraudulent or made in the interest of or on behalf of any person, firm or corporation
not herein named; and the undersigned has not, directly or indirectly, induced or solicited and
bidder to submit a sham bid, or any other person, firm or corporation from bidding, and that the
undersigned has not, in any manner, sought by collusion to secure for himself any advantage over
any other bidder.
DATE: _____________________________________________________________, 20 _______.
SIGN HERE IF
_______________________________________
CONTRACTOR
AN INDIVIDUAL
_______________________________________
ADDRESS
_______________________________________
SIGN HERE IF
NAME: ________________________________
A PARTNERSHIP
OR CORPORATION
BY: __________________________________
ATTEST:
______________________________
(SECRETARY)
TITLE: ________________________________
ADDRESS: _____________________________
COROPORATE SEAL HERE:
** END OF SECTION **
BID FORM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
003002-2
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
DOCUMENT NO. 003003
BID FORM
BID FOR:
HVAC CONSTRUCTION
____________________________
Name of Bidder
RENOVATIONS for CHILDREN & YOUTH AGENCY
150 NORTH QUEEN STREET
LANCASTER, PA 17603
____________________________
Telephone No.
FOR OWNER:
COUNTY OF LANCASTER
50 NORTH DUKE STREET
LANCASTER, PA 17602
____________________________
Date
AS PREPARED BY: GREENFIELD ARCHITECTS, LTD
1853 WILLIAM PENN WAY
LANCASTER, PA 17601
1.
BASE BID
Having carefully examined the Contact Documents, together with all addenda thereto, and other
data as prepared by Greenfield Architects, Ltd., 1853 William Penn Way, Lancaster, PA 17601,
and having visited the site and becoming familiar with all conditions affecting the Work, hereby
proposed to furnish everything required for the completion of the above named Work for the
above named project, all in accordance with the law at the place of the Work for the following
amount.
BASE BID: (in Words)
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
DOLLARS ($_________________________).
2.
ADDENDA
A.
BID FORM
The undersigned hereby acknowledges receipt of, and has included in this Proposal, the
work covered by the following Addenda.
Addendum No.
Date
_______________
________________
_______________
________________
_______________
________________
_______________
________________
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
003003-1
3.
TIME OF COMPLETION
A.
The undersigned agrees to, if awarded the Contract, to bring all Work under the contract
to Substantial Completion on or before the following date:
________________________________________________________________________
4.
AWARD
The undersigned agrees to, within 10 days after notice of acceptance of this bid, provide
Insurance and Bonds and either into Contract, if so notified within 90 days from the date of Bid
Opening.
Signatures: The undersigned hereby certifies that this proposal is genuine and not a sham,
collusive or fraudulent or made in the interest of or on behalf of any person, firm or corporation
not herein named; and the undersigned has not, directly or indirectly, induced or solicited and
bidder to submit a sham bid, or any other person, firm or corporation from bidding, and that the
undersigned has not, in any manner, sought by collusion to secure for himself any advantage over
any other bidder.
DATE: _____________________________________________________________, 20 _______.
SIGN HERE IF
_______________________________________
CONTRACTOR
AN INDIVIDUAL
_______________________________________
ADDRESS
_______________________________________
SIGN HERE IF
NAME: ________________________________
A PARTNERSHIP
OR CORPORATION
BY: __________________________________
ATTEST:
______________________________
(SECRETARY)
TITLE: ________________________________
ADDRESS: _____________________________
COROPORATE SEAL HERE:
** END OF SECTION **
BID FORM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
003003-2
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
DOCUMENT NO. 003004
BID FORM
BID FOR:
ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION
____________________________
Name of Bidder
RENOVATIONS for CHILDREN & YOUTH AGENCY
150 NORTH QUEEN STREET
LANCASTER, PA 17603
____________________________
Telephone No.
FOR OWNER:
COUNTY OF LANCASTER
50 NORTH DUKE STREET
LANCASTER, PA 17602
____________________________
Date
AS PREPARED BY: GREENFIELD ARCHITECTS, LTD
1853 WILLIAM PENN WAY
LANCASTER, PA 17601
1.
BASE BID
Having carefully examined the Contact Documents, together with all addenda thereto, and other
data as prepared by Greenfield Architects, Ltd., 1853 William Penn Way, Lancaster, PA 17601,
and having visited the site and becoming familiar with all conditions affecting the Work, hereby
proposed to furnish everything required for the completion of the above named Work for the
above named project, all in accordance with the law at the place of the Work for the following
amount.
BASE BID: (in Words)
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
DOLLARS ($_________________________).
2.
ADDENDA
A.
The undersigned hereby acknowledges receipt of, and has included in this Proposal, the
work covered by the following Addenda.
Addendum No.
BID FORM
Date
_______________
________________
_______________
________________
_______________
________________
_______________
________________
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
003004-1
3.
TIME OF COMPLETION
A.
The undersigned agrees to, if awarded the Contract, to bring all Work under the contract
to Substantial Completion on or before the following date:
________________________________________________________________________
4.
AWARD
The undersigned agrees to, within 10 days after notice of acceptance of this bid, provide
Insurance and Bonds and either into Contract, if so notified within 90 days from the date of Bid
Opening.
Signatures: The undersigned hereby certifies that this proposal is genuine and not a sham,
collusive or fraudulent or made in the interest of or on behalf of any person, firm or corporation
not herein named; and the undersigned has not, directly or indirectly, induced or solicited and
bidder to submit a sham bid, or any other person, firm or corporation from bidding, and that the
undersigned has not, in any manner, sought by collusion to secure for himself any advantage over
any other bidder.
DATE: _____________________________________________________________, 20 _______.
SIGN HERE IF
_______________________________________
CONTRACTOR
AN INDIVIDUAL
_______________________________________
ADDRESS
_______________________________________
SIGN HERE IF
NAME: ________________________________
A PARTNERSHIP
OR CORPORATION
BY: __________________________________
ATTEST:
______________________________
(SECRETARY)
TITLE: ________________________________
ADDRESS: _____________________________
COROPORATE SEAL HERE:
** END OF SECTION **
BID FORM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
003004-2
SECTION 003100
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
“SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS TO ALL BIDDERS”
1.
All bidders shall submit their signed copy of the attached “Bidders Representation” with
their bid.
2.
The General Contractor and all subcontractors careful reading of the bidder’s representation is
imperative because by signing and submitting it with your bid figure, you will be representing
to the Owner and Architect that a) your detailed examination of the drawings and
specifications has turned up no ambiguities which need clarifications, b) only authorized data
have been used to arrive at your bid figure, and c) the experience and capabilities of your firm,
your workmen and your subcontractors are particularly well-suited to the construction of this
type of project.
3.
If you find that you are unable to sign this representation because you believe the drawings or
specifications are inadequate or erroneous in some way, please notify us at once so that
corrective action can be taken. Similarly, if your bid figure is affected by information not
contained in the construction contract documents, contact us immediately before submitting
your bid.
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
003100-1
“BIDDER’S REPRESENTATION”
By the act of submitting a bid for the proposed contract, the Bidder represents that:
1. The Bidder and all subcontractors and material suppliers the Bidder intends to use have carefully
and thoroughly reviewed the drawings, specifications and other construction documents and have
found them complete and free from ambiguities and sufficient for the purpose intended; further
that,
2. The Bidder and all workmen, employees and subcontractors the Bidder intends to use are skilled
and experienced in the type of construction represented by the construction contract documents bid
upon; further that,
3. Neither the Bidder nor any of this employees, agents, intended suppliers or subcontractors have
relied upon any verbal representations, allegedly authorized or unauthorized from the owner, or the
Owner’s employees or agents including architects, engineers or consultants, in assembling the bid
figure; and further that,
4. The bid figure is based solely upon the construction contract documents and properly issued
written addenda and not upon any other written representation.
__________________________________________________
Signature of Contracting Bidder
___________________
Date
_________________________________________________________________________________
Bidder shall type his full name and address in the space below:
** END OF SECTION **
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
003100-2
SECTION 003200
BID BOND FORM
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
BID BOND FORM
KNOW ALL MEN, That
We,_________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________
As Principal, and
____________________________________________________________________________________
_________
____________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________
(a ____________________________________ corporation authorized to transact business in
Pennsylvania, and having its principal office at _____________________________________) as Surety,
are held and firmly bound unto the County of Lancaster, State of Pennsylvania, as Obligee, in the sum of
__________________________________________ Dollars ($_____________), lawful money of the
United States of America: for payment of which we bind ourselves, and each of our respective heirs, legal
representatives, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, by these presents, on this ________ day of
_____________________ 20____.
WHEREAS, the said Principal is herewith submitting to the Obligee a proposal to perform the
_____________________________ work in connection with
____________________________________________________________________________________
____, pursuant to contract documents incorporated into said proposal by reference; and it is a condition of
the Obligee's receipt and consideration of said proposal that the proposal be accompanied by bid security to
be held by the Obligee on terms embodied herein.
THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is that if either (a) the Obligee shall not accept the
Principal's proposal nor award a contract to him, or (b) said Principal shall upon the Obligee's acceptance
of his proposal and award of a contract to him, enter into such contract and furnish performance and labor
and materialmen's bonds and insurance certificates in all respects as required by said contract documents,
within ten (10) days after notice to him of such award, then this obligation shall be void, but otherwise it
shall remain in full force, and the principal and surety will pay to the Obligee the difference between the
amount of the Principal's accepted bids and any higher amount for which the Obligee may contract for the
required work (either with the next lowest responsible bidder at that same bidding, or with the lowest
responsible bidder on any re-bidding) plus any advertising, Engineer's, legal and other expenses incurred by
the Obligee by reason of the default: provided that the surety's obligation hereunder shall not exceed the
BID BOND FORM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
003200-1
face amount of his bond.
The Surety agrees that its obligation hereunder shall be in no manner defeated or impaired by any
postponement of the advertised date for receiving bids or by any extensions by the Principal of the period
during which his proposal shall remain irrevocable and subject to acceptance by the Obligee; and the
Surety hereby waves notice of any such postponement or extension.
The principal and surety acknowledge that all references herein to the principal in singular,
masculine form, shall include the plural, feminine and neuter, as may be appropriate to the principal.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF the principal and surety, intending to be legally bound have executed
this bond the day and year of aforementioned.
(SEAL)
Witness:
(SEAL)
Witness:
(Sign as instructed on Proposal Form)
** END OF SECTION **
BID BOND FORM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
003200-2
SECTION 003300
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
INSTRUCTIONS FOR NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
1.
This Non-Collusion Affidavit is material to any contract awarded pursuant to this bid.
According to the Pennsylvania Anti bid-Rigging Act, 73 P.S. §§ 1611 et seq., governmental
agencies may require Non-Collusion Affidavits to be submitted together with bids.
2.
This Non-Collusion Affidavit must be executed by the member, officer or employee of the
bidder who makes the final decision on prices and the amount quoted in the bid.
3.
Bid rigging and other efforts to restrain competition, and the making of false sworn statements in
connection with the submission of bids are unlawful and may be subject to criminal prosecution.
The person who signs the Affidavit should examine it carefully before signing and assure
himself or herself that each statement is true and accurate, making diligent inquiry, as necessary,
of all other persons employed by or associated with the bidder with responsibilities for the
preparation, approval or submission of the bid.
4.
In the case of a bid submitted by a joint venture, each party to the venture must be identified in
the bid documents, and an Affidavit must be submitted separately on behalf of each party.
5.
The term "complementary bid" as used in the Affidavit has the meaning commonly associated
with that term in the bidding process, and includes the knowing submission of bids higher than
the bid of another firm, any intentionally high or noncompetitive bid, and any other form of bid
submitted for the purpose of giving a false appearance of competition.
6.
Failure to file an Affidavit in compliance with these instructions will result in disqualification of
the bid.
NON-COLLUSION
AFFIDAVIT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
003300-1
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
Contract/Bid No.________________
State of _________________________________:
S.S.
County of ________________________________:
I state that I am ___________________________________ of
___________________________
(Title)
(Name Contractor)
and that I am authorized to make this affidavit on behalf of my firm, and its owners, directors and
officers. I am the person responsible in my firm for the price(s) and the amount of this bid.
I state that:
(1) The price(s) and amount of this bid have been arrived at independently and without
consultation, communication or agreement with any other contractor, bidder or potential bidder.
(2) Neither the price(s) nor the amount of this bid, and neither the approximate price(s) nor the
approximate amount of this bid, have been disclosed to any other firm or person who is a bidder or
potential bidder, and they will not be disclosed before bid opening.
(3) No attempt has been made or will be made to induce any firm or person to refrain from
bidding on this contract, or to submit a bid higher than this bid, or to submit any intentionally high or
non competitive bid or other form of complementary bid.
(4) The bid of my firm is made in good faith and not pursuant to any agreement of discussion
with, or inducement from, any firm or person to submit a complimentary or other noncompetitive bid.
(5) ________________________________________________________________, its
(Name of Contractor)
affiliates, subsidiaries, officers and directors and employees are not currently under investigation by any
governmental agency and have not in the last four years been convicted or found liable for any act
prohibited by State or Federal law in any jurisdiction, involving conspiracy or collusion with respect to
bidding on any public contract, except as follows:
I state that ____________________________________________________ understands
and
(Name of Contractor)
acknowledges that the above representatives are material and important, and will be relied on by County
of Lancaster in awarding the contract(s) for which this bid is submitted. I understand and my firm
understands that any misstatement in this affidavit is and shall be treated as fraudulent concealment from
County of Lancaster of the true facts relating to the submission of bids for this contract.
A statement in this affidavit that a person has been convicted or found liable for any act, prohibited by
State or Federal law in any jurisdiction, involving conspiracy or collusion with respect to bidding on any
public contract within the last three years, does not prohibit the County of Lancaster from accepting a
bid from or awarding a contract to that person, but may be a ground for administrative suspension or
NON-COLLUSION
AFFIDAVIT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
003300-2
debarment in the discretion of the County under its rules and regulations, or may be a ground for
consideration on the question of whether the County should decline to award a contract to that person
on the basis of a lack of responsibility.
Name_______________________________________________________
Signature:____________________________________________________
Title:________________________________________________________
Name of Contractor:____________________________________________
SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED BEFORE ME
THIS ______DAY OF __________________________, 20____
___________________________________________________
Notary Public
My Commission Expires:
NON-COLLUSION
AFFIDAVIT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
003300-3
NOTARIZATIONS
Any document within this bid specification that requires a notarization must include the
signature and seal of the notary public as required by the State in which the notary is commissioned. For
those states that do not require an embossed notary seal, the following affidavit must be completed. Bids
notarized without the embossed seal and without completing the following affidavit, as applicable, will
automatically be rejected at the time of the bid opening.
AFFIDAVIT
I,_______________________________________,__________________________________
,
(Print/Type Name)
(Title)
of ________________________________________, _____________________________________,
(Name of Company)
(Complete Address)
a duly authorized representative of the above company, do hereby affirm that the
State of ______________________________ does not require an embossed seal on
(Name of State)
notarizations and the documents in this bid packet are true and correct and binding
under the _____________________________ State laws.
(Name of State)
_______________________________________________
(Name of Company)
By: _______________________________________________
Signature of Duly Authorized Representative
Sworn to and subscribed before me this ___________day of ___________________, 20__.
___________________________________________________________
Notary Public
My Commission Expires:
** END OF SECTION **
NON-COLLUSION
AFFIDAVIT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
003300-4
SECTION 003400
PUBLIC WORKS EMPLOYMENT VERIFICATION
FORM
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
INSTRUCTIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS EMPLOYMENT VERIFICATION FORM
1.
This PUBLIC WORKS EMPLOYMENT VERIFICATION FORM is material to any contract
awarded pursuant to this bid. Pennsylvania Senate Bill 637 mandates all public works contractors
(and subcontractors) enroll and use E-Verify for new hires to ensure their employees are legal to
work. Act 127 became effective January 1, 2013 for all public works contractors and
subcontractors with contracts worth $25,000 or more.
2.
This PUBLIC WORKS EMPLOYMENT VERIFICATION FORM must be executed by the
member, officer or employee of the bidder who makes the final decision on prices and the amount
quoted in the bid.
3.
Failure to file a PUBLIC WORKS EMPLOYMENT VERIFICATION FORM in accordance with
these instructions will result in disqualification of the bid.
PUBLIC WORKS EMPLOYMENT
VERIFICATION FORM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
003400-1
PUBLIC WORKS EMPLOYMENT VERIFICATION FORM
Date ___________________
Business or Organization Name (Employer) _______________________________________
Address _____________________________________________________________________
City ____________________________________ State _____________ Zip Code _________
Contractor
Subcontractor (check one)
Contracting Public Body _______________________________________________________
Contract/Project No ___________________________________________________________
Project Description ___________________________________________________________
Project Location ______________________________________________________________
As a contractor/subcontractor for the above referenced public works contract, I hereby affirm that as of
the above date, our company is in compliance with the Public Works Employment Verification Act (‘the
Act’) through utilization of the federal E-Verify Program (EVP) operated by the United States Department
of Homeland Security. To the best of my/our knowledge, all employees hired post January 1, 2013 are
authorized to work in the United States.
It is also agreed to that all public works contractors/subcontractors will utilize the federal EVP to verify the
employment eligibility of each new hire within five (5) business days of the employee start date throughout
the duration of the public works contract. Documentation confirming the use of the federal EVP upon each
new hire shall be maintained in the event of an investigation or audit.
I, __________________________, an authorized representative of the company above, attest that the
information contained in this verification form is true and correct and understand that the submission of
false or misleading information in connection with the above verification shall be subject to sanctions
provided by law.
________________________________
Authorized Representative Signature
** END OF SECTION **
PUBLIC WORKS EMPLOYMENT
VERIFICATION FORM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
003400-2
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 005000
AGREEMENT
THIS AGREEMENT made this _____________day of__________________________ between,
(Hereinafter called the Contractor, and hereinafter treated as if the singular number and neuter gender)
and the County of Lancaster (Hereinafter called the County), WITNESSETH, that the Contractor and
the County, for the considerations hereinafter named, agree as follows:
For the SUM OF
SCOPE OF WORK - The Contractor shall furnish all the materials and perform all the General
Contract work shown on drawings and described in specifications entitled: Renovations for Children &
Youth Agency and shall do everything required by this Agreement and other Contract Documents.
TIME OF COMPLETION - The plant, labor, material, and equipment to be provided under this
Contract shall commence within seven (7) days after notification by the County of the award of the
Contract, and all work shall be fully and finally completed by July 1, 2015. The Contractor shall be
liable for and shall pay to the County the sum of $500 dollars each calendar day of delay from the date
stipulated for the completion or modification in accordance with the General Conditions, until such work
is satisfactorily completed.
PAYMENTS - The County shall pay the Contractor for the services described in the Scope of
Work, subject to additions and deductions, in accordance with the unit prices or lump sum prices, as
applicable, stipulated in the proposal.
The County shall pay to the Contractor in the manner and at such times as set forth in the General
Conditions such amounts as required by the Contract Documents.
THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS shall consist of the following, all of which are part of the
Contract between the parties as though repeated herein or hereto attached:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
AGREEMENT
Advertisement
Instruction to Bidders
Proposal
Bid Bond
Non-collusion Affidavit
This Agreement
Performance Bond
Payment Bond
General Conditions
Supplemental Conditions
Prevailing Wage Rates
Detailed Technical Specifications
Attached Plans
Addenda or Bulletins (if any)
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
005000-1
REPRESENTATIONS OF CONTRACTOR
The Contractor represents and warrants:
(A) That it is financially solvent and experienced and is competent to provide the material and
perform the work.
(B) That he is familiar with all Federal, State, municipal and department laws, ordinances and
regulations, which may, in any way affect the work of those engaged herein, including but
not limited to any special acts relating to the work or the Project of which it is a part.
(C) That such temporary and permanent work required by the Contract Documents as is to be
done by him can be satisfactorily constructed and used for the purpose for which it is
intended, and that such construction will not injure any person or damage any property.
(D) That it has carefully examined the drawings, specifications, existing conditions; and that,
from his own investigation, he has satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the work,
the character, quality and quantity of surface or subsurface materials likely to be
encountered, the character of equipment and other facilities needed for the performance of
the work, the general and local conditions, and all other matters which may, in any way,
affect the work or its performance.
CONTRACTOR'S BILLS - The Contractor will, if requested, furnish the County each month
with the names and amounts of accounts of all unpaid creditors for materials or labor furnished during the
preceding month. If such accounts are not paid out of the payments received for such work, the County
may, at its option, if requested by any of the Contractor's creditors, deduct such amounts from the next
estimate due the Contractor, which amounts shall, at the option of the County, be held by the latter as the
property of the creditors, to be paid to any or all of them in such amounts and proportions as the County
may determine upon proof satisfactory to the County of the correctness of the creditor's claims.
HEIRS, ETC. - This agreement shall be binding upon all parties hereto and their respective heirs,
personal representatives, successors and assigns.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement the day and year
first above written.
__________________________________________________________________________
(Individual Principal)
WITNESS:
___________________________ (SEAL)
(Signature of Individual)
___________________________________________________________________
(Trading and doing business as)
___________________________________________________________________________
(Partnership Principal)
___________________________________
(Trading and doing business as)
AGREEMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
005000-2
WITNESS:
__________________________________
BY_____________________________(SEAL)
Partner
__________________________________
BY_____________________________(SEAL)
Partner
__________________________________
BY____________________________(SEAL)
Partner
______________________________________________________________
___________________________________
(Name of Corporation)
ATTEST
BY:________________________________
(President/Vice President)
_______________________________
(Secretary/Assistant Secretary)
or (if appropriate)
___________________________________
(Name of Corporation)
WITNESS:
_______________________________
*BY:_________________________________
(Authorized Representative)
*Attach appropriate proof, dated as of the same date as the Bond, evidencing authority to execute in
behalf of the Corporation.
COUNTY
Lancaster County Commissioners
Witness Seal
_______________________________________
(Signature) Dennis Stuckey, Chairman
_______________________________________
(Signature) Scott Martin, Vice Chairman
_______________________________________
(Signature) Craig Lehman
AGREEMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
005000-3
SECTION 006100
PERFORMANCE BOND
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
COUNTY OF LANCASTER, PENNSYLVANIA
PERFORMANCE BOND
KNOW BY THESE PRESENTS, that
as Principal,
hereinafter called Contractor, and
a
(corporation/partnership) organized and existing under the laws of the State of
, as Surety, hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the County of Lancaster,
Pennsylvania, as Obligee, in the amount of
Dollars ($
),
lawful money of the United States of America, for the payment whereof Surety and Principal bind
themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by
these presents.
WHEREAS, Contractor has by written agreement dated
, 20
entered into a Contract or proposal with Obligee for
which contract or proposal is by reference made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the
Contract.
,
NOW, THEREFORE, the terms and conditions of this Bond are and shall be that if: (A) the
Principal well, truly and faithfully shall comply with and shall perform the Contract (and all alterations
thereof) in accordance with the Contract Documents (as defined in the Contract), and if the Principal shall
satisfy all claims and demands incurred in or related to the performance of the Contract by the Principal
or the Principal's subcontractors as its or their agents or employees or growing out of the performance of
the Contract, and if the Principal shall indemnify completely and shall save harmless the Obligee and all
of its officers, agents and employees from any and all costs and damages which the Obligee and/as or all
of its officers, agents and employees may sustain or suffer by reason of the failure of the Principal to do
so, and if the Principal shall reimburse completely and shall pay to the Obligee any and all costs and
expenses which the Obligee and/as any or all of its officers, agents and employees may sustain or suffer
by reason of the failure of the Principal to do so, and if the Principal shall reimburse completely and shall
pay to the Obligee any and all costs and expenses which the Obligee and/as any or all of its officers,
agents and employees may incur by reason of any such default or failure of the Principal; and (B) if the
Principal shall remedy, without cost to the Obligee, any work not in accordance with the Contract
Documents and all defects which may develop during the period of one (1) year from the date of
completion by the Principal and acceptance of the Obligee of the work to be performed under the
Contract in accordance with the Contract Documents, which defects, in the sole judgment of the Obligee
or its legal successors in interest, shall be caused by or shall result from defective or inferior materials,
then this Bond shall be void; otherwise, this Bond shall be and shall remain in force and effect.
The Principal and the Surety agree that any alterations, changes and/or additions to the Contract
Documents, and/or additions to the work to be performed under the Contract in accordance with the
Contract Documents, and/or any alterations, changes and/or additions to the Contract, and/or any giving
by the Obligee of any extensions of time for the performance of the Contract in accordance with the
Contract Documents, and/or any forbearance of either the Principal or the Obligee toward the other with
respect to the Contract Documents and the Contract and/or the reduction of any percentage to be retained
by the Obligees as permitted by the Contract Documents and by the Contract shall not release in any
PERFORMANCE BOND
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
006100-1
manner whatsoever, the Principal and the Surety, or either of them, or their heirs, executors,
administrators, successors and assigns, from liability and obligations under this Bond; and the Surety, for
value received, does waive notice of any such alterations, changes, additions, extensions of time, acts of
forbearance and/or reduction of retained percentage.
If the Principal is a foreign corporation (incorporated under any laws other than those of the
Commonwealth of Pennsylvania) then further terms and conditions of this Bond are and shall be that the
Principal or the Surety shall not be discharged from liability on this Bond, nor this Bond surrendered until
such Principal files with the Obligee a certificate from the Pennsylvania Department of Revenue
evidencing the payment in full of all bonus taxes, penalties and interest, and a certificate from the Bureau
of Employment and Unemployment Compensation of the Pennsylvania Department of Labor and
Industry, evidencing the payment of all unemployment compensation, contributions, penalties and interest
due the Commonwealth from said Principal or any foreign corporation or subcontractor thereunder or for
which liability has accrued but the time for payment has not arrived, all in accordance with provisions of
the Act of June 10, 1947; P.L. 493 of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania.
Every provision of said act applicable to said Contract and this Bond is incorporated herein by
reference thereto.
IN WITNESS THEREOF, the Principal and the Surety cause this Bond to be signed, sealed and
delivered this
day of
, 20
.
Principal
By
(SEAL)
Witness
Surety
By
Witness
PERFORMANCE BOND
(SEAL)
Officer or Attorney-in-FACT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
006100-2
SECTION 006200
PAYMENT BOND
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
COUNTY OF LANCASTER
PAYMENT BOND
(Labor and Material Bond)
, as
Know all men by these presents, that
principal, hereinafter called "Principal" and
a (corporation/partnership) organized and existing under the laws of the State of
, as Surety,
hereinafter called "Surety," are held and firmly bound unto the County of Lancaster, Pennsylvania, as
Obligee, for the use and benefit of claimants as herein below defined, in the amount of
dollars ($
).
WHEREAS, Principal has by written agreement or proposal dated
into a contract or proposal with Obligee for
which contract is by reference made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the Contract.
entered
Now, therefore, the terms and conditions of this Bond are and shall be that if the Principal and all
subcontractors of the Principal to whom any portion of the work under the Contract shall be subcontracted
and if all Assignees of the Principal and of all such subcontractors, promptly shall pay or shall cause to be
paid, in full, all money which may be due any claimant supplying labor or materials in the prosecution
and performance of the work in accordance with the Contract and in accordance with the Contract
Documents, including any amendment, extension or addition to the Contract and/or to the Contract
Documents, for material furnished or labor supplied or labor performed, then this Bond shall be void;
otherwise, this Bond shall be and shall remain in full force and effect.
The Principal and the Surety agree that any alterations, changes and/or additions to the Contract
Documents, and/or any alterations, changes and/or additions to the work to be performed under the
Contract in accordance with the Contract Documents, and/or any alterations, changes and/or additions to
the Contract, and/or any giving by the Obligee of any extensions of time for the performance of the
Contract in accordance with the Contract Documents, and/or any act of forebearance of either the
Principal or the Obligee toward the other with respect to the Contract Documents and the Contract, and/or
the reduction of any percentage to be retained by the Obligee as permitted by the Contract Documents and
by the Contract, shall not release, in any manner whatsoever, the Principal and the Surety, or either of
them, or their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, from liability and obligations under
this Bond; and the Surety, for the value received, does waive notice of any such alterations, changes,
additions, extensions of time, acts of forebearance and/or reduction of retained percentage.
If the Principal is a foreign corporation (incorporated under any laws other than those of the
Commonwealth of Pennsylvania) then further terms and conditions of this Bond are and shall be that the
Principal or the Surety shall not be discharged from liability on this Bond, nor this Bond surrendered until
such Principal files with the Obligee a certificate from the Pennsylvania Department of Revenue
evidencing the payment in full of all bonus taxes, penalties and interest, and a certificate from the Bureau
of Employment and Unemployment Compensation of the Pennsylvania Department of Labor and
Industry, evidencing the payment of all unemployment compensation, contributions, penalties and interest
PAYMENT BOND
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
006200-1
due the Commonwealth thereunder or for which liability has accrued but the time for payment has not
arrived, all in accordance with provisions of the Act of June 10, 1947, P.L. 493, of the Commonwealth of
Pennsylvania.
In Witness whereof, the Principal and this Surety cause this Bond to be signed, sealed and
delivered this
day of
, 20
.
Principal
By:
(Witness)
Surety
PAYMENT BOND
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
006200-2
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 006500
PREVAILING WAGE RATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
The following forms (included at the end of Part 3) contain Wage Rates which will govern for
this project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
**END OF SECTION**
PREVAILING WAGE
RATES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
006500 - 1
! "#"$%&&
!"#$"#
%&$"'(!
#$"
'$ +
,
'$(
)*
&
'(
)**
!
-
)
*+
,
'
-
&
!,/
01
*)
-.*
-.
-.*
!,/
01
*
-.))
-).))
-.*
!,/
01
-.
-.
-.*
!,/
01
-.
-.
-.*
!,/
01
*
-.
-.)*
-.*
&12&&"
'/
'
3
4
015
&12&&"
'/
'
3
4
015
&12&&"
'/
'
3
4
015
&12&&"
'/
'
3
4
015
&12&&"
'/
'
3
4
015
&1
-.
-.
-).
-.
-*.
-.
-.)
-*.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-).
-*.
&1
-.*
-.)
-*.
&1
-).*
-.
-*.)
&1
-).
-.
-*.
&1
-.*
-.)
-.)
"1#'63'(
'
1'
"1#'63'(
'
1'
-.
-.
-.
-.)
-.*
-*.
(
)
! "#"$%&&
-
)
*+
,
'
-
&
"1#'63'(
'
1'
"1#'63'(
'
1'
4'7#8+'9&'
/&3'$'69
$#
4'7#8+'9&'
/&3'$'69
$#
4'7#8+'9&'
/&3'$'69
$#
4'7#8+'9&'
/&3'$'69
$#
4'7#8+'9&'
/&3'$'69
$#
4'7#8+'9&'
/&3'$'69
$#
4'7#8+'9&'
/&3'$'69
$#
&9
-.
-.)
-*.)
*
-.*
-.
-.
*)
-.
-.
-.
*
-.*
-.
-*.)
*
-.
-.
-.
*
-*.)*
-.
-.)
*
-*.))
-.
-.
*
-.)
-.)
-.)
*
-.
-.
-.
-*.
-.
-.)
&9
-*.*
-.
-*.
7"1,
'(
7
-.
-.
-.
7"1,
'(
7
-.
-.
-.
7"1,
'(
7
-.)
-.
-.
7"1,
'(
7
-.
-.
-.*
7#89
-.
-.
-.
7#89
-.
-.
-.
:"
"$
&
*
-.)
-).
-.
:"
"$
&
*
-.*)
-.
-*.
:"
"$
&
*
-.*
-.))
-*.
:"
"$
&
*
-*.*
-.
-**.
:"
"
-.*
-).
-.
:"
"
-.
-).)
-.)
:"
"
-.*
-).)*
-.)
:"
-.
-.
-).
(
6
;&,<
! "#"$%&&
-
)
*+
,
'
-
&
:"
-).)
-.)
-*.**
:"
-.
-.
-*.
:"
-.)
-*.*
-*.
:=2>:!44
"
"5
%?
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.)
%?
-.*
-.
-.)
%?
-.*
-.
-.)
%?
-*.
-.
-.)
/012
'6"6'
@&'("'
"
5
/012
'6"6'
@&'("'
"
5
/012
'6"6'
@&'("'
"
5
/012
'6"6'
@&'("'
"
5
$,265
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-).)
-.
$,265
-.
-).*)
-).)
$,265
-.
-.)
-.
$,265
-.
-.)
-.
$,265
-.
-.
-.)
$,265
-.
-.
-.)
$,265
-.
-.
-.
$,265
*
-.)
-.)
-.*
$,265
-.
-).)
-.
$,265
-.
-).*)
-.)
$,265
-.
-.)
-.
$,265
-.
-.)
-.
$,265
-.
-.
-.)
$,265
-.
-.
-.)
$,265
-.
-.
-.
$,265
*
-.)
-.)
-.*
$,265
-.)
-).)
-.
$,265
-.
-).*)
-.
(
6
;&,<
! "#"$%&&
-
)
*+
,
'
-
&
$,265
-.
-.)
-.
$,265
-.
-.*
-.)
$,265
-.
-.
-.
$,265
-.)
-.
-.
$,265
-.
-.
-.
$,265
*
-.
-.)
-*.
$,265
-.
-).)
-.*
$,265
-.
-).*)
-.
$,265
-.
-.)
-.
$,265
-.
-.*
-.)
$,265
-.
-.
-.*
$,265
-.
-.
-.*
$,265
-.
-.
-*.
$,265
*
-.
-.)
-.
$,265
-.
-).
-.
$,265
-.
-).*)
-.
$,265
-.
-.)
-.
$,265
-.
-.*
-.)
$,265
-.
-.
-.
$,265
-.)
-.
-*.
$,265
-.
-.
-.
$,265
*
-.
-.)
-).
$,2*65
-.
-.)
-.
$,2*65
-.
-.)
-.
$,2*65
-.
-.
-.)
$,2*65
-.
-.
-.)
$,2*65
-.
-.
-.
$,2*65
*
-.)
-.)
-.*
3
8
-).
-.
-.
3
8
-.
-.*
-.
3
8
-.
-.*
-*.
(
6
;&,<
! "#"$%&&
-
)
*+
,
'
-
&
3
8
-.*
-.
-.
3
8
-.
-*.
-.
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
-.
-*.)
-*.
-.*
-.)
-).*
-.*
-).)
-.
-.*
-.
-.
-.*
-.*
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.*
-.
-.
-.
-).
-.
-.
-.
-.)
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-*.*
-.
-.
-).
-.
-*.)
-.
-.
-.
-).
-.
-).
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.)
-.)
-).)*
-.
-).
-.*
-.
-.
-.*
-.
-.)
-.)*
-.
-.
-*.*
-.**
-.
-.**
-*.
-.
-.*
(
6
;&,<
! "#"$%&&
-
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'*
6;5
@42
+#'*
6;5
@42
+#'*
6;5
@42
+#'*
6;5
@42
+#'*
6;5
@42
+#'*
6;5
@42
+#'!
6;5
@42
+#'!
6;5
@42
+#'!
6;5
(*
)
*+
,
'
-
&
-.
-*.
-.*
-).)
-.
-*.*
-).)
-.
-).*
-).)
-.
-.*
-.
-.
-.*
-.)
-.*
-.*
-*.
-*.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-).
-*.*
-.
-.
-).
-).
-.
-.
-.*
-.
-.
-.
-*.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-).)
-*.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-).
-.*
-.
-).
-.
-*.)
-.
-*.
-.)
-.
-*.
-).)
-.
-*.
-.)
-*.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.)
-.*)
-*.
-.
-.
-).
-.
-*.
6
;&,<
! "#"$%&&
-
)
*+
,
'
-
&
@42
+#'!
6;5
@42
+#'!
6;5
@42
+#'!
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
@42
+#'
6;5
(
25
-).
-.*
-*.*
-).
-.
-*.*
-.
-.*
-*.
-.*
-.
-.
-*.*
-.
-*.)
-).
-.
-.
-).
-.*
-*.)
-).
-.*
-*.)
-).)
-.
-*.)
-.
-.
-.
(
25
-.
-.
-.)
(
25
-.
-.
-.
(
25
-.
-.
-*.
(
25
-.
-.
-*.)
(
25
-.
-.)
-.
(
25
-).
-.
-.
(
25
-.
-.
-.
(
25
-.
-.
-.)
(
25
-.
-.
-.
(
7
7
2
'+#'
+
8#5
(
7
7
2
'+#'
+
8#5
(
7
7
2
'+#'
+
8#5
(
7
7
2
'+#'
+
8#5
(
7
7
2
'+#'
+
8#5
(
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-*.*
-.
-.
-).
-*.)
-.*
-.))
-.)
-.
-*.)
-.
-.)
-.
(
-.)
-.
-.
(&,6&
-.
-.*
-.)
(&,6&
-.
-.*
-*.
(
6
;&,<
! "#"$%&&
-
)
*+
,
'
-
&
2&4
5
-.
-).
-.
2&4
5
-.
-).*
-*.)
26
'6'=
5
-.
-*.
-.
26
'6'=
5
-.
-.
-.)
6301
*
-.)
-.
-*.
6301
*
-.)
-.
-*.
6301
*
-.
-.)
-*.
6
31+
-.
-.
-.*
6
31+
-.
-*.
-.
64
1
-.)
-.*
-.
64
1
-.
-).
-.)
64
1
-.)
-).
-.*
64
1
-.)
-).*
-.)
64
1
-.
-).*
-.)*
64
1
-.
-).)
-.
64
1
-.
-.
-.
64
1
-.*
-.
-.)
64
1
-.*
-.
-.)
64
1
-.
-.*
-.*
=??9
-.
-.)
-.
=??9
-.
-.
-.*
=??6
-).
-.
-.
=??6
-).*
-).
-*.*)
=
3,9
-.*
-.
-.
=
3,9
-.
-.
-).
=
3,9
-.
-.
-).)
=
3,9
*
-*.
-.*
-.
=
3,$#
-.)
-.
-.
=
3,$#
-.
-.*)
-.
=
3,$#
-).
-.
-.
=
3,$#
*
-).*
-.
-.)
()
6
;&,<
! "#"$%&&
-
)
*+
,
'
-
&
="1
"25
-.)
-.
-.)
="1
"25
-.
-.
-.
="1
"25
-.)
-.
-.)
="1
"25
-.*
-.
-.*
="1
"25
-.)
-.
-.)
="1
"25
-.
-.
-.
="1
"25
-.
-.
-.
="1
"25
-.
-.
-.
="1
"25
-.
-.
-.
(
6
;&,<
! "#"$%&&
,).,(
)
*+
,
'
-
&
4
-.
-.)*
-.*
4
-.)
-.)
-*.)
4
-.
-.
-).*
4
-.)
-.)
-.*
4
-.
-.)
-.*
4
-).
-.
-.*
$,265
-).*
-.
-.
$,265
-).**
-.*
-.
$,265
-.
-.
-.
$,265
-.)
-.
-.)
$,265
-.
-.))
-.
$,265
-.
-.)
-*.
$,265
-.
-.
-.
$,265
-.)
-.
-).)
$,265
-.)
-.*
-.
$,265
-.)
-.
-.
$,265
-.)
-.
-.)*
$,265
-.)
-.))
-.*
$,265
-.
-.)
-.
$,265
-.
-.
-.
$,265
-.
-.
-.)
$,265
-.
-.*
-*.*
$,265
-.)
-.
-).*
$,265
-.)
-.
-.
$,265
-.
-.))
-.*
$,265
-.)
-.)
-.*
$,265
-.*
-.
-.*
$,265
-.
-.
-*.*
$,265
-.*
-.*
-.
$,265
-.
-.
-).
$,265
-.)
-.
-.))
(
6
;&,<
! "#"$%&&
,).,(
)
*+
,
'
-
&
$,265
-.
-.))
-.)
$,265
-.
-.)
-.
$,265
-.
-.
-.
$,265
-.
-.
-*.)
$,265
-.
-.*
-.)
$,265
-.)
-.
-.)
$,2*65
-.
-.
-.
$,2*65
-.)
-.))
-.
$,2*65
-.
-.)
-.
$,2*65
-.*
-.
-.
$,2*65
-.
-.
-*.
$,2*65
-.
-.*
-.
$,2*65
-.*
-.
-).*
$,265
-.*
-.
-.
$,265
-.
-.))
-.
$,265
-.**
-.)
-.
$,265
-.
-.
-.
$,265
-.
-.
-*.
$,265
-.
-.*
-.*
$,265
-.
-.
-).)
$,2)65
-.
-.
-.
$,2)65
-.
-.))
-.
$,2)65
-.
-.)
-.
$,2)65
-.
-.
-.
$,2)65
-.)
-.
-.
$,2)65
-.)
-.*
-).
$,2)65
-.
-.
-.
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
-.
-*.
-.
-).
-.*
-*.
-.
-).*
-).
(
6
;&,<
! "#"$%&&
,).,(
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
(
)
*+
,
'
-
&
-.
-.
-.*
-.
-.*
-.)
-.)
-.
-.
-.
-*.)
-*.*)
-.
-.
-).)
-.
-).
-.)
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.)
-.*
-.
-.
-*.
-.*
-.
-.*
-*.
-.
-).
-.
-*.)
-).
-.
-).)
-).
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.)
-.)
-.
-.
-*.
-*.
-.*
-).
-.
-.
-).
-).
-.)
-).
-.
-).
-).
-.)
-.*)
-.
-.*
-.
-*.*
-*.
-.
-.*
-.
-.
-.
-).)
-*.*
-.
-.
-.)
6
;&,<
! "#"$%&&
,).,(
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'*6
;5
@42+
8#'*6
;5
@42+
8#'*6
;5
@42+
8#'*6
;5
@42+
8#'*6
;5
@42+
8#'*6
;5
@42+
8#'*!6
;5
@42+
8#'*!6
;5
@42+
8#'*!6
;5
@42+
8#'*!6
;5
@42+
8#'*!6
;5
@42+
8#'*!6
;5
@42+
8#'!6
;5
@42+
8#'!6
;5
@42+
8#'!6
;5
@42+
8#'!6
;5
@42+
8#'!6
;5
@42+
8#'!6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
(
)
*+
,
'
-
&
-).
-.
-.
-.*
-.
-.
-.
-*.
-.
-.
-.
-.*
-.
-).*
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.
-).
-.*
-*.*
-.
-.
-.
-*.
-.
-).
-).*
-.
-.
-.
-.
-.)
-.
-.*
-.)
-.
-.
-.
-*.*
-.)
-.)
-.*
-.)
-).)
-.*
-.
-.
-.)
-.)
-.)
-.*
-.)
-.
-.
-.
-).*
-.*
-.
-.
-.
-*.
-.)
-*.
-*.
-.)
-).)
-*.
-.
-.)
-*.
-.))
-*.
-.
-).
-.)
6
;&,<
! "#"$%&&
,).,(
)
*+
,
'
-
&
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
@42+
8#'6
;5
(
-.
-.
-.
-.*
-.
-.
-.*
-.)*
-*.
-.*
-.
-).
-.
-.*
-.
-.
-.)*
-.*
(
-.)
-.)
-*.)
(
-.
-.
-).*
6&
2+#+
8#%
7
,
5
6&
2+#+
8#%
7
,
5
6&
2+#+
8#%
7
,
5
6&
2+#+
8#%
7
,
5
="1
"25
-.
-*.
-*.*
-.)
-*.)*
-*.
-*.
-.
-*.
-.
-).)
-**.
-.)
-.
-.)
="1
"25
-.
-.
-.
="1
"25
-.)
-.
-.)
="1
"25
-.*
-.
-.*
="1
"25
-.)
-.
-.)
="1
"25
-.
-.
-.
="1
"25
-.
-.
-.
="1
"25
-.
-.
-.
="1
"25
-.
-.
-.
(
6
;&,<
! "#"$%&&
,).,(
)
*+
,
'
-
&
/#"
"
"
+#+
8#4
"
"
.
=$,$8&4
"4
(#
A#4$,;"
#B
14&&&8.= $,; 1 8,
4
1,
"&
#8
"&""
#
4
"
8
"#
?. C;"
(&
C
9
&
""
#4
8
$,/#0,
.%888.
..4.'"84
",C$,$8&4
"C
"
"14
".="8&"
"1C(
0C
1.
(
6
;&,<
SECTION 007000
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
GENERAL CONDITIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
The General Conditions included as part of these Contract Documents are specific to
the County of Lancaster.
Article 1 - Definitions ............... ........................ ........................ ........................ ............. 2
Article 2 - Preliminary Matters…………………………………..……….. ................ ............. 5
Article 3 - Contract Documents: Intent, Amending, Reuse Intent .................. ............. 7
Article 4 - Availability of Lands; Physical Conditions; Reference Points…….. ............. 8
Article 5 - Bonds and Insurance ……………….......................... ........................ .. …….. 11
Article 6 - Contractor's Responsibilities.......... ........................ ........................ ........... 13
Article 7 - Other Work.............. ........................ ........................ ........................ ............ 21
Article 8 - (deleted) .. ............... ........................…………………………………….............. 22
Article 9 - Architect's Status During Construction................... ........................ ............ 22
Article 10 - Changes in the Work ..................... ........................ ........................ ............ 25
Article 11 - Change of Contract Price .............. ........................ ........................ ............ 26
Article 12 - Change of Contract Time............... ........................ ........................ ............ 26
Article 13 - Warranty and Guarantee; Tests and Inspections; Correction,
Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work..... ........................ ............ 28
Article 14 - Payments to Contractor and Completion .............. ........................ ............ 31
Article 15 - Suspension of Work and Termination ................... ........................ ............ 35
Article 16 - Miscellaneous ....... ........................ ........................ ........................ ............ 36
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE 1 - Definitions
Wherever numerical references used in these General Conditions, references the paragraph of these
General Conditions.
Wherever used in these General Conditions, or in the Contract Documents, the following terms have the
meanings indicated and are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof:
Addenda - Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct or
change the bidding documents as specified by the Addenda.
Agreement - The written agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR covering the Work to be
performed, including all Contract Documents attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof.
Application for Payment - The form specified by ARCHITECT to be used by CONTRACTOR in
requesting progress or final payments and shall include such supporting documentation as is required by
the Contract Documents.
Architect – Refers to all Design Professionals associated with this Project, i.e. ARCHITECT,
MECHANICAL ENGINEER, ELECTRICAL ENGINEER, etc.
Architect’s Supplemental Instructions (ASI) - AIA Document G710 – 1992. Additional information
supplied by the ARCHITECT to the Contractor for work included in the contract documents or for minor
changes to the work and for which no contract time or price is changed. Architect’s Supplemental
Instructions has the same meaning as Field Order described in this Article.
Bid - The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the
Work to be performed.
Bonds - Bid, performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security.
Change Order - AIA Document G-701-2001. A document recommended by ARCHITECT and signed
by CONTRACTOR and OWNER authorizing an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an
adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time, issued on or after the Effective Date of the
Agreement.
Construction Change Directive (CCD) - AIA Document G714 – 2001. Also see ‘Work Change
Directive’. A document which when signed by both OWNER and ARCHITECT places responsibility for
an immediate change adjustment to the Work on the CONTRACTOR. The contract time and pricing
method is typically included; the CCD requires the CONTRACTOR to commence with the Work in
advance of an agreed upon cost or extension of time. The Work will typically be followed by a Change
Order upon agreement of terms. Construction Change Directive has the same meaning as Work Change
Directive described in this Article.
Contract Documents - The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents).
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-2
CONTRACTOR's Bid including documentation accompanying the Bid and any post-Bid documentation
submitted prior to the Notice of Award when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Bonds, these
General Conditions, the Supplemental Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings as the same are
more specifically identified in the Agreement, together with all amendments, modifications and
supplements issued pursuant to paragraphs 3.4 and 3.5 on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement,
and other documents as specifically listed.
Contract Price - The amount payable by OWNER to CONTRACTOR as agreed upon and set forth in the
Contract Documents.
Contract Time - The Number of days (computed as provided in paragraphs 12.1.1 through 12.1.4.) or the
date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the work.
CONTRACTOR - The person, firm or corporation with whom OWNER has entered into the Agreement.
County Engineer – OWNER’s designated representative.
Defective - An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory,
faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents, or does not meet the requirements of
any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been
damaged prior to ARCHITECT’s recommendation of final payment (unless responsibility for the
protection thereof has been assumed by OWNER at Substantial completion in accordance with paragraph
14.7).
Drawings - The drawings which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which
have been prepared or approved by ARCHITECT and OWNER and are referred to in the Contract
Documents.
Effective Date of the Agreement - The date indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes effective,
but, if no such date is indicated, it means the date on which the Agreement is signed and delivered by the
last of the two parties to sign and deliver.
Field Order - A written order issued by ARCHITECT which orders minor changes in the Work in
accordance with paragraph 9.4 but which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or the Contract
Time. Field Order has the same meaning as Architect’s Supplemental Instructions described in this
section.
General Requirements - Non-technical specification sections of the Contract Documents.
Laws and Regulations/Laws or Regulations - Laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and/or orders.
Liquidated Damages - A stipulated price per day paid by the CONTRACTOR to the OWNER for
substantiated loss by the OWNER based on OWNER’s actual and reasonable cost for loss due to
consequential damages if the Project is not completed by the scheduled date for Substantial Completion.
Notice of Award - The written notice by OWNER or ARCHITECT to the apparent successful bidder
stating that upon compliance by the apparent successful bidder with the conditions precedent enumerated
therein, within the time specified, OWNER will sign and deliver the Agreement.
Notice to Proceed - A written notice given by OWNER or ARCHITECT to CONTRACTOR fixing the
date on which the Contract Time will commence to run and on which CONTRACTOR shall start to
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-3
perform CONTRACTOR's obligations under the Contract Documents.
OWNER - The County of Lancaster (acting through the County Commissioners or designated
representative).
Partial Utilization - Placing a portion of the Work in service for the purpose for which it is intended (or a
related purpose) before reaching Substantial Completion for all the Work.
Project - The total construction of which the Work to be performed under the Contract Documents may
be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
Request For Information (RFI) - AIA Document G716 – 2004 (or equivalent Owner’s or Architect’s
format that may be attached). A written request or question from any party pursuant to the work of any or
all other parties relating to a clarification to the Contract Documents or work site conditions. A proposed
solution may be included as well as cost and/or schedule considerations.
Request For Proposal (RFP) - Also see ‘Work Change Proposal Request’.
Shop Drawings - All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically
prepared by or for CONTRACTOR to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures,
standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a
Supplier and submitted by CONTRACTOR to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the
Work.
Specifications - Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of
materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work and
certain administrative details applicable thereto.
Subcontractor - An individual, firm or corporation having a direct contract with CONTRACTOR or with
any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the work at the site.
Substantial Completion - The Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where, in
the opinion of ARCHITECT and OWNER, as evidenced by ARCHITECT’s definitive certificate of
Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that
the work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended; or if there be no such
certificate issued, when final payment is due in accordance with paragraph 14.11. The terms
"substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to any Work refer to Substantial
Completion thereof.
Supplemental Conditions - The part of the Contract Documents which amends or supplements these
General Conditions.
Supplier - A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman or vendor.
Underground Facilities - All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or
other such facilities or attachments and any encasements containing such facilities which have been
installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, gases, steam,
liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage
removal, traffic or other control systems, or water.
Unit Price Work - Work to be paid for on a price per unit basis.
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-4
Work - The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to
be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work is the result of performing services, furnishing labor
and furnishing and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, all as required by the
Contract Documents.
Work Change Directive - A written directive to CONTRACTOR, issued on or after the Effective Date
of the Agreement and signed by OWNER and recommended by ARCHITECT, ordering an addition,
deletion or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which
the Work is to be performed as provided in paragraph 4.2 or 4.3 or to emergencies under paragraph 6.22.
A Work Change Directive may not change the Contract Price or the Contract Time but is evidence that
the parties expect that the change directed or documented by a Work Change Directive will be
incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect,
if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Time as provided in paragraph 10.2. Work Change Directive has
the same meaning as Construction Change Directive described in this Article.
Work Change Proposal Request (WCPR) - AIA Document G709 - 2001. A document issued by
ARCHITECT requesting CONTRACTOR submit an itemized cost proposal for proposed modifications
to the Contract Documents identified in the proposal request. (A Work Change Proposal Request is not a
directive to proceed with the work described in the proposed modifications as is a Construction Change
Directive.) Acceptance of CONTRACTOR's proposal will typically be followed by a Change Order upon
agreement of terms.
Written Amendment - A written amendment of the Contract Documents, signed by OWNER and
CONTRACTOR on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and normally dealing with the nonengineering or non-technical, rather than strictly Work-related, aspects of the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 2 - Preliminary Matters
Delivery of Bonds:
2.1
When CONTRACTOR delivers the executed Agreements to OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall
also deliver to OWNER such Bonds as CONTRACTOR may be required to furnish in
accordance with paragraph 5.1 and the Contract Documents and a Certificate of required
Insurance in accordance with paragraphs 5.3 and 5.4 and the Contract Documents.
Copies of Documents:
2.2
OWNER shall furnish to CONTRACTOR up to four copies (unless otherwise specified in the
Supplemental Conditions) of the Contract Documents as are reasonably necessary for the
execution of the Work. Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of
reproduction.
Commencement of Contract Time; Notice to Proceed:
2.3
The Contract Time will commence to run on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A
Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within thirty (30) days after the Effective Date of the
Agreement.
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-5
Starting the Project:
2.4
CONTRACTOR shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Time commences
to run, but no Work shall be done at the site prior to the date on which the Contract Time
commences to run.
Before Starting Construction:
2.5
Before undertaking each part of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall carefully study and compare
the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable
field measurements. CONTRACTOR shall promptly report in writing to ARCHITECT any
conflict, error or discrepancy which CONTRACTOR may discover and shall obtain a written
interpretation or clarification from ARCHITECT before proceeding with any Work affected
thereby.
2.6
Within ten (10) days after the Effective Date of the Agreement (unless otherwise specified in the
General Requirements), CONTRACTOR shall submit to ARCHITECT and OWNER for review:
2.6.1
An estimated Construction Progress Schedule indicating the starting and completion dates of the
various stages of the Work;
2.6.2
A preliminary Schedule of Shop Drawing Submissions; and
2.6.3
A preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the Work which will include quantities and prices of
items aggregating the Contract Price and will subdivide the Work into component parts in
sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during construction. Such prices will
include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work which will
be confirmed in writing by CONTRACTOR at the time of submission.
Preconstruction Conference:
2.7
Before CONTRACTOR starts the Work at the site, a conference attended by
CONTRACTOR(s), ARCHITECT, OWNER and others as appropriate will be held to discuss
the schedules referred to in paragraph 2.6, to discuss procedures for handling Shop Drawings and
other submittals and for processing Applications for Payment, and to establish a working
understanding among the parties as to the Work.
Finalizing Schedules:
2.8
At least ten (10) days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference
attended by CONTRACTOR(s), ARCHITECT, OWNER and others as appropriate will be held to
finalize schedules submitted in accordance with paragraph 2.6.
2.8.1
The finalized Construction Progress Schedule, as approved, will be acceptable to ARCHITECT
and OWNER as providing an orderly progression of the Work to completion within the Contract
Time, but such acceptance will neither impose on ARCHITECT or OWNER, responsibility for
the progress or scheduling of the Work nor relieve CONTRACTOR from full responsibility
therefore.
2.8.2
The finalized Schedule of Shop Drawing Submissions, as approved, will be acceptable to
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-6
2.8.3
ARCHITECT and OWNER as providing a workable arrangement for processing the submissions.
The finalized Schedule of Values, as approved, will be acceptable to ARCHITECT and OWNER
as to form and substance.
ARTICLE 3 - Contract Documents: Intent, Amending, Reuse Intent:
3.1
3.1.1
The Contract Documents comprise the entire agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR
concerning the Work. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is
as binding as if called for by all. The Contract Documents will be construed in accordance with
the law of the place of the Project. By executing the Agreement, the CONTRACTOR represents
that he has visited the site, familiarized himself with the local conditions under which the Work
is to be performed, accepted all conditions, correlated his observations with the requirements of
the Contract Documents, and understands the sequencing of Work and staggered nature of the
Work.
Should any temporary or incidental work or materials be necessary for the proper carrying out of
the intent of the Specifications or Drawings, either directly or indirectly, the CONTRACTOR
agrees to perform all such Work and furnish and install all such materials as if the same were
fully specified.
3.2
It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project (or part
thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents and to include all labor,
material, equipment and other items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the
work. When words which have a well-known technical or trade meaning are used to describe
Work, materials, or equipment, such words shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning.
Reference to standard specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or
association, or to the Laws or Regulations of any governmental authority, whether such reference
be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual, code or Laws
or Regulations in effect at the time of opening Bids (or, on the Effective Date of the Agreement
if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated. However, no provision of
any referenced standard specification, manual, or code (whether or not specifically incorporated
by reference in the Contract Documents) shall be effective to change the duties and
responsibilities of OWNER, CONTRACTOR or ARCHITECT, or any of their consultants,
agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents, nor shall it be effective to
assign to ARCHITECT or OWNER or any of ARCHITECT’s or OWNER's consultants, agents
or employees, any duty or authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the
Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of the
Contract Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be
issued by ARCHITECT as provided in paragraph 9.3.
3.3
If, during the performance of the Work, CONTRACTOR finds a conflict, error or discrepancy in
the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall so report to ARCHITECT in writing, before
proceeding with the Work affected thereby, shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification
from ARCHITECT, and shall include all labor, material, equipment and other items necessary
for the proper execution and completion of the Work.
Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents:
3.4
The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions and revisions in the
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-7
3.4.1
Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof in one or more of the following ways:
A formal Written Amendment:
3.4.2
A Change Order (pursuant to paragraph 10.4.1); or
3.4.3
A Work Change Directive (pursuant to paragraph 10.1).
3.4.4
A Construction Change Directive (pursuant to paragraph 10.1).
As stated in paragraph 11.2 and 12.1, Contract Price and Contract Time may only be changed by
a Change Order or a Written Amendment.
3.5
In addition, the requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented, and minor
variations and deviations in the Work may be authorized in one or more of the following ways:
3.5.1
A Field Order (pursuant to paragraph 9.4);
3.5.2
ARCHITECT’s approval of a Shop Drawing or sample (pursuant to paragraphs 6.26 and 6.27);
or
3.5.3
ARCHITECT’s written interpretation or clarification (pursuant to paragraph 9.3).
Reuse of Documents:
3.6
Neither CONTRACTOR nor any Subcontractor or Supplier or other person or organization
performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with OWNER shall
have or acquire any title to, or ownership rights in, any of the Drawings, Specifications or other
documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of ARCHITECT; and they
shall not reuse any of them on extensions of the Project or any other project without written
consent of OWNER and ARCHITECT and specific written verification or adaptation by
ARCHITECT.
ARTICLE 4 - Availability of Lands; Physical Conditions; Reference
Points
Availability of Lands:
4.1
OWNER shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work
is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access hereto, and such other lands which
are designated for the use of CONTRACTOR. Easements for permanent structures or permanent
changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by OWNER, unless otherwise
provided in the Contract Documents. If CONTRACTOR believes that any delay in OWNER's
furnishing these lands, rights-of-way or easements entitles CONTRACTOR to an extension of
the Contract Time, CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided in Article 12.
CONTRACTOR shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for
temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment.
Physical Conditions:
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-8
4.2.1
Explorations and Reports: Reference is made to the Supplemental Conditions for
identification of those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site that
have been utilized by ARCHITECT and OWNER in preparation of the Contract Documents.
CONTRACTOR may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports, but
not upon non-technical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the completeness
thereof for CONTRACTOR's purposes. Except as indicated in the immediately preceding
sentence and in paragraph 4.2.6, CONTRACTOR shall have full responsibility with respect to
subsurface conditions at the site.
Existing Structures:
4.2.2
The OWNER will provide the CONTRACTOR access to all available plans and specifications
that relate to this project. Before ordering any materials or doing any Work, the CONTRACTOR
shall verify all measurements and shall be responsible for the correctness of the same. Reference
to the Supplemental Conditions for identification of those drawings of physical conditions in or
relating to existing surface and subsurface structures (except Underground Facilities referred to in
paragraph 4.3) which are at, or contiguous to, the site that have been utilized by ARCHITECT in
preparation of the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR may rely upon the accuracy of the
technical data contained in such drawings but not for the completeness thereof for
CONTRACTOR's purposes. It will be the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to verify access
limitations, existing conditions, and allow for their limitations in their Bid proposal. Except as
indicated in the immediately preceding sentence and in paragraph 4.2.6, CONTRACTOR shall
have full responsibility with respect to physical conditions in or relating to such structures.
Existing facilities will be carefully protected and any damage caused by the Work will be
immediately repaired to the satisfaction of the OWNER and ARCHITECT. Cost for such repairs
will be borne by the CONTRACTOR.
Report of Differing Conditions:
4.2.3
If CONTRACTOR believes that:
4.2.3.1 Any technical data on which CONTRACTOR is entitled to rely on as provided in paragraphs
4.2.1 and 4.2.2 is inaccurate; or
4.2.3.2 Any physical condition uncovered or revealed at the site differs materially from that indicated,
reflected or referred to in the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall promptly, after
becoming aware thereof and before performing any work in connection therewith (except in an
emergency as permitted by paragraph 6.22), notify OWNER and ARCHITECT in writing about
the inaccuracy or difference.
4.2.4
ARCHITECT’s Review: ARCHITECT will promptly review the pertinent conditions,
determine the necessity of obtaining additional explorations or tests with respect thereto and
advise OWNER in writing (with a copy to CONTRACTOR) of ARCHITECT findings and
conclusions.
4.2.5
Possible Document Change: If ARCHITECT concludes that there is a material error in the
Contract Documents or that because of newly discovered conditions a change in the Contract
Documents is required, a Work Change Directive or a Construction Change Directive or a
Change Order will be issued as provided in Article 10.
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-9
4.2.6
Possible Price and Time Adjustments: In each such case, an increase or decrease in the
Contract Price or an extension or shortening of the Contract Time, or any combination thereof,
will be allowable to the extent that they are attributable to any such inaccuracy or difference. If
OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree as to the amount or length thereof, a claim
may be made therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12.
Physical Conditions-Underground Facilities:
4.3.1
Shown as Indicated: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents
with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on
information and data furnished by others to OWNER or ARCHITECT. Unless it is otherwise
expressly provided in the Supplemental Condition:
4.3.1.1 OWNER and ARCHITECT shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any
such information or data; and
4.3.1.2 CONTRACTOR shall have full responsibility for reviewing and checking all such information
and data, for locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents,
for coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities during
construction, for the safety and protection thereof as provided in paragraph 6.20 and repairing
any damage thereto resulting from the Work, the cost of all of which will be considered as
having been included in the Contract Price.
4.3.2
Not Shown or Indicated. If an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous
to the site which was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents and which
CONTRACTOR could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of, CONTRACTOR shall
promptly, after becoming aware thereof and before performing any Work affected thereby
(except in an emergency as permitted by paragraph 6.22), identify the owner of such
Underground Facility and give written notice thereof to that owner and to OWNER and
ARCHITECT and OWNER. ARCHITECT will promptly review the Underground Facility to
determine the extent to which the Contract Documents should be modified to reflect and
document the consequences of the existence of the Underground Facility, and the Contract
Document will be amended or supplemented to the extent necessary. During such time,
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility
as provided in paragraph 6.20.
Reference Points:
4.4
OWNER shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which
in ARCHITECT’s judgment are necessary to enable CONTRACTOR to proceed with the Work.
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for laying out the Work (unless otherwise specified in the
General Requirements), shall protect and preserve the established reference points and shall
make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of OWNER. CONTRACTOR
shall report to ARCHITECT whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires
relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the
accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by professionally qualified
personnel.
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-10
ARTICLE 5 - Bonds and Insurance
Performance and Other Bonds:
5.1
CONTRACTOR shall furnish performance and payment Bonds, each in an amount at least equal
to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all
CONTRACTOR's obligations under the Contract Documents. These Bonds shall remain in
effect at least until one year after the date when final payment becomes due, except as otherwise
provided by Law or Regulation or by the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall also
furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Supplemental Conditions. All Bonds shall be in
the forms prescribed by Law or Regulation or by the Contract Documents and be executed by
such sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as
Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in
Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff Bureau of Accounts, U.S. Treasury Department. All
Bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of the authority to act.
5.2
If the surety on any Bond furnished by CONTRACTOR is declared a bankrupt or becomes
insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is
located or it ceases to meet the requirements of paragraph 5.1, CONTRACTOR shall, within five
days thereafter, substitute another Bond and Surety, both of which must be acceptable to
OWNER.
CONTRACTOR's Liability Insurance:
5.3
CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain such comprehensive general liability and other
insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and furnished and as will provide
protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from CONTRACTOR's
performance and furnishing of the Work and CONTRACTOR's other obligations under the
Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed or furnished by CONTRACT, Subcontractor,
by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work,
or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable.
5.3.1
Claims under worker's or workmen's compensation, disability benefits and other similar
employee benefit acts;
5.3.2
Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of
CONTRACTOR's employees;
5.3.3
Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other
than CONTRACTOR's employees;
5.3.4
Claims for damages insured by personal injury liability coverage which are sustained (a) by any
person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by
CONTRACTOR, or (b) by any other person for any other reason;
5.3.5
Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible
property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom;
5.3.6
Claims arising out of operation of Laws or Regulations for damages because of bodily injury or
death of any person or for damage to property; and
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-11
5.3.7
Claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising
out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle.
The insurance required by this paragraph 5.3 shall include the specific coverage’s and be written
for not less than the limits of liability and coverage’s provided in the Supplemental Conditions,
or required by law, whichever is greater. The comprehensive general liability insurance shall
include completed operations insurance. All of the policies of insurance so required to be
purchased and maintained for the certificates (or other evidence thereof) shall contain a provision
or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed, or renewal
refused, until at least thirty (30) days prior written notice has been given to OWNER and
ARCHITECT by certified mail. All such insurance shall remain in effect until final payment and
at all times thereafter when CONTRACTOR may be correcting, removing or replacing defective
work in accordance with paragraph 13.12. In addition, CONTRACTOR shall maintain such
completed operations insurance for at least two years after final payment and furnish OWNER
with evidence of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter.
Contractual Liability Insurance:
5.4
The comprehensive general liability insurance required by paragraph 5.3 will include contractual
liability insurance applicable to CONTRACTOR's obligation under paragraph 6.30 and 6.31.
OWNER's Liability Insurance:
5.5
OWNER shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining OWNER's own liability insurance
and, at OWNER's option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will protect OWNER
against claims which may arise from operations under the Contract Documents.
Property Insurance:
5.6
Unless otherwise provided in the Supplemental Conditions, the CONTRACTOR shall purchase
and maintain property insurance upon the Work at the site to the full insurable value thereof
(subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplemental Conditions or
required by Laws and Regulations). This insurance shall include the interests of the OWNER,
who shall be listed as insured or additional insured parties, shall insure against the perils of fire
and extended coverage and shall include "all risk" insurance for physical loss and damage
including theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, collapse and water damage, and such other
perils as may be provided in the Supplemental Conditions, and shall include damages, losses and
expenses arising out of or resulting from any insured loss or incurred in the repair or replacement
of any insured property (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers, architects,
attorneys and other professionals). If not covered under the "all risk" insurance or otherwise
provided in the Supplemental Conditions, CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain similar
property insurance on portions of the Work stored on and off the site or in transit when such
portions of the Work are to be included in an Application for Payment.
5.7
OWNER shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to
protect the interest of CONTRACTOR, subcontractors or others in the Work to the extent of any
deductible amounts that are provided in the Supplemental Conditions. The risk of loss within the
deductible amount, will be borne by CONTRACTOR, Subcontractor or others suffering any
such loss and if any of them wishes property insurance coverage within the limits of such
amounts, each may purchase and maintain it at the purchaser's own expense.
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-12
Waiver of Rights:
5.9.1
OWNER and CONTRACTOR waive all rights against each other for all losses and damages
caused by any of the perils covered by the policies of insurance provided in response to
paragraphs 5.6 and any other property insurance applicable to the Work, and also waive all such
rights against the Subcontractor, ARCHITECT, ARCHITECT’s consultants and all other parties
named as insured in such policies for losses and damages so caused. As required by paragraph
6.11, each subcontract between CONTRACTOR and a Subcontractor will contain similar waiver
provisions by the Subcontractor in favor of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, ARCHITECT,
ARCHITECT’s consultants and all other parties named as insured. None of the above waivers
shall extend to the rights that any of the insured parties may have to the proceeds of insurance
held by OWNER as trustee or otherwise payable under any policy so issued.
5.9.2
OWNER and CONTRACTOR intend that any policies provided in response to paragraph 5.6
shall protect all of the parties insured and provide primary coverage for all losses and damages
caused by the perils covered thereby. Accordingly, all such policies shall contain provisions to
the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurer will have no rights of
recovery against any of the parties named as insured or additional insureds, and if the insurers
require separate waiver forms to be signed by Subcontractor, CONTRACTOR will obtain the
same.
Receipt and Application of Proceeds:
5.10
Any insured loss under the policies of insurance required by paragraph 5.6 will be adjusted with
OWNER and made payable to OWNER as trustee for the insured, as their interests may appear,
subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause and of paragraph 5.9. OWNER
shall deposit in a separate account any money so received, and shall distribute it in accordance
with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no other special agreement is
reached, the damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the moneys so received applied on
account thereof and the Work and the cost thereof covered by an appropriate Change Order or
Written Amendment.
5.11
OWNER, as trustee, shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of
the parties in interest shall object in writing within fifteen (15) days after the occurrence of loss
to OWNER's exercise of this power. If such objection be made, OWNER, as trustee, shall make
settlement with the insurers in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may
reach.
ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR's Responsibilities
Supervision and Superintendence:
6.1
CONTRACTOR shall supervise and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such
attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work
in accordance with the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the
means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction, but CONTRACTOR
shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or selection of a specific
means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is indicated in and
required by the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to see that the
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-13
finished Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents.
6.2
CONTRACTOR shall keep on the Work at all times during its progress a competent resident
superintendent, who shall not be replaced without written notice to OWNER and ARCHITECT
except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be CONTRACTOR's
representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of CONTRACTOR. All
communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to CONTRACTOR. .
The CONTRACTOR's superintendent shall be one who is experienced in projects of this size
and type; shall be capable of maintaining cooperation with all Contractors on the Project; shall
possess ability to keep Work on schedule; and shall be able to keep the Project clean, at all times,
of debris.
Labor, Materials and Equipment:
6.3
6.3.1
CONTRACTOR shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the
Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall
at all times maintain good discipline and order at the site. Except in connection with the safety
or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as
otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, all Work at the site shall be preformed during
regular working hours, and CONTRACTOR will not permit overtime work or the performance
of Work on Saturday, Sunday or any legal holiday without OWNER's written consent given after
prior written notice to ARCHITECT.
The CONTRACTOR shall furnish such forces, construction plant and equipment and shall work
such hours, including overtime operations, as shall be necessary to insure the prosecution of the
Work in accordance with the progress schedule and completion date.
6.4
Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, CONTRACTOR shall furnish and
assume full responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction
equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary
facilities, temporary facilities and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing,
performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work.
6.5
All materials and equipment shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in
the Contract Documents. If required by ARCHITECT, CONTRACTOR shall furnish
satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the kind and quality of materials
and equipment. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used,
cleaned and conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable Supplier except as
otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, but no provision of any such instructions will be
effective to assign to ARCHITECT, or any of ARCHITECT’s consultants, agents or employees,
any duty or authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the Work or any
duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of paragraph 9.14 or 9.15.
Adjusting Progress Schedule:
6.6
CONTRACTOR shall submit to ARCHITECT and OWNER for acceptance (to the extent
indicated in paragraph 2.8) adjustments in the progress schedule to reflect the impact thereon of
new developments; these will conform generally to the progress schedule then in effect and
additionally will comply with any provisions of the General Requirements applicable thereto.
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-14
Substitutes or "Or-Equal" Items:
6.7.1
Whenever materials or equipment are specified or described in the Contract Documents by using
the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the naming of the item is
intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the name is followed by
words indicating that no substitution is permitted, materials or equipment of other Suppliers may
be accepted by ARCHITECT if sufficient information is submitted by CONTRACTOR to allow
ARCHITECT to determine that the material or equipment proposed is equivalent or equal to that
named. The procedure for review by ARCHITECT will include the following as supplemented
in Division 1, General Requirements:
6.7.1.1 Requests for review of substitute items of material and equipment will not be accepted by
ARCHITECT from anyone other than CONTRACTOR.
6.7.1.2 If CONTRACTOR wishes to furnish or use a substitute item of material or equipment,
CONTRACTOR shall make written application to ARCHITECT for acceptance thereof,
certifying that the proposed substitute will perform adequately the functions and achieve the
results called for by the general design, be similar and of equal substance to that specified and be
suited to the same use as that specified.
6.7.1.3 The application will state that the evaluation and acceptance of the proposed substitute will not
prejudice CONTRACTOR's achievement of Substantial Completion on time, whether or not
acceptance of the substitute for use in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract
Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with OWNER for work on the
Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute and whether or not incorporation or use of
the substitute in connection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty.
6.7.1.4 All variations of the proposed substitute from that specified will be identified in the application
and available maintenance, repair and replacement service will be indicated.
6.7.1.5 The application will also contain an itemized estimate of all costs that will result directly or
indirectly from acceptance of such substitute, including costs of redesign and claims of other
contractors affected by the resulting change, all of which shall be considered by ARCHITECT in
evaluating the proposed substitute.
6.7.1.6 ARCHITECT may require CONTRACTOR to furnish, at CONTRACTOR's expense, additional
data about the proposed substitute.
6.7.2
If a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is indicated in or
required by the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR may furnish or utilize a substitute means,
method, sequence, technique, or procedure of construction acceptable to ARCHITECT if
CONTRACTOR submits sufficient information to allow ARCHITECT to determine that the
substitute proposed is equivalent to that indicated or required by the contract Documents. The
procedure for review by ARCHITECT will be similar to that provided in paragraph 6.7.1 as
applied by ARCHITECT and as may be supplemented in the General Requirements.
6.7.3
ARCHITECT will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each proposed
substitute. ARCHITECT will be the sole judge of acceptability, and no substitute will be ordered,
installed or utilized without ARCHITECT’s prior written acceptance which will be evidenced by
either a Change Order or an approved Shop Drawing. OWNER may require CONTRACTOR to
furnish at CONTRACTOR's expense a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-15
to any substitute. ARCHITECT will record time required by ARCHITECT and ARCHITECT’s
consultants in evaluating substitutions proposed by CONTRACTOR and in making changes in
the Contract Documents occasioned thereby. Whether or not ARCHITECT accepts a proposed
substitute, CONTRACTOR shall reimburse OWNER for the charges of ARCHITECT and
ARCHITECT’s consultants for evaluating each proposed substitute.
Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others:
6.8
CONTRACTOR shall not employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization
whether initially, or as a substitute, against whom OWNER or ARCHITECT may have
reasonable objection after due investigation..
6.9
CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible to OWNER and ARCHITECT for all acts and
omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and organizations performing or
furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with CONTRACTOR just as
CONTRACTOR is responsible for CONTRACTOR's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the
Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship between OWNER or ARCHITECT
and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization, nor shall it create any
obligation on the part of OWNER or ARCHITECT to pay or to see to the payment of any
moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization.
6.10
The division and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not
control CONTRACTOR in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating
the Work to be performed by any specific trade.
6.11
All Work performed for CONTRACTOR by a Subcontractor will be pursuant to an appropriate
agreement between CONTRACTOR and the Subcontractor which specifically binds the
Subcontractor to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit
of OWNER and ARCHITECT and contains waiver provisions as required by paragraph 5.9.
CONTRACTOR shall pay each Subcontractor a just share of any insurance moneys received by
CONTRACTOR on account of losses under policies issued pursuant to paragraph 5.6.
Patent Fees and Royalties:
6.12
CONTRACTOR shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use
in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design,
process, product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others.
CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER and ARCHITECT and anyone
directly or indirectly employed by either of them from and against all claims, damages, losses
and expenses (including attorneys' fees and court and arbitration costs) arising out of any
infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or
resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device
not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall defend all such claims in connection with any
alleged infringement of such rights.
Permits:
6.13
All Work shall comply with local codes, regulations and rules of authorities having jurisdiction.
Such certification will be provided upon completion of the Work. The CONTRACTOR will
secure and pay for all permits, governmental fees and licenses necessary for the proper execution
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-16
and completion of the Work ( except building and electrical permits). The OWNER will pay for
the building and electrical permits. CONTRACTOR will be responsible for completing all
applications. The CONTRACTOR will pay all state, county, city, borough, township, municipal
or local government fees, permits, licenses, etc., which may be required in the performance of the
Contract, and pay highway fees for damages to sidewalks, streets or other public property, or
damages to any public utilities. The CONTRACTOR will secure certificates of inspection that
may be required by authorities having jurisdiction over Work. CONTRACTOR shall pay all
charges of utility companies for connections to the Work.
Laws and Regulations:
6.14.1
CONTRACTOR shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to
furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by
applicable Laws and Regulations, neither OWNER nor ARCHITECT shall be responsible for
monitoring CONTRACTOR's compliance with any Laws or Regulations.
6.14.2
If CONTRACTOR observes that the Specifications or Drawings are at variance with any Laws
or Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall give ARCHITECT prompt written notice thereof, and any
necessary changes will be authorized by one of the methods indicated in paragraph 3.4. If
CONTRACTOR performs any Work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to
such Laws or Regulations, and without such notice to ARCHITECT, CONTRACTOR shall bear
all costs arising therefrom.
Taxes:
6.15
CONTRACTOR shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes required to be paid by
contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are
applicable during the performance of the Work.
Use of Premises:
6.16
CONTRACTOR shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment,
and the operations of workers, to the Project site and land and areas identified in and permitted
by the Contract Documents and other land and areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, rightsof-way, permits and easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with
construction equipment or other materials or equipment. CONTRACTOR shall assume full
responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of
any land or areas contiguous thereto, resulting from the performance of the Work. Should any
claim be made against OWNER or ARCHITECT by any such owner or occupant because of the
performance of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall promptly attempt to settle with such other party
by agreement or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or at law. CONTRACTOR shall, to
the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold OWNER and
ARCHITECT harmless from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses (including,
but not limited to, fees of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and court and
arbitration costs) arising directly, indirectly or consequentially out of any action, legal or
equitable, brought by any such other party against OWNER or ARCHITECT to the extent based
on a claim arising out of CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work.
6.16.1 Where existing building utilities such as gas, water, electricity or other facilities are required to be
curtailed for making connections, extensions of services or other required work, all such work
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-17
will be scheduled with and approved by the OWNER.. All such work will be scheduled so that it
will not interfere with the OWNER's programs and may be performed on weekends, after regular
hours or as agreed upon by the OWNER. All construction scheduling will be coordinated so that
any curtailment is held to a minimum. In the event any building utility is interrupted for a period
of time longer than two (2) hours, the CONTRACTOR will, at his expense, provide a suitable
temporary utility to conduct his Work and to maintain necessary building utility services.
6.17
During the progress of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall keep the premises free from
accumulation of waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the
completion of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris
from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment and
machinery, and surplus materials, and shall leave the site clean and ready for occupancy by
OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall restore to original condition all property not designed for
alteration by the Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR will be required to effectively
protect the portions of the building to remain, and any resultant damage to existing remaining
portions of building or parts or equipment thereof will be restored to conditions existing prior to
execution of the Work. The CONTRACTOR will confine operations at the Project site to areas
permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and will not unreasonably
encumber the Project site with any materials or equipment. Areas will be coordinated with
OWNER.
6.18
CONTRACTOR shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner
that will endanger the structure, nor shall CONTRACTOR subject any part of the Work or
adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it.
Record Documents:
6.19
CONTRACTOR shall maintain in a safe place at the site one record copy of all Drawings,
Specifications, Addenda, Written Amendments, Change Orders, Work Directive Changes, Field
Orders and written interpretations and clarifications (issued pursuant to paragraph 9.3) in good
order and annotated to show all changes made during construction. These record documents
together with all approved samples and a counterpart of all approved Shop Drawings will be
available to ARCHITECT for reference. Upon completion of the Work, or termination of this
Agreement, these record documents, samples and Shop Drawings will be delivered to
ARCHITECT for OWNER.
Safety and Protection
6.20
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety
precautions and programs in connection with the Work. CONTRACTOR shall take all
necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent
damage, injury or loss to:
6.20.1
All employees on the Project site and other persons and organizations who may be affected
thereby;
6.20.2
All the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or
off the Project site; and
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-18
6.20.3
Other property at the Project site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks,
pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal,
relocation or replacement in the course of construction.
CONTRACTOR shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body
having jurisdiction for the safety of persons or property or to protect them from damage, injury
or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection.
CONTRACTOR shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and
utility owners when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in
the protection, removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss
to any property referred to in paragraph 6.20.2 or 6.20.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole
or in part, by CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or organization
directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work or anyone
for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by CONTRACTOR (except damage
or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of
OWNER or ARCHITECT or anyone employed by either of them or anyone for whose acts either
of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault
or negligence of CONTRACTOR). CONTRACTOR's duties and responsibilities for the safety
and protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and
ARCHITECT has issued a notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR in accordance with
paragraph 14.11 that the Work is acceptable (except as otherwise expressly provided in
connection with Substantial Completion).
6.21
CONTRACTOR shall designate a responsible representative at the site whose duty shall be the
prevention of accidents. This person shall be CONTRACTOR's superintendent unless otherwise
designated in writing by CONTRACTOR to OWNER.
Emergencies:
6.22
In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the
Project site or adjacent thereto, CONTRACTOR, without special instruction or authorization
from ARCHITECT or OWNER, is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss.
CONTRACTOR shall give ARCHITECT prompt written notice if CONTRACTOR believes that
any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been
caused thereby. If ARCHITECT determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required
because of the action taken in response to an emergency, a Work Directive Change or Change
Order will be issued to document the consequences of the changes or variations.
6.22.1 CONTRACTOR shall provide the names, addresses and telephone numbers of all individuals
responsible for the security and safety of the Work, including other Contractors and SubContractors. If during the course of the Work, an emergency arises that may affect public safety,
the OWNER reserves the right to notify the CONTRACTOR representative to correct, at no cost
to the OWNER, any deficiencies that require immediate attention to remove any threat to
employees or the public.
Shop Drawings and Samples:
6.23
After checking and verifying all field measurements and after complying with applicable
procedures specified in the General Requirements, CONTRACTOR shall submit to
ARCHITECT for review and approval in accordance with the accepted schedule of Shop
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-19
Drawing submissions (see paragraph 2.8) or for other appropriate action if so indicated in the
Supplemental Conditions, five copies (unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements)
of all Shop Drawings, which will bear a stamp or specific written indication that
CONTRACTOR has satisfied CONTRACTOR's responsibilities under the Contract Documents
with respect to the review of the submission. All submissions will be identified as ARCHITECT
may require. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities,
dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials and similar data to enable
ARCHITECT to review the information as required.
6.24
CONTRACTOR shall also submit to ARCHITECT for review and approval with such
promptness as to cause no delay in Work, all samples required by the Contract Documents. All
samples will have been checked by and accompanied by a specific written indication that
CONTRACTOR has satisfied CONTRACTOR's responsibilities under the Contract Documents
with respect to the review of the submission and will be identified clearly as to material,
Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers and the use for which intended.
6.25.1
Before submission of each Shop Drawing or sample, CONTRACTOR shall have determined and
verified all quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements,
materials, catalog numbers and similar data with respect thereto and reviewed or coordinated
each Shop Drawing or sample with other Shop Drawings and samples and with the requirements
of the Work and the Contract Documents.
6.25.2
At the time of each submission, CONTRACTOR shall give ARCHITECT specific written notice
of each variation that the Shop Drawings or samples may have from the requirements of the
Contract Documents, and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop
Drawing submitted to ARCHITECT for review and approval of each such variation.
6.26
ARCHITECT will review and approve, with reasonable promptness, Shop Drawings and
samples, but ARCHITECT’s review and approval will be only for conformance with the design
concept of the project and for compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents
and shall not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction
(except where a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is
indicated in or required by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs
incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval
of the assembly in which the item functions. CONTRACTOR shall make corrections required
by ARCHITECT, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings
and submit, as required, new samples for review and approval. CONTRACTOR shall direct, in
writing, specific attention to revisions other than the corrections required by ARCHITECT on
previous submittals.
6.27
ARCHITECT ‘s review and approval of Shop Drawings or samples shall not relieve
CONTRACTOR from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract
Documents unless CONTRACTOR has, in writing, called ARCHITECT’s attention to each such
variation at the time of submission as required by paragraph 6.25.2 and ARCHITECT has given
written approval of each such variation by a specific written notation thereof incorporated in or
accompanying the Shop Drawing or sample approval; nor will any approval by ARCHITECT
relieve CONTRACTOR from responsibility for errors or omissions in the Shop Drawing or from
responsibility for having complied with the provisions of paragraph 6.25.1.
6.28
Where a Shop Drawing or sample is required by the Specifications, any related Work performed
prior to ARCHITECT’s review and approval of the pertinent submission will be the sole expense
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-20
and responsibility of CONTRACTOR.
Continuing the Work:
6.29
CONTRACTOR shall perform the Work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes
or disagreements with OWNER. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of
any disputes or disagreements, except as permitted by paragraph 15.3.1 or as CONTRACTOR
and OWNER may otherwise agree in writing.
Indemnification:
6.30
To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and
hold harmless OWNER and ARCHITECT and their consultants, agents and employees from and
against all claims, damages, losses and expenses, direct, indirect or consequential (including but
not limited to fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and
court and arbitration costs) arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work,
provided that any such claim, damage, loss or expense, (a) is attributable to bodily injury,
sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work
itself) including the loss of use resulting therefrom and (b) is caused in whole or in part by any
act or omission of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any person or organization directly or
indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or anyone for whose
acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not it is caused in part by a party
indemnified hereunder or arises by or is imposed by Law and Regulations regardless of the
negligence of any such party.
6.31
In any and all claims against OWNER or ARCHITECT or any of their consultants, agents or
employees by any employee of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any person or organization
directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work or anyone
for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under paragraph 6.30
shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages,
compensation or benefits payable by or for CONTRACTOR or any such Subcontractor or other
person or organization under worker's or workmen's compensation acts, disability benefit acts or
other employee benefit acts.
6.32
The obligation of CONTRACTOR under paragraph 6.30 shall not extend to the liability of
ARCHITECT, ARCHITECT’s consultants, agents or employees arising out of the preparation or
approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs or
specifications.
ARTICLE 7 - Other Work
Related Work at Site:
7.1
CONTRACTOR shall afford each utility owner and other contractor who is a party to a direct
contract with OWNER (or OWNER, if OWNER is performing the additional work with
OWNER's employees) access to the site and a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and
storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such work, and shall properly connect
and coordinate the Work with theirs. CONTRACTOR shall do all cutting, fitting and patching
of the Work that may be required to make its several parts come together properly and integrate
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-21
with such other work. CONTRACTOR shall not endanger any work of others by cutting,
excavating or otherwise altering their work and will only cut or alter their work with the written
consent of ARCHITECT and the others whose work will be affected. The duties and
responsibilities of CONTRACTOR under this paragraph are for the benefit of such utility
owners and other contractors to the extent that there are comparable provisions for the benefit of
CONTRACTOR in said direct contracts between OWNER and such utility owners and other
contractors.
7.2.1
If any part of CONTRACTOR's Work depends for proper execution or results upon the work of
any such other contractor or utility owner (or OWNER), CONTRACTOR shall inspect and
promptly report to ARCHITECT in writing any delays, defects or deficiencies in such work that
render it unavailable or unsuitable for such proper execution and results. CONTRACTOR's
failure to report will constitute an acceptance of the other work as fit and proper for integration
with CONTRACTOR's Work except for latent or nonapparent defects and deficiencies in the
other work. Failure of the CONTRACTOR to inspect and report shall constitute an acceptance of
the other separate Contractor's Work as fit and proper to receive the CONTRACTOR's Work,
except as to defects which may develop in the other separate Contractor's Work after the
execution of the CONTRACTOR's Work.
Owner's Right to Award Separate Contracts
7.3
The OWNER reserves the right to let other Contracts in connection with the Project. It is hereby
agreed that the CONTRACTOR will conduct his Work in such a manner and on such a schedule
that the respective Work of the CONTRACTOR and separate Contractors shall be carried on
simultaneously and in such manner as not to delay the Work of one another or the progress of the
Project. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall be construed to create a Contract or third party
beneficiary relationship between the CONTRACTOR and any separate Contractor(s). Where
there are separate Contracts, the GENERAL CONTRACTOR, upon whose efforts progress
basically depends, shall have precedence and prime responsibility for coordination and progress
of the Work.
Coordination:
7.4
If OWNER contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site, the
person or organization who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the
activities among the various prime contractors will be identified in the Supplemental Conditions,
and the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized, and
the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided in the Supplemental Conditions.
Unless otherwise provided in the Supplemental Conditions, neither OWNER nor ARCHITECT
shall have any authority or responsibility in respect of such coordination.
ARTICLE 8 - (Article has been deleted from "GENERAL CONDITIONS")
ARTICLE 9 – ARCHITECT’s Status During Construction
OWNER's Representative:
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-22
9.1
ARCHITECT will be OWNER's representative during the construction period. The duties and
responsibilities and the limitations of authority of ARCHITECT as OWNER's representative
during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without
written consent of the Lancaster County Commissioners.
Visits to Site:
9.2
ARCHITECT will make visits to the site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of
construction to observe the progress and quality of the executed Work and to determine, in
general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. ARCHITECT
will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or
quantity of the Work. ARCHITECT’s efforts will be directed toward providing for OWNER a
greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents.
On the basis of such visits and on-site observations as an experienced and qualified design
professional, ARCHITECT will keep OWNER informed of the progress of the Work and will
endeavor to guard OWNER against defects and deficiencies in the Work.
Clarifications and Interpretations:
9.3
ARCHITECT will issue, with reasonable promptness, such written clarifications or
interpretations of the requirements of the Contract Documents (in the form of Drawings or
otherwise) as ARCHITECT may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with or
reasonably inferable from the overall intent of the Contract Documents. If CONTRACTOR
believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an increase in the Contract Price or
an extension of the Contract Time, and the parties are unable to agree to the amount or extent
thereof, CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided in Article 11 or Article 12.
Authorized Variations in Work:
9.4
ARCHITECT may authorize minor variations in the Work from the requirements of the Contract
Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and
are consistent with the overall intent of the Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by
a Field Order and will be binding on OWNER, and also on CONTRACTOR who shall perform
the Work involved promptly. If CONTRACTOR believes that a Field Order justifies an increase
in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, and the parties are unable to agree as
to the amount or extent thereof, CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided in
Article 11 or 12.
Rejecting Defective Work:
9.5
ARCHITECT will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which ARCHITECT believes to
be defective, and will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work as
provided in paragraph 13.9, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed.
Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments:
9.6
In connection with ARCHITECT’s responsibility for Shop Drawings and samples, see
paragraphs 6.23 through 6.29 inclusive.
9.7
In connection with ARCHITECT’s responsibilities as to Change Orders, see Articles 10, 11 and
12.
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-23
9.8
In connection with ARCHITECT’s responsibilities in respect of Applications for Payment, etc.,
see Article 14.
Determination for Unit Prices:
9.9
ARCHITECT will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work
performed by CONTRACTOR, ARCHITECT will review with CONTRACTOR
ARCHITECT’s preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision
thereon. ARCHITECT’s written decisions thereon will be final and binding unless, within ten
(10) days after the date of any such decision, CONTRACTOR delivers to the OWNER and to
ARCHITECT written notice of intention to appeal from such a decision.
Decisions on Disputes:
9.10
ARCHITECT will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and
judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to
the acceptability of the Work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract
Documents, pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the Work and claims under Articles
11 and 12 in respect of changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time will be referred initially
to ARCHITECT in writing with a request for a formal decision in accordance with this
paragraph, which ARCHITECT will render in writing within a reasonable time. Written notice
of each such claim, dispute and other matter will be delivered by the claimant to ARCHITECT
and to the Lancaster County Commissioners, no later than twenty (20) days after the occurrence
of the event giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to ARCHITECT
and OWNER within thirty (30) days after such occurrence.
9.11
The rendering of a decision by ARCHITECT pursuant to paragraphs 9.8 and 9.9 with respect to
any such claim, dispute or other matter (except any which have been waived by the making or
acceptance of final payment as provided in paragraph 14.14) will be a condition precedent to any
exercise by CONTRACTOR of such rights or remedies as may otherwise have under the
Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other
matter.
Limitations on ARCHITECT's Responsibilities:
9.12
Neither ARCHITECT’s authority to act under this Article or elsewhere in the Contract
Documents, nor any decision made by ARCHITECT in good faith either to exercise or not
exercise such authority, shall give rise to any duty or responsibility of ARCHITECT to
CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any other person or organization
performing any of the Work, or to any surety for any of them.
9.13
Whenever, in the Contract Documents the terms "as ordered," "as directed," "as required," "as
allowed," "as approved" or terms of like effect or import are used, or the adjectives "reasonable,"
"suitable," "acceptable," "proper," or "satisfactory" or adjectives of like effect or import are used
to describe a requirement, direction, review or judgment of ARCHITECT as to the Work, it is
intended that such requirement, direction, review or judgment will be solely to evaluate the
Work for compliance with the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement
indicating otherwise). The use of any such term of adjective shall not be effective to assign to
ARCHITECT any duty of authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the
Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of paragraph
9.14 or 9.15.
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-24
9.14
ARCHITECT will not be responsible for CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques,
sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto,
and ARCHITECT will not be responsible for CONTRACTOR's failure to perform or furnish the
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
9.15
ARCHITECT will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of CONTRACTOR or of any
Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any
of the Work.
ARTICLE 10 - Changes in the Work:
10.1
Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, OWNER may, at any time
or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work; these will be authorized
by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, a Construction Change Directive, or a Work Change
Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, CONTRACTOR shall promptly proceed with the
Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract
Documents (except as otherwise specifically provided).
10.2
If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an increase or
decrease in the Contract Price or an extension or shortening of the Contract Time that should be
allowed as a result of a Construction Change Directive, or a Work Change Directive, a claim
may be made therefor as provided in Article 11 or Article 12.
10.3
CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract
Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in paragraphs 3.4 and 3.5
except in the case of an emergency as provided in paragraph 6.22 and except in the case of
uncovering Work as provided in paragraph 13.9.
10.4
OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall execute appropriate change orders (or Written
Amendments) covering:
10.4.1
Changes in the Work which are ordered by OWNER pursuant to paragraph 10.1, are required
because of acceptance of defective Work under paragraph 13.13 or correcting defective Work
under paragraph 13.14 or are agreed to by the parties:
10.4.2
Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and
10.4.3
Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written
decision rendered by ARCHITECT pursuant to paragraph 9.10; provided that, in lieu of
executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance
with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during
any such appeal, CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as
provided in paragraph 6.29.
10.5
If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract
Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the
provisions of any Bond to be given to a Surety, the giving of any such notice will be
CONTRACTOR's responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted
accordingly.
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-25
ARTICLE 11 - Change of Contract Price
11.1
The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments)
payable to CONTRACTOR for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations
assigned to or undertaken by CONTRACTOR shall be at his expense without change in the
Contract Price.
11.2
The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any
claim by CONTRACTOR for an increase or decrease in the Contract Price shall be based on
written notice delivered by CONTRACTOR to OWNER and to ARCHITECT no later than
twenty (20) days after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general
nature of the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered
within thirty (30) days after such occurrence and shall be accompanied by CONTRACTOR's
written statement that the amount claimed covers all known amounts (direct, indirect and
consequential) to which the CONTRACTOR is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said
event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Price shall be determined by ARCHITECT in
accordance with paragraph 9.9 if OWNER and CONTRACTOR cannot otherwise agree on the
amount involved. No claim by the CONTRACTOR for an adjustment in the Contract Price will
be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph 11.2.
11.3
The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an increase or decrease in
the Contract Price shall be determined in one of the following ways:
11.3.1
Where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by
application of unit prices to the quantities of the items involved.
11.3.2
By mutual acceptance of a lump sum.
11.3.3
On the basis of the Cost of the Work plus a CONTRACTOR's Fee for overhead and profit. The
following fees apply to Changes in Work.
a.
b.
c.
10% Overhead
5% Profit
Hourly rate based on prevailing wage rate for this project.
Cost of the Work:
11.4
The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all cost necessarily incurred and paid by
CONTRACTOR in the proper performance of the Work. Except as otherwise may be agreed to
in writing by OWNER, such costs shall be in amounts no higher than those included in the Bid
Proposal and Agreement.
ARTICLE 12 - Change of Contract Time
Definitions:
12.1.1
Unless otherwise provided, the Contract Time is the period of time allotted in the Contract
Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work, including authorized adjustments thereto.
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-26
12.1.2
The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the notice to proceed. If there
is no notice to proceed, it shall be such other date as may be established in the OWNERCONTRACTOR Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
12.1.3
The Date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the ARCHITECT, in accordance with
paragraph 14.7.
12.1.4
The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless specifically
designated otherwise.
Progress and Completion
12.2.1
All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By bidding
and by executing the Agreement, the CONTRACTOR confirms that the Contract Time is a
reasonable period for performing the Work.
12.2.2
The CONTRACTOR shall begin the Work on the date of commencement as defined in
paragraph 2.3. The CONTRACTOR shall carry the Work forward expeditiously with adequate
forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time.
Delays and Extensions of Time
12.3.1
If the CONTRACTOR is delayed at any time in the progress of the Work by any act or neglect
of the OWNER, or ARCHITECT, or any of their employees, or any separate contractor
employed by the OWNER, or by changes ordered in the Work, fire, unusual delay in deliveries,
unavoidable casualties, or other causes beyond the CONTRACTOR's control, or by any other
cause which the ARCHITECT and OWNER determines may justify the delay, then the Contract
Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the ARCHITECT and
OWNER may determine.
12.3.2
Any claim for extension of time shall be made in writing to the ARCHITECT not more than
twenty (20) days after the commencement of the delay; otherwise it shall be waived. The
CONTRACTOR shall provide an estimate of the probable effect of such delay on the progress of
the Work.
12.3.3
If no agreement is made stating the dates upon which interpretations as provided in paragraph
9.3 shall be furnished, then no claim for delay shall be allowed on account of failure to furnish
such interpretations until fifteen (15) days after written request is made for them, and not then
unless such claim is reasonable.
12.3.4
No payment or compensation or claim for damages shall be made to the contractor as
compensation for damages for any delays or hindrances from any cause whatsoever in the
progress of the Work, notwithstanding whether such delays be avoidable or unavoidable. The
contractor's sole remedy for delays shall be an EXTENSION OF TIME ONLY, pursuant to and
only in accordance with this paragraph 12.3, such extension to be a period equivalent to the time
lost, day for day, by reason of any and all of the aforesaid causes, as determined by the OWNER.
In consideration for this grant of a time extension, the OWNER and the ARCHITECT shall not
be held responsible for any loss or damage or increased costs sustained by the CONTRACTOR
through any delays caused by the OWNER, ARCHITECT or any other CONTRACTOR or on
account of the aforesaid causes or any other cause of delay. In the event the CONTRACTOR
shall choose to litigate this clause or issue and loses said litigation, the CONTRACTOR shall
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-27
reimburse the OWNER, ARCHITECT for their reasonable attorney's and expert witness fees and
all other costs and expenses incurred by them in the litigation.
ARTICLE 13 - Warranty and Guarantee; Tests and Inspections; Correction,
Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work
Warranty and Guarantee:
13.1
CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees to OWNER and ARCHITECT that all Work will be in
accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. All defective Work, whether
or not in place, may be rejected, corrected or accepted as provided in this Article 13.
13.1.1 In case of Work performed by Subcontractors and where guarantees are required, the
CONTRACTOR shall secure guarantees from said Subcontractors or equipment suppliers,
addressed to and in favor of CONTRACTOR and OWNER, and deliver the original of same to
ARCHITECT upon completion of Work. Delivery of and acceptance by the OWNER of said
guarantees shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR and his Surety from any obligation assumed
under any provisions of the Contract. It is recognized that in some cases the guarantees furnished
by or through Subcontractors and/or Suppliers may be more restrictive in terms than the
obligations imposed on the CONTRACTOR under the terms of the Contract Documents. The
obligations of the CONTRACTOR under this Article 13 shall be in addition to and not in
limitation of any obligations imposed upon him by special guarantees by the Contract Documents
or otherwise prescribed by law or by the Contract. Nothing contained in this Article shall be
construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations which the
CONTRACTOR might have under the Agreement. Establishment of the time period of one (1)
year relates only to the specific obligation of the CONTRACTOR to correct the Work and has no
relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may
be sought to be enforced nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to
establish the CONTRACTOR's liability with respect to the CONTRACTOR's obligation other
than specifically to correct the Work. CONTRACTOR shall provide maintenance contracts
indicated in Contract Documents.
Access to Work:
13.2
ARCHITECT and ARCHITECT’s representatives, other representative of OWNER, testing
agencies and governmental agencies with jurisdictional interests will have access to the Work at
reasonable times for their observation, inspecting and testing. CONTRACTOR shall provide
proper and safe conditions for such access.
Tests and Inspections:
13.3
CONTRACTOR shall give ARCHITECT and OWNER timely notice of readiness of the Work
for all required inspections, tests or approvals.
13.3.1 After permanent heating, plumbing or electrical system and equipment have been installed, it
shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR installing such system and equipment to
operate it for a satisfactory period of time, as required by ARCHITECT, for proper testing and
instruction of operating personnel. Fuel, electricity and water, required for proper testing of
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-28
permanent equipment and for the period of instructing personnel, shall be supplied by the
OWNER while performing the test or inspection.
13.4
If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof)
to specifically be inspected, tested or approved, CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility
therefor, pay all costs in connection therewith and furnish ARCHITECT and OWNER the
required certificates of inspection, testing or approval. CONTRACTOR shall also be responsible
for and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspection or testing required in connection
with OWNER's or ARCHITECT’s acceptance of a Supplier of materials or equipment proposed
to be incorporated in the Work, or of materials or equipment submitted for approval prior to
CONTRACTOR's purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work.
13.5
All inspections, tests or approvals other than those required by Laws or Regulations of any
public body having jurisdiction shall be performed by organizations acceptable to OWNER.
13.6
If any Work (including the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested or approved is covered
without written concurrence of ARCHITECT, it must, if requested by ARCHITECT, be
uncovered for observation. Such uncovering shall be at CONTRACTOR's expense.
13.7
Neither observation by ARCHITECT nor inspections, tests or approvals by others shall relieve
CONTRACTOR from CONTRACTOR's obligations to perform the Work in accordance with
the Contract Documents.
Uncovering Work:
13.8
If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of ARCHITECT, it must, if requested by
ARCHITECT, be uncovered for ARCHITECT’s observation and replaced at CONTRACTOR's
expense.
13.9
If ARCHITECT considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by
ARCHITECT or inspected or tested by others, CONTRACTOR, at ARCHITECT’s request, shall
uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as
ARCHITECT may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor,
material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective, CONTRACTOR shall bear
all direct, indirect and consequential costs of such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection
and testing and of satisfactory reconstruction, (including but not limited to fees and charges of
engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals), and OWNER shall be entitled to an
appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective,
CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Time, or both, directly attributable to such uncovering exposure, observation,
inspection, testing and reconstruction; and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or
extent thereof, CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12.
OWNER May Stop the Work:
13.10
If the Work is defective, or CONTRACTOR fails, in ARCHITECT’s and OWNER opinion, to
supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform
the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents,
OWNER may order CONTRACTOR to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for
such order has been eliminated; however, this right of OWNER to stop the Work shall not give
rise to any duty on the part of OWNER to exercise this right for the benefit of CONTRACTOR
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-29
or any other party.
Correction or Removal of Defective Work:
13.11
If required by ARCHITECT, CONTRACTOR shall promptly, as directed, either correct all
defective Work whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has been
rejected by ARCHITECT, remove it from the site and replace it with non-defective Work.
CONTRACTOR shall bear all direct, indirect and consequential costs of such correction or
removal (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and
other professionals) made necessary thereby.
One Year Correction Period:
13.12
If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion, or such longer period of time as may
be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee
required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any
work is found to be defective, CONTRACTOR shall promptly, without cost to OWNER and in
accordance with OWNER's written instruction, either correct such defective Work, or if it has
been rejected by OWNER, remove it from the site and replace it with non-defective Work. If
CONTRACTOR does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions or in an
emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, OWNER may have the
defective Work corrected or the rejected Work removed and replaced, and all direct, indirect and
consequential costs of such removal and replacement (including but not limited to fees and
charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals) will be paid by
CONTRACTOR. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in
continuous service before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that
item may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications or by Written
Amendment.
Acceptance of Defective Work:
13.13
If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective work, OWNER (and,
prior to ARCHITECT’s recommendation of final payment, also ARCHITECT) prefers to accept,
OWNER may do so. CONTRACTOR shall bear all direct, indirect and consequential costs
attributable to OWNER's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such
costs to be approved by ARCHITECT as to reasonableness and to include but not be limited to
fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals). If any such
acceptance occurs prior to ARCHITECT’s recommendation of final payment, a Change Order
will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to
the Work; and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the
acceptance occurs after such recommendation, an appropriate amount will be paid by
CONTRACTOR to OWNER.
OWNER May Correct Defective Work:
13.14
If CONTRACTOR fails within a reasonable time after written notice of ARCHITECT to proceed
to correct and to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by
ARCHITECT in accordance with paragraph 13.11, or if CONTRACTOR fails to comply with
any other provision of the Contract Documents, OWNER may, after seven (7) days' written
notice to CONTRACTOR, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights and
remedies under this paragraph, OWNER shall proceed expeditiously, to the extent necessary to
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-30
complete corrective and remedial action. OWNER may exclude CONTRACTOR from all or
part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend CONTRACTOR's
services related thereto, take possession of CONTRACTOR's tools, appliances, construction
equipment and machinery at the site and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment
stored at the site or for which OWNER has paid CONTRACTOR but which are stored
elsewhere. CONTRACTOR shall allow OWNER, OWNER's representatives, agents and
employees such access to the site as may be necessary to enable OWNER to exercise the rights
and remedies under this paragraph. All direct, indirect and consequential costs of OWNER in
exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against CONTRACTOR in an amount
approved as to reasonableness by ARCHITECT, and a Change Order will be issued
incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and
OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. Such direct, indirect
and consequential costs will include but not be limited to fees and charges of engineers,
architects, attorneys and other professionals, all court and arbitration costs and all costs of repair
and replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement
of CONTRACTOR's defective Work. CONTRACTOR shall not be allowed an extension of the
Contract Time because of any delay in performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by
OWNER of OWNER's rights and remedies hereunder.
ARTICLE 14 - Payments to CONTRACTOR and Completion:
Schedule of Values:
14.1
The schedule of values established as provided in paragraph 2.8 will serve as the basis for
progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to
ARCHITECT. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number
of units completed.
Application for Progress Payment:
14.2
At least twenty (20) days before each progress payment is scheduled (but not more often than
once a month). CONTRACTOR shall submit to ARCHITECT for review an Application for
Payment filled out and signed by CONTRACTOR covering the Work completed as of the date
of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the
Contract Documents. Payment will not be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in
the Work or not stored at the site. The amount of retainage shall be 10% until final payment.
ARCHITECT shall approve storage of materials on site, and may limit such storage.
CONTRACTOR's Warranty of Title:
14.3
CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered
by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to
OWNER no later than the time of payment free and clear of all Liens.
Review of Application for Progress Payment:
14.4
ARCHITECT will, within fifteen (15) days after receipt of each Application for Payment, either
indicate in writing a recommendation of payment, and present the Application to OWNER, or
return the Application to CONTRACTOR indicating in writing ARCHITECT’s reasons for
refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, CONTRACTOR may make the necessary
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-31
corrections and resubmit the Application, sixty (60) days after presentation of the Application for
Payment with ARCHITECT’s recommendation, the amount recommended will become due and
when due will be paid by OWNER to CONTRACTOR.
14.4.1 In the absence of sufficient reasons, within twenty (20) days of the receipt of payment by the
CONTRACTOR, the CONTRACTOR will be obligated to pay all Subcontractors with whom he
has contracted the earned share of the payment the CONTRACTOR has received.
14.5
By recommending any payment, ARCHITECT will not thereby be deemed to have represented
that exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections have been made to check the quality or the
quantity of the Work, or that there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that
might entitle CONTRACTOR to be paid additionally by OWNER or OWNER to withhold
payment to CONTRACTOR.
14.6
The ARCHITECT may decline to certify payment and may withhold the Certificate in whole or
in part to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the OWNER. If the CONTRACTOR and
the ARCHITECT cannot agree on a revised amount, the ARCHITECT will promptly issue a
Project Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the ARCHITECT is able to make such
representations to the OWNER. The ARCHITECT may also decline to certify payment or,
because of subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent observations, the ARCHITECT may
nullify the whole or any part of any Project Certificate for Payment previously issued to such
extent as may be necessary, in the ARCHITECT’s opinion, to protect the OWNER from loss and
the OWNER may withhold payment because of:
14.6.1
Defective Work not remedied;
14.6.2
Third part claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims;
14.6.3
Failure of the CONTRACTOR to make payments properly to Subcontractors, or for labor,
materials or equipment;
14.6.4
14.6.5
Reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract
Sum;
Damage to the OWNER or another contractor;
14.6.6
Reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time;
14.6.7
Unsatisfactory prosecution of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; or
14.6.8
Failure to comply with government statutes, regulations and laws.
Substantial Completion:
14.7
When CONTRACTOR considers the entire Work ready for its intended use CONTRACTOR
shall notify OWNER and ARCHITECT in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete
(except for items specifically listed by CONTRACTOR as incomplete) and request that
ARCHITECT issue a certificate of Substantial Completion.
Within a reasonable time thereafter, OWNER, CONTRACTOR and ARCHITECT shall make an
inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If ARCHITECT does not consider
the Work substantially complete, ARCHITECT will notify CONTRACTOR in writing giving
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-32
the reasons therefor. If ARCHITECT considers the work substantially complete, ARCHITECT
will prepare and deliver to OWNER a tentative certificate of Substantial Completion which shall
fix the date of Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the certificate a tentative list of
items to be completed or corrected before final payment. OWNER shall have fifteen (15) days
after receipt of the tentative certificate during which to make written objection to ARCHITECT
as to any provisions of the certificate or attached list. If, after considering such objections,
ARCHITECT concludes that the Work is not substantially complete, ARCHITECT will within
fifteen (15) days after submission of the tentative certificate to OWNER notify CONTRACTOR
in writing, stating the reasons therefor. If, after consideration of OWNER's objections,
ARCHITECT considers the Work substantially complete, ARCHITECT will within said fifteen
(15) days executive and deliver to OWNER and CONTRACTOR a definitive certificate of
Substantial Completion (with a revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected)
reflecting such changes from the tentative certificate as ARCHITECT believes justified after
consideration of any objections from OWNER. At the time of delivery of the tentative
certificate of substantial Completion ARCHITECT will deliver to OWNER and CONTRACTOR
a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities pending final payment between
OWNER and CONTRACTOR with respect to security, operation, safety, maintenance, heat,
utilities, insurance and warranties.
14.8
OWNER shall have the right to exclude CONTRACTOR from the Work after the date of
Substantial Completion, but OWNER shall allow contractor reasonable access to complete or
correct items on the tentative list.
Final Inspection:
14.9
Upon written notice from CONTRACTOR that the entire Work, or an agreed portion thereof, is
complete, ARCHITECT will make a final inspection with OWNER and CONTRACTOR and
will notify CONTRACTOR in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the
Work is incomplete or defective. CONTRACTOR shall immediately take such measures as are
necessary to remedy such deficiencies.
Final Application for Payment:
14.10
After CONTRACTOR has completed all such corrections to the Satisfaction of ARCHITECT
and delivered all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, Bonds,
certificates of inspection, marked-up, record documents (as provided in paragraph 6.19) and
other documents--all as requires by the Contract Documents--and, after ARCHITECT has
indicated that the Work is acceptable (subject to the provisions of paragraph 14.14),
CONTRACTOR may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress
payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied by all documentation called
for in the Contract Documents, together with complete and legally effective releases or waivers
(satisfactory to OWNER) of all Liens arising out of, or filed in connection with, the Work. In
lieu thereof, and as approved by OWNER, CONTRACTOR may furnish receipts or releases in
full; an affidavit of CONTRACTOR that the releases and receipts include all labor, services,
material and equipment for which a Lien could be filed, and that all payrolls, material and
equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which OWNER or
OWNER's property might in any way be responsible, have been paid or otherwise satisfied; and
consent of the surety, if any, to final payment. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish a
release or receipt in full, CONTRACTOR may furnish a Bond or other collateral satisfactory to
OWNER to indemnify OWNER against any Lien.
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-33
Final Payment and Acceptance:
14.11
If, on the basis of ARCHITECT’s observation of the Work during construction and final
inspection, and ARCHITECT’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying
documentation--all as required by the Contract Documents-- ARCHITECT is satisfied that the
Work has been completed and CONTRACTOR's other obligations under the Contract
Documents have been fulfilled, ARCHITECT will, within ten (10) days after receipt of the final
Application for Payment, indicate in writing ARCHITECT’s recommendation of payment and
present the Application to OWNER for payment. Thereupon, ARCHITECT will give written
notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR that the Work is acceptable, subject to the provisions of
paragraph 14.14. Otherwise, ARCHITECT will return the Application to CONTRACTOR,
indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case
CONTRACTOR shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. Sixty (60)
days after presentation to OWNER of the Application and accompanying documentation, in
appropriate form and substance, and with ARCHITECT’s recommendation and notice of
acceptability, the amount recommended by ARCHITECT will become due and will be paid by
OWNER to CONTRACTOR.
14.12
If, through no fault of CONTRACTOR, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed
and if ARCHITECT so confirms, OWNER shall, upon receipt of CONTRACTOR's final
Application for Payment and recommendation of ARCHITECT, and without terminating the
Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and
accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by OWNER for Work not fully completed or
corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been
furnished as required in paragraph 5.1, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the
balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by
CONTRACTOR to ARCHITECT with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall
be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not
constitute a waiver of claims.
CONTRACTOR's Continuing Obligations:
14.13
CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents shall be absolute. Neither recommendation of any progress or final payment by
ARCHITECT, nor the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion, not any payment by
OWNER to CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents, nor any use or occupancy of the
Work or any part thereof by OWNER, nor any act of acceptance by OWNER, nor any failure to
do so, nor any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or sample submission, nor the issuance of
a notice of acceptability by ARCHITECT pursuant to paragraph 14.11, nor any correction of
defective Work by OWNER will constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the
Contract Documents or a release of CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents (except as provided in paragraph 14.14).
Waiver of Claims:
14.14
The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute:
14.14.1 A waiver of all claims by OWNER against CONTRACTOR, except claims arising from
unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection pursuant to paragraph 14.9,
or from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees
specified therein; however, it will not constitute a waiver by OWNER of any rights in respect of
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-34
CONTRACTOR's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and
14.14.2 A waiver of all claims by CONTRACTOR against OWNER other than those previously made in
writing and still unsettled.
Liquidated Damages
14.15.1
CONTRACTOR and the CONTRACTOR’s Surety shall be liable for and shall pay the
OWNER the sums herein stipulated as Liquidated Damages for failure to provide substantially
complete Work within the time limits indicated in the Contract Documents and for failure to
complete or correct all items on the Punch List within the specified time limit.
14.15.2 CONTRACTOR shall be liable to the OWNER for Liquidated Damages for failure to meet
Substantial Completion on each project phase and shall pay to the OWNER the sum of
$500.00 each calendar day (Saturdays, Sundays and Holidays included) of delay from the date
stipulated for the completion of the Work as substantially complete. Refer to Contract
Documents for phasing plan.
14.15.3 CONTRACTOR shall be liable to the OWNER for Liquidated Damages for failure to complete or
correct Punch List items and shall pay to the OWNER the sum of $500.00 each calendar day
(Saturdays, Sundays and Holidays included) beyond forty-five (45) calendar days after the
certification of Substantial Completion until Work for corrections are complete.
The OWNER shall have the right to deduct the total amount of any fixed, agreed and Liquidated Damages
for which the CONTRACTOR may be liable from any moneys otherwise due to the CONTRACTOR
under the Contract, including any retainage held by OWNER.
ARTICLE 15 - Suspension of Work and Termination
OWNER May Suspend Work:
15.1
OWNER may, at any time and without cause, suspend the Work, or any portion thereof, for a
period of not more than ninety (90) days by notice in writing to CONTRACTOR and
ARCHITECT which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. CONTRACTOR shall
resume the Work on the date so fixed. CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an increase in the
Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, or both, directly attributable to any
suspension if CONTRACTOR makes an approved claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and
12.
OWNER May Terminate:
15.2.1
If the CONTRACTOR is adjudged a bankrupt, or makes a general assignment for the benefit of
creditors, or if a receiver is appointed on account of the CONTRACTOR's insolvency, or if the
CONTRACTOR persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled
workers or proper materials, or fails to make prompt payment to Subcontractors or for materials
or labor, or persistently disregards laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public
authority having jurisdiction, or otherwise is guilty of a substantial violation of a provision of the
Contract Documents, and fails within seven (7) days after receipt of written notice to commence
and continue correction of such default, neglect or violation with diligence and promptness, the
OWNER, upon certification by the ARCHITECT that sufficient cause exists to justify such
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-35
action, may, after seven (7) days following receipt by the CONTRACTOR of an additional
written notice and without prejudice to any other remedy the OWNER may have, terminate the
employment of the CONTRACTOR and take possession of the site and of all materials,
equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the CONTRACTOR
and may finish the Work by whatever methods the OWNER may deem expedient. In such case
the CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is
finished. In the event of termination, the CONTRACTOR hereby assigns to the OWNER, at the
OWNER's option, any and all subcontracts and material and supply contracts made by the
CONTRACTOR for this Contract. This paragraph is for the exclusive benefit of the OWNER
and the OWNER shall have no obligation to exercise these rights for the benefit of any other
CONTRACTOR or person.
15.2.2
If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds the costs of finishing the Work, including
compensation for the ARCHITECT’s and OWNER’s services made necessary thereby, such
excess shall be paid to the CONTRACTOR. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, the
CONTRACTOR shall pay the difference to the OWNER. The amount to be paid to the
CONTRACTOR or to the OWNER, as the case may be, shall be certified by the ARCHITECT,
upon application, in the manner provided in paragraph 9.3, and this obligation for payment shall
survive the termination of the Contract.
Termination by the CONTRACTOR
15.3.1
If the Work is stopped for a period of thirty (30) days under an order of any court or other public
authority having jurisdiction, other than the OWNER, through no act or fault of the
CONTRACTOR or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons
performing any of the Work under a contract with the CONTRACTOR, then the
CONTRACTOR may, upon seven (7) additional days' written notice to the OWNER and
ARCHITECT, terminate the Contract and recover from the OWNER payment for all Work
executed. The foregoing sentence shall be the exclusive and sole remedy available in the event
of termination, and the OWNER shall not be liable to the CONTRACTOR for any losses, lost
profits, or damages.
ARTICLE 16 - Miscellaneous
Government Law
16.1
The Contract shall be governed by the laws of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania.
Successors and Assigns
16.2
The OWNER and the CONTRACTOR, respectively, bind themselves, their partners, successors,
assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to the partners, successors, assigns
and legal representatives of such other party with respect to all covenants, agreements and
obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Neither party to the Contract shall assign the
Contract or sublet it as a whole without the written consent of the other.
Written Notice
16.3
Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual
or member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for whom it was intended, or if
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-36
delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address known to the party
giving the notice. Written notice to the OWNER shall be deemed to have been duly served if
delivered in person or sent by registered or certified mail to the Lancaster County
Commissioners, Lancaster County Government Center, Suite 715, 150 North Queen Street,
Lancaster, PA 17603.
Claims for Damages
16.4
Should the CONTRACTOR suffer injury or damage to person or property because of an act or
omission of the OWNER or of any of the OWNER's employees, agents or others for whose act
the OWNER is legally liable, claim shall be made in writing to the OWNER within twenty (20)
days after the first observance of such injury or damage, otherwise such claim shall be waived.
This clause shall not allow claims for injury or damages which are otherwise precluded by these
Contract Documents.
Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bonds
16.5
The OWNER shall have the right to require the CONTRACTOR to furnish bonds covering the
faithful performance of the Contract and the payment of all obligations arising thereunder if and
as required in the Bidding Documents or the Contract Documents.
Rights and Remedies
16.6
The duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and the rights and remedies
available thereunder shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, any duties, obligations, rights
and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law.
16.7
No action or failure to act by the OWNER, ARCHITECT, OWNERS CONSULTANTS, or the
CONTRACTOR, shall constitute a waiver of any right or duty afforded any of them under the
Contract, nor shall any such action or failure to act constitute an approval of or acquiescence in
any breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed in writing.
Tests
16.8.1
If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority
having jurisdiction require any portion of the Work to be inspected, tested or approved, the
CONTRACTOR shall give the ARCHITECT timely notice of its readiness so the ARCHITECT
may observe such inspection, testing or approval. The CONTRACTOR shall bear all costs of
such inspections, tests or approval conducted by public authorities. Unless otherwise provided,
the OWNER shall bear all costs of other inspections, tests or approvals.
16.8.2
If the ARCHITECT determines that any Work requires special inspection, testing or approval
which paragraph 16.8.1 does not include, the ARCHITECT shall, upon written authorization
from the OWNER, instruct the CONTRACTOR to order such special inspection, testing or
approval, and the CONTRACTOR shall give notice as provided in paragraph 16.8.1. If such
special inspection or testing reveals a failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the
Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall bear all costs thereof, including compensation
for the ARCHITECT’s additional services made necessary by such failure; otherwise the
OWNER shall bear such costs, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued.
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-37
16.8.3
Required certificates of inspection, testing or approval shall be secured by the CONTRACTOR
and the CONTRACTOR shall promptly deliver them to the ARCHITECT.
16.8.4 If the ARCHITECT wishes to observe the inspections, tests or approvals required by the Contract
Documents, they will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the source of supply.
Forum Selection
16.9
The parties agree that all disputes arising between CONTRACTOR and OWNER related to this
contact shall be heard by the Lancaster County Court of Common Pleas or by the United States
Court for Eastern District.
**END OF SECTION**
GENERAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
007000-38
SECTION 008000
SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
1. Section Includes:
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Purpose
Insurance Limits
Measurements of Quantities
Deliveries and Limits on Demolition Activities
Criminal History Reports
Construction Career Opportunity Initiative
2. Purpose:
These SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS amend or supplement the GENERAL CONDITIONS. All
provisions of the GENERAL CONDITIONS which are not so amended or supplemented, remain in
full force and effect.
3. Reference GENERAL CONDITIONS Article 5.3 CONTRACTOR’s Liability Insurance.
ADD the following coverage limits:
The CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain insurance for protection from the claims set forth
below which may arise out of or result from the CONTRACTOR's operations under the Contract,
whether such operations are by the CONTRACTOR or by any subcontractor, or by anyone directly or
indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable:
(a) claims under workers' or workmen's compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee
benefits acts;
(b) claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of the
Contractor's employees;
(c) claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any
person other than the Contractor's employees;
(d) claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage which are sustained (1) by
any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person
by the Contractor, or (2) by any other person;
(e) claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible
property, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and
(f) claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage
arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle.
SUPPLEMENTAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
008000-1
The required insurance will be written for not less than the following, or greater if required by law:
(a) Workers' Compensation:
(1) State: Pennsylvania Statutory
(2) Applicable Federal (e.g., Longshoreman, Harbor Work, Work at or outside
U.S. Boundaries): Statutory
(3) Employer's Liability: $100,000.00/$500,000.00/$100,000.00
(b) Comprehensive General Liability (including Premises Operations; Independent Contractor's
Protective; Products and Completed Operations; Broad Form Property Damage):
(1) Bodily Injury:
$1,000,000.00
$2,000,000.00
Each Occurrence
Aggregate, Products and Complete Operations
(2) Property Damage:
$1,000,000.00
$2,000,000.00
Each Occurrence
Annual Aggregate
(3) Products and Completed Operations Insurance to be maintained for one (1) year after final
payment and Contractor will continue to provide evidence of such coverage to Owner on an
annual basis during the aforementioned period.
(4) Property Damage Liability Insurance will include coverage for the following hazards, as
applicable:
X (Explosion)
C (Collapse)
U (Underground)
(5) Contractual Liability (Hold Harmless Coverage):
Bodily Injury:
$1,000,000.00
Each Occurrence
Property Damage:
$1,000,000.00
$2,000,000.00
Each Occurrence
Annual Aggregate
(6) Personal Injury, with Employment Exclusion deleted:
$1,000,000.00
SUPPLEMENTAL
CONDITIONS
Each Person
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
008000-2
(c) Comprehensive Automobile Liability, including owned, non-ownership and hired car coverage
vehicles:
(1) Bodily Injury:
$1,000,000.00
$2,000,000.00
Each Person
Each Occurrence
Property Damage:
$1,000,000.00
Each Occurrence, or
$2,000,000.00
Combined Single Limit
(d) Other Insurances:
(a) $10,000,000 - Each Occurrence Umbrella Liability
$10,000,000 - Aggregate
(b) General Liability and Umbrella - include the County of Lancaster as an additional insured on
a primary and non-contributory basis.
(c)
Per Job Aggregate - If 1986 General Liability Form is used, attach Endorsement
#CG2503.
The required insurance shall include applicable contractual liability insurance to indemnify the
OWNER and ARCHITECT.
Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the OWNER shall be submitted to the OWNER for review prior
to commencement of the Work. These Certificates shall contain a provision that coverage’s afforded
under the policies will not be canceled until at least thirty days' prior written notice has been given to
the OWNER.
The CONTRACTOR shall furnish one copy of certificates herein required for each copy of
Agreement, specifically setting forth evidence of all coverage required by Paragraph 11.1. The form
of the certificate shall be AIA Document G705. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish to the OWNER
copies of any endorsements that are subsequently issued amending coverage or limits.
4. Measurements of Quantities
The quantities of materials provided will be computed by the ENGINEER on the basis of
measurements taken by the ENGINEER, and these measurements shall be final and binding.
5. Night and Sunday Deliveries and Limits on Demolition Activities
No deliveries shall be made between the hours of 7:00 P.M. and 7:00 A.M. or on Saturday or Sunday,
expect in the case of an emergency and then only with the permission of the OWNER.
SUPPLEMENTAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
008000-3
Prohibited - In accordance with the Lancaster City Code, Chapter 198 - Lancaster Noise Control
Ordinance, operating or permitting the operation of any tools or equipment used in construction
operations, commencing drilling or demolition work between the hours of 9:00 p.m. and 7:00 a.m on
weekdays and Saturdays, or any time on Sundays or legal holidays, such that the sound therefrom
creates a noise disturbance across the residential real property line (boundary), except for emergency
work, is prohibited.
Prohibited - Operating or permitting the operation of any impact drilling, jackhammering, saw cutting
or other activities that create a noise disturbance that would disrupt normal Lancaster County
Courthouse activities between the hours of 9:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. on weekdays, except for
emergency work, is prohibited.
6. Criminal History Reports
The CONTRACTOR and any SUBCONTRACTOR will be required to file a Criminal History Report
with the County for any employee who will be working at the site. Each CONTRACTOR and any
SUBCONTRACTOR shall supply report forms and submit to the State Police for review and
approval.
7. Construction Career Opportunity Initiative
A.
Reference Specification Section 008000 Minority and Woman Business Participation and
Cooperation Plan.
B. The County of Lancaster will support an employment opportunity program to encourage
contractors, working on County funded projects to hire Lancaster County residents who have:
1. Graduated from either the Lancaster County Workforce Investment Board (WIB) WIB
Construction 101, or the Spanish American Civic Association (SACA) SACA’s
YouthBuild construction program, or a similar pre-apprenticeship program, and/or are
2. Employed by a Contractor working on a County project and enrolled in an approved
apprenticeship program.
This program will only be available to companies who are awarded construction or renovation
contracts for County owned facilities.
Requirements for reimbursement:
1. The County of Lancaster agrees to reimburse the Contractor at the rate of $2.00 per hour
worked by each new employee hired as part of this program working on a County
construction/renovation project. The effective date for beginning payment for hours
worked shall be upon confirmation that the employee has graduated from a preapprenticeship program and/or is currently enrolled in an approved County apprenticeship
program. The maximum compensation to be paid is $2,000 per employee. The maximum
total payment per contract shall be based upon the following schedule:
SUPPLEMENTAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
008000-4
Contract Value
$
0
$
25,001
$
100,001
$
250,001
$
500,001
$ 1,000,001
$ 5,000,001
$ 10,000,001
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
$
25,000
$
100,000
$
250,000
$
500,000
$ 1,000,000
$ 5,000,000
$ 10,000,000
and above
Maximum Payment
$ 1,000
$ 2,000
$ 4,000
$ 8,000
$ 16,000
$ 24,000
$ 36,000
$ 50,000
2. Current County programs are:
- Pre- apprenticeship programs
WIB Construction 101
SACA Youth Build Program
- Apprenticeship programs
ABC Apprenticeship program
All other programs must be approved by the County to qualify for reimbursement. The
County’s decision on a programs qualification is final.
3. Attendance of the employee in the apprenticeship program, and verification of residency,
must be certified by the contractor and made part of his request for payment.
4. Contractor must submit certified payrolls, indicating the hours the employee worked on
the project, either as part of the women and minority compliance reporting forms or by
separate form.
**END OF SECTION**
SUPPLEMENTAL
CONDITIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
008000-5
SECTION 008100
STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS
HUMAN RELATIONS ACT:
Pursuant to the provisions of the Pennsylvania Human Relations Act, No. 222 of October 27, 1955 (P.L.
744) (43 P.S., 951, et seq.) of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania and Human Relations Contract
Compliance, 16 Pa. Code Chapter 49, that prohibits certain practices or discrimination because of race,
color, religious creed, ancestry, age, sex, national origin, handicap or disability, by employers, employment
agencies, labor organizations, contractors and others, the contractor shall agree to comply with the
provisions of this Act as amended and that is made part of this document as if included herein at length.
LABOR REGULATIONS:
For projects exceeding total construction cost of $25,000: Pennsylvania Prevailing Wage Rates (Act No.
442 of 1961, P.L. 987, amended by Act 342 of 1963, P.L. 653) (43 P.S. 165 et. seq). This regulation and
the Prevailing Minimum Wage Determination Schedule, as determined by the Secretary of Labor and
Industry which shall be paid for each craft or classification of all workers needed to perform the contract
during the anticipated term therefore in the locality in which public work is performed, are made part of
this document.
PENNSYLVANIA PREVAILING WAGE ACT:
No person shall be employed to work under this Contract except competent and first-class workers and
mechanics. No workers shall be regarded as competent and first-class except those who are duly skilled in
their respective branches of labor, and who shall be paid not less than such rates of wages and for such
hours as established by the Secretary of the Department of Labor and Industry under the “Pennsylvania
Prevailing Wage Act” (43 P.S. 165 et. seq.) as amended and supplemented.
The general prevailing minimum wage rates including contributions for employee benefits as determined by
the Secretary shall be paid to the workers employed in the performance of the contract.
The Contractor shall pay no less than the wage rates as determined in the decision of the Secretary of
Labor and Industry and shall comply with the conditions of the Pennsylvania Prevailing Wage Act
approved August 15, 1961 (Act No. 442), as amended August 9, 1963 (Act No. 342) (45 P.S., 165 et.
seq.) and the Regulations issued pursuant thereto, to assure the full and proper payment of said rates.
All workers shall be paid no less than such general prevailing minimum wage rates and such other
provisions to assure payment thereof as heretofore set forth in this document.
The Contract provisions shall apply to all work performed on the contract by the Contractor and to all
work performed on the contract by all Subcontractors.
STATUTORY
REQUIREMENTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
008100 - 1
The Contractor shall insert in each subcontract all of the stipulations contained in these required provisions
and such other stipulations as may be required.
No workers may be employed on the public work except in accordance with the classifications set forth in
the decision of the Secretary. In the event that additional or different classifications are necessary, the
procedure set forth in Section 7 of these Regulations shall be followed.
All workers employed or working on the public work shall be paid unconditionally, regardless of whether
any contractual relationship exists or the nature of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to
exist between any contractor, subcontractor and workers, not less than once a week without deduction or
rebate, on any account, either directly or indirectly, except authorized deductions, the full amounts due at
the time of payment, computed at the rates applicable to the time worked in the appropriate classification.
Nothing in the contract, the Act or these Regulations shall prohibit the payment of more than the general
prevailing minimum wage rates as determined by the Secretary to any worker on public works.
The Contractor and each Subcontractor shall post for the entire period of construction, the wage
determination decisions of the Secretary, including the effective date of any changes thereof, in a prominent
and easily accessible place or places at the site of the work and at such place or places used by them to pay
workers their wages. The posted notice of wage rates shall contain the following information:
1. Name of Project.
2. Name of public body of which it is being constructed.
3. The crafts and classifications of workers listed in Secretary’s general prevailing minimum wage
rate determination for the particular project.
4. The general prevailing minimum wage rates determined for each craft and classification and the
effective date of any changes.
5. A statement advising workers that if they have been paid less than the general prevailing
minimum wage rate for the job classification or that the Contractor and/or Subcontractor are not
complying with the Act or these Regulations in any manner whatsoever, the may file a protest in
writing with the Secretary of Labor and Industry within three (3) months of the date of the
occurrence, objecting to the payment to any Contractor to the extent of the amount or amounts
due or to become due to them as wages for work performed on the public work project. Any
workers paid less than the rate specified in the contract shall have a civil right of action for the
difference between the wage paid and the wages stipulated in the contract, which right of action
must be exercised within six (6) months from the occurrence of the event creating such right.
The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall keep an accurate record showing the time, craft and/or
classification, number of hours worked per day, and the actual hourly rate of wage paid (including
employee benefits) to each worker employed by them in connection with the public work and such record
must include any deductions from each worker.
The record shall be preserved for two years from the date of payment and shall be open at all reasonable
hours to the inspection of the public body awarding the contract and to the Secretary or the secretary’s duly
authorized representative.
Apprentices shall be limited to such numbers as shall be in accordance with a bona fide apprenticeship
program registered with and approved by the Pennsylvania Apprenticeship and Training council and only
apprentices whose training and employment are in full compliance with the provisions of the
STATUTORY
REQUIREMENTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
008100 - 2
Apprenticeship and Training Act approved July 14, 1961, P.L. 604 (Act No. 304) (43 P.S. 90.1 et. seq.)
and the Rules and Regulations issued pursuant thereto shall be employed on the public work project. Any
workers using the tools of a craft who does not qualify as an apprentice within the provisions of this
subsection shall be paid the rate predetermined for journeymen in that particular craft and/or classification.
Wages shall be paid without any deductions except authorized deductions. Employers not parties to a
contract requiring contributions for employee benefits which the Secretary has determined to be included in
the general prevailing minimum wage rate shall pay the monetary equivalent thereof directly to the workers.
Payment of compensation to workers for work performed on public work on a lump sum basis, or a piece
work systems, or a price certain for the completion of a certain amount of work, or the production of a
certain result shall be deemed a violation of the Act and these Regulations, regardless of the average hourly
earnings resulting therefrom.
The contract shall also provide that each Contractor and each subcontractor shall file a statement each
week and a final statement at the conclusion of the work on the contract with the contracting agency, under
oath, and in form, satisfactory to the Secretary, certifying that all workers have been paid in wages in strict
conformity with the provision of the contract as prescribed in these Regulations, or if any wages remain
unpaid to set forth the amount of wages due and owing to each worker respectively.
The provisions of the Act are hereby incorporated by reference in the Contract.
CITIZENS:
Only citizens of the United States of America shall be employed, in any capacity, in the performance of any
work under the contract; provided, however, that apprentices to a trade or professions who may be under
twenty-one (21) years of age shall not be subject to the foregoing restriction.
DOMESTIC AND FOREIGN MATERIALS:
Except for materials listed hereinafter, only such unmanufactured or manufactured articles, materials and
supplies as have been mined, produced or manufactured in the United States of America, as the case may
be, shall be employed under the Contract in the construction of this Project.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Chromium
Cork
Flax
Hemp
Jute
Lac
Manganese Ore (35% and over)
Mercury
Mica
Nickel
Sisal
Tin
Titanium
Tungsten
STATUTORY
REQUIREMENTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
008100 - 3
15. Wire Glass
SAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION:
The Contractor shall be fully informed with and shall comply with all local, state and federal regulations
for construction as amended to date, as the rules and regulations in detail apply for the construction work
under the contract. All applicable rules and regulations governing bodies are hereby made a part of this
document by reference, as if written out in full within.
MOTOR VEHICLE PROCUREMENT ACT:
The Motor Vehicle Procurement Act of 1984, 73 P.S. 1891 et seq. required authorities to purchase, lease,
or rent motor vehicles manufactured or substantially assembled in North America. Contract documents for
motor vehicle procurement must contain a provision that the procured vehicle shall be manufactured in
North America 73 P.S. 1895.
STEEL PRODUCTS PROCUREMENT ACT:
In accordance with the provisions of Act of March 3, 1978, P.L. 6 No. 3 (73 P.S. 1801 et. seq.), every
public agency shall require that every contract document for the construction, reconstruction, alteration,
repair, improvement or maintenance of public works contain a provision that, if any steel products are to be
used or supplied in the performance of the contract, only steel products as herein defined shall be used or
supplied in the performance of the contract or any subcontractors thereunder.
“Public works” are defined as any structure, building, highway, waterway, street, bridge, transit system,
airport or other betterment, work or improvement whether of a permanent or temporary nature and whether
for governmental or proprietary use.
“Steel products” are defined as products rolled, formed, shaped, drawn, extruded, forged, cast, fabricated
or otherwise similarly processed, or processed by a combination of two or more of such operations, from
steel made in the United States by the open hearth, basic oxygen, electric furnace, Bessemer or other steel
making process.
“United States” are defined as the United States of America and includes all territory, continental or
insular, subject to the jurisdiction of the United States.
In accordance with 73 P.S. 1886, cast iron products shall also be included and produced in the United
States. Section 1886 further defines “steel products” to include machinery and equipment. The act also
provides clarifications and penalties. (73 P.S. 1885).
ANTI-POLLUTION LEGISLATION:
On October 26, 1972, House Bill Number 1969 was enacted into law. This Act (No. 247) (53 P.S. 1611),
became effective on November 25, 1982. It requires that Bidders on construction contracts for the
Commonwealth of Pennsylvania be advised that there are provisions of Federal and State statutes, rules
and regulations dealing with the prevention of environmental pollution and the preservation of public
natural resources that affect the Project on which bids are being received.
STATUTORY
REQUIREMENTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
008100 - 4
The Bidder shall become thoroughly acquainted with the terms of the listed statutes, rules and regulations,
including but not limited to Flood Plain Management Act, Pennsylvania Scenic Rivers Act, Dam Safety
and Encroachment Act, Bluff Recession and Setback Act, Storm Water Management Act, Pennsylvania
Sewage Facilities Act, Pennsylvania Solid Waste Management Act, Pennsylvania Safe Drinking Water
Act, the Clean Streams Law, Pennsylvania Air Pollution Control Act, Pennsylvania Historic Preservation
Act (to the extent that it applies to school districts), Pennsylvania Hazardous Sites Clean Up Act,
Pennsylvania Spill Prevention and Leaking Underground Storage Tank Act, Comprehensive Environmental
Response, Compensation, and Liability Act of 1980, as amended, including but not limited to SARA
Reauthorization Act, Federal Solid Waste Disposal Act, Federal Clean Air Act, Federal Safe Drinking
Water Act, Wild and Scenic River Act, Endangered Species Conservation Act of 1969, Federal Clean
Water Act of 1977, Rivers and Harbors Act of 1970, Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act,
Toxic Substance Control Act, Resource Conservation and Recovery Act of 1976, Federal Act on Leaking
Underground Storage Tanks, Pennsylvania Workers and Community Rights to Know Act, Asbestos
Hazards Emergency Response Act, Delaware River Basin Commission Compact, Pennsylvania
Municipalities Planning Code, regulations, ordinances, and other actions pursuant to the foregoing
regulations pertaining to Pennsylvania Soils Erosion and Sedimentation Control, and so on. No separate or
additional payment will be made for such compliance. In the event that the listed statutes, rules and
regulations are amended, or if new statues, rules or regulations become effective, after date of receipt of
bids, upon receipt of documentation which causes the Contractor to perform additional work, the Owner
may issue a change order or deviation request setting forth the additional work that must be undertaken.
This change order or deviation request shall not invalidate the Contract.
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine what local ordinances, if any, will affect his work.
The Contractor shall check for any county, city, borough or township rules or regulations applicable to the
area in which the Project is being constructed and, in addition, for any rules or regulations of other
organizations having jurisdiction, such as chambers-of-commerce, planning commissions, industries or
utility companies who have jurisdiction over lands which the Contractor occupies. Any costs of
compliance with local controls shall be included in the prices bid, even though documents of such local
controlling agencies are not listed herein.
EROSION CONTROL:
Contractors performing excavation work shall comply with all rules and regulations of The Pennsylvania
Code, Title 25, Chapter 102, Soils Erosion and Sedimentation Control. Prior to any upgrading, the
Contractor shall be responsible to obtain approval from the Department of Environmental Resources for an
approved sedimentation and erosion control site plan and shall perform all necessary site work in
accordance with said plan. The plan shall be available at the site at all items. Contractors performing
excavation work shall maintain all devices as required to control erosion caused by storm water and prevent
dust and particles from being distributed off site.
Site Excavation: Contractor shall agree that, not less than three (3) working days prior to beginning
excavation or demolition work as defined in Act of December 12, 1991, No. 172 of the
Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, amending Act 287 of December 10, 1974, he shall request the
information required by Section 5 (73 P.S. 176 et seq.), of the Act and shall inform each operator
employed at the site of the work of the information received with respect to location of underground
installations. Contractor shall agree to report immediately, to the user of the underground
installations and to the Owner and Architect, any break in its lines or dent, gouge, conditions groove
STATUTORY
REQUIREMENTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
008100 - 5
or other damage to such lines, to their coating or cathodic protection, made or discovered in the
course of the excavation or demolition work.
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS:
Contractors shall comply with all requirements of the Act of October 5, 1984, No. 159 (35 P.S., 7301 et.
seq.) “Worker and Community Right-To-Know Act”, as enacted by the Pennsylvania Legislature.
Contractors shall provide all information regarding the composition of all materials and products unused or
installed as part of this project work when required.
ANTIBID-RIGGING ACT:
The Antibid-Rigging Act of 1983 73 P.S. 1611 et. seq. makes it a crime for two or more persons by
concerted activity, to determine in advance the winning bidder of a contract let or to be left for competitive
bidding by a municipal authority. Criminal penalties are imposed on violators. The Act permits, but
doesn’t require, construction bidding documents to provide for delivery or an anti-collusion affidavit.
** END OF SECTION **
STATUTORY
REQUIREMENTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
008100 - 6
SECTION 008200
MINORITY & WOMEN BUSINESS
PARTICIPATION & COOPERATION PLAN
Section 1.
Section 2.
Section 3.
Section 4.
Section 5.
Section 6.
Section 7.
Section 8.
Section 9.
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
Declaration of Policy
Plan Objectives
General Provisions
Definitions
Administration
Oversight
Procedures to Ensure Equal Opportunity for Minority and Women Businesses to
Compete for Projects
General Provisions for Overall Voluntary Construction, Procurement, and
Service Projects Minimum Participation Levels
Enforcement
SECTION 1. DECLARATION OF POLICY
In accordance with the County Code, 16 P.S. §1802, it is the policy of the County of Lancaster to: (1)
provide minorities and women equal opportunity to participate in all aspects of County contracting and
purchasing programs, including but not limited to, participation in procurement contracts, and services
contracts, and construction contracts; (2) prohibit discrimination against any person or business in pursuit
of these opportunities on the basis of race, color, sex, religion, disability or national origin; and (3) to
conduct its contracting and purchasing programs so as to prevent any discrimination and to resolve all
claims of such discrimination.
The County of Lancaster will actively seek to identify qualified minority and women businesses and offer
them an opportunity to participate as providers of goods and services to Lancaster County Government.
It is the intent of this plan to widen opportunities for participation, increase competition and to ensure the
proper and diligent use of public funds. Bidders on County contracts shall not discriminate against any
business because of race, color, religion, national origin, sex or disability.
This policy is not intended in any manner to require that contracts be awarded to anyone other than the
lowest responsible bidder, nor to supersede the requirement of any federal, state or local laws and rules,
regulations and policies adopted pursuant thereto.
SECTION 2. PLAN OBJECTIVES
The objectives of the plan are:
a.
To provide minority and women businesses equal opportunity for participating in County
of Lancaster construction, contracting and procurement programs.
b.
To provide clear and concise procedures that will enable the County of Lancaster
to fulfill requirements of federal and state governments related to equal
employment opportunity for minority and women business participation in
construction and procurement programs.
c.
To increase the County of Lancaster's knowledge of minority and women businesses and
become familiar with available product lines and services through development of a
minority and women business list.
MINORITY & WOMEN BUSINESS
PARTICIPATION &
COOPERATION PLAN
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
008200-1
SECTION 3.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
Scope. Unless otherwise provided in this Plan or by law, this Plan shall apply to all construction
contracts, procurement and service contracts which the County is required by state law to bid.
B.
Not Applicable. The participation goal provisions of the Plan do not apply to transactions in
which there is no opportunity for direct or indirect participation of minority and women
businesses or unique transactions where the unique nature of the item makes it inappropriate to
apply this Plan or in emergency situations when a contract is awarded pursuant to noncompetitive solicitation. The Chairman shall as soon as practical after the emergency noncompetitive award, notify the County Administrator. The Board shall from time to time establish
categories or subcategories of such excluded transactions.
Categories of transactions conditionally excluded on this basis are set forth below. However, the
Chairman may further define the parameters of any excluded category, or determine that any
particular transaction is not excluded, to implement the policy that MBE and WBE participation
requirements shall be applicable to all transactions in which there is the opportunity for direct or
indirect participation. Excluded categories are those categories which are contained in 16 P.S.
§1802(h), listed below.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Those for maintenance, repairs or replacements for water, electric light, or other public
works of the County where they do not constitute new additions, extensions or
enlargements of existing facilities and equipment. Security may be required by the
Commissioners as in other cases for work done.
Those made for improvements, repairs and maintenance of any kind, made or provided
by the County through its own employees. This shall not apply to construction materials
used in a street improvement.
Those where particular types, models or pieces of new equipment, articles, apparatus,
appliances, vehicles or parts thereof, are desired by the Commissioners, which are
patented and manufactured or copyrighted products.
Those involving any policies of insurance or surety company bonds, those made for
public utility service and electricity, natural gas or telecommunication services, provided
that, in the case of utilities not under tariff with the Pennsylvania Public Utility
Commission, contracts made without advertising and bidding shall be made only after
receiving written or telephonic price quotations in accordance with the procedures
specified in 16 P.S. §1801(b) of the County Code.
Those involving services of members of the medical or legal profession, registered
architects, engineers, certified public accountants or other personal services involving
professional expertise.
Those involving contracts entered into by nonprofit cooperative hospital service
associations for hospitals and nursing homes which are part of the institutional district or
which are owned by the County, operated by the County or affiliated with the County by
the purchasing of, or participating in contracts for, materials, supplies and equipment.
Those made with any public body, including, but not limited to, the sale, lease or loan of
any supplies or materials to the County by a public body, provided that the price thereof
shall not be in excess of that fixed by the public body. The requirements of 53 Pa.C.S.
Ch. 23 Subch. A (relating to intergovernmental cooperation) shall not apply when a
county purchases cooperatively with another public body which has entered into a
contract for supplies or materials. As used in this paragraph, "public body" shall mean
any of the following:
MINORITY & WOMEN BUSINESS
PARTICIPATION &
COOPERATION PLAN
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
008200-2
(i) the Federal Government;
(ii) the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania;
(iii) any other state;
(iv) a political subdivision, local or municipal authority or other similar local
entity of the Commonwealth or any other state; or
(v) an agency of the Federal Government, the Commonwealth or any other state.
(8) Those exclusively involving construction management services.
(9) Those involving computer software.
(10) Any other contracts which the County is not required to bid.
SECTION 4. DEFINITIONS
The following words and terms, when used in this Plan, have the following meanings, unless the context
clearly indicates otherwise:
Advertising – The placement of a public notice:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
In a newspaper of general circulation published in Lancaster County.
In a trade publication.
By electronic publication which is accessible to the general public.
By issuance of invitations for bids and requests for proposals to bidders or
offerors on the County's solicitation mailing list.
By notification to prequalified bidders or offerors.
Beneficial Ownership – The ownership and control of a firm by minorities or women which is real,
substantial, and continuing and goes beyond the pro forma ownership of the firm as reflected in its
ownership documents. The minority and women owners should enjoy the customary incidents of
ownership and should share in the risks and profits commensurate with their ownership interest, as
demonstrated both by examination of the substance and form of arrangements.
Bid – A firm and unconditional offer in response to an invitation for bids.
Bidder – Any person seeking to be awarded a public contract or subcontract.
Board – Members of the Lancaster County Board of Commissioners or its designee.
Certification – A determination made by the Pennsylvania Department of General Services that a forprofit business entity is an MBE or WBE. In the alternative, the DGS may, by declaration, accept the
certification program of other public bodies if the certification program conforms substantially to the
program of the DGS established in §§1.451-1.459 (relating to minority and women business enterprise).
When the certification program of another public body has been declared to be accepted, an MBE or
WBE will be deemed certified under the DGS program if the certification remains current and if the
business entity has not been decertified.
Certified Minority Business Enterprise/Women Business Enterprise (MBE/WBE) – A small business that
has applied to the Pennsylvania Department of General Services and received certification as an
MBE/WBE.
Chairman – Chairman of the Lancaster County Board of Commissioners.
MINORITY & WOMEN BUSINESS
PARTICIPATION &
COOPERATION PLAN
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
008200-3
Construction – The process of building, altering, repairing, improving, or demolishing any public
structure or building or other public improvements of any kind to any public real property. The term does
not include the routine operation or maintenance of existing structures, buildings, or real property.
Contract – A type of written agreement, regardless of what it may be called, for the procurement of
supplies, services, or construction and executed by all parties.
Contract Compliance – A program designed to ensure that County contracting is nondiscriminating in
intent and effect. The program involves three aspects:
1.
2.
3.
Nondiscrimination in the County's award of contracts.
Nondiscrimination by those who are awarded County contracts in their award of
subcontracts and supply contracts for their performance under County contracts.
Nondiscrimination by those who are awarded County contracts in the hiring and
treatment of their employees.
Contractor – Any person who has entered into a contract with the County of Lancaster.
County – The County of Lancaster, Pennsylvania.
County Administrator – County Administrator of the County of Lancaster or his/her designee.
DGS – The Pennsylvania Department of General Services which oversees the certification of minorityowned and women-owned businesses for the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania.
Emergency – Existence of a threat to public health, welfare, or safety or circumstances outside the control
of the County creating an urgency of need which does not permit the delay involved in using formal,
competitive methods or as defined by the County Code.
Maintenance – Work that does not change the size, type, or extent of the facility. The facility includes the
component parts of the existing building or structure.
MBE or Minority Business Enterprise – A small business [for-profit business concern] that is one of the
following:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
A sole proprietorship owned and controlled by a minority.
A partnership or joint venture controlled by minorities in which at least 51% of
the beneficial ownership interest is held by minorities.
A corporation or other business entity controlled by minorities in which at least
51% of the voting interest and 51% of the beneficial ownership interest are held
by minorities.
Minority – A person who is a Black American, Hispanic American, Native American, Asian-Pacific
American or Asian-Indian American.
(i)
(ii)
Black (African) Americans – Persons having origins from any of the Black
groups of Africa. The term includes persons having origins in any of the original
peoples of the Cape Verde Islands.
Hispanic Americans – Persons having their origins from one or more of the
Spanish-speaking peoples of Mexico, Puerto Rico, Cuba, Central or South
American or the Caribbean Islands.
MINORITY & WOMEN BUSINESS
PARTICIPATION &
COOPERATION PLAN
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
008200-4
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
Native Americans – Persons having origins from one or more of the original
peoples of North America and who are recognized as an Indian by a tribe or
tribal organization.
Asian-Pacific Americans – Persons having origins from one or more of the
original peoples of the Far East, Southeast Asia or the Pacific Islands, including
China, Japan, Korea, Samoa and the Philippine Islands.
Asian-Indian Americans – Persons whose origins are from India, Pakistan, and
Bangladesh.
Person – Includes individuals, corporations, partnerships, associations, legal representatives, trustees,
trustees in bankruptcy or receivers.
Procurement – Buying, purchasing, renting, leasing, licensing, or otherwise acquiring any supply, service,
or construction. The term also includes all functions that pertain to the obtaining of any supply, service,
or construction, including description of requirements, selection and solicitation of sources, preparation
and award of contract, and all phases of contract administration.
Procurement Description – The words used in a solicitation to describe the supply, service, or
construction to be procured. The term includes specifications attached to or made a part of the
solicitation.
Proposal – An offer made in response to a request for proposal which may be subject to negotiation and
award criteria set forth in the request for proposal.
Request for Proposals (RFP) – All documents, including those either attached or incorporated by
reference, used for soliciting proposals.
Services – The furnishing of labor, time, or effort by a contractor not involving the delivery of a specific
end product other than drawings, specifications, or reports which are merely incidental to the required
performance. The term does not include employment agreements or collective bargaining agreements.
The term does not include utility services and those services provided by utilities such as electrical,
telephone, water, and sewage service.
Small Business – A business in the United States which is independently owned, is not dominant in its
field of operation and, employs no more than the maximum number of employees established by 62
Pa.C.S. §2102.
Subcontractor – Any person, who has contracted to furnish labor or materials to or who has performed
labor for a contractor or another subcontractor in connection with a public construction contract.
WBE or Women's Business Enterprise – A small business that is one of the following:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
A sole proprietorship owned and controlled by a woman.
A partnership or joint venture controlled by women in which at least 51% of the
beneficial ownership interest is held by women.
A corporation or other entity controlled by women in which at least 51% of the
voting interest and 51% of the beneficial ownership interest are held by women.
MINORITY & WOMEN BUSINESS
PARTICIPATION &
COOPERATION PLAN
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
008200-5
SECTION 5. ADMINISTRATION
A.
Authority. The County shall adopt race- and gender-neutral measures in the form and to the
extent determined by the Chairman from time to time to be practicable and effective in achieving
the purposes of the Plan. If any measure requires Board action, such as a change in a Board rule,
the Chairman shall so recommend. The County is hereby authorized to take all usual and legal
administrative actions necessary to implement the Plan. Notwithstanding any specific assignment
contained in the Plan, the ultimate responsibility for its administration is assigned to the
Chairman.
All departments funded in whole or part by the County should be encouraged to adhere to the
policies set forth herein. There shall be a brief statement recognizing the County's commitment
to the Minority and Women Business Plan included in all County written contracts.
B.
Policy. To emphasize non-restrictive methods in pursing the purposes of the Plan, the County
will execute throughout its procurement functions, to the full extent feasible and effective:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
methods that emphasize inclusion of M/WBEs;
measures that facilitate the execution of the Plan, including its M/WBE participation
requirements, in relation to other aspects of the County's procurement process;
programs of technical assistance to M/WBEs concerning Plan compliance and County
procurement;
initiatives that promote the business development and capacities of M/WBEs; and
other measures adopted by the County that promote the objectives of the Plan in a
similarly non-restrictive manner.
Procedure and Criteria. The County shall design and adopt non-restrictive remedial methods as
provided for in this Section.
The County shall maintain and expand such methods to the greatest feasible extent that is
productive in achieving the purposes of the Plan.
The Chairman shall evaluate these measures from time to time, and recommend to the County
modifications or elimination of those which prove to be ineffective in relation to the criteria set
forth herein.
D.
Inclusionary Methods. In all of its procurement activities, the County will take all available
steps to maximize M/WBE inclusion. Responsibility for these steps rests with the County.
Examples include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Advertising invitations to bid, particularly in local Minority and Women media, including
statements indicating the intent of the County to encourage MBE and WBE participation.
Advertising generally in local Minority and Women media and local Minority
communities regarding the existence and purposes of this Plan.
Requesting the assistance of other public agencies in referring MBEs/WBEs.
Contacting private sector organizations, including non-profit groups engaged in economic
development activities and MBE and WBE trade and commercial associations, and
soliciting assistance in obtaining local MBE and WBE participation.
Seeking recommendations of additional vendors from private industry MBE/WBE
programs.
MINORITY & WOMEN BUSINESS
PARTICIPATION &
COOPERATION PLAN
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
008200-6
6.
Targeted recruitment within particular business sectors to increase the number and
qualifications of local MBE/WBE firms on County vendor lists where availability is not
accurately represented.
SECTION 6. OVERSIGHT
The Board of Commissioners will designate the County Administrator as responsible for supervising,
implementing, and managing this Plan. The Board of Commissioners, working in cooperation with the
County Administrator, shall be responsible for: (1) determining compliance with the provisions of this
Plan when an appeal has been made, (2) hearing complaints regarding violations of the Plan, (3) hearing
appeals, (4) providing oversight, (5) reviewing the Plan periodically, and (6) other duties as necessary and
deemed appropriate.
To continuously monitor the effectiveness of the Minority and Women Business Plan, the County
Administrator shall prepare an annual report which shall include but not be limited to: number of
MBEs/WBEs, percentage of MBEs/WBEs contracting with the County either as a prime contractor or as a
subcontractor, percentage of overall reported contracts awarded to MBEs/WBEs, percentage of
contractors complying with good faith efforts, percentage of goals achieved and goals waived. The
Annual Report shall be presented to the County by the County Administrator, along with any
recommendations to increase the effectiveness of the Minority and Women Business Plan.
To show its commitment to the Minority and Women Business Plan and the declaration of policy set forth
herein, the County may, where consistent with Federal, State and local laws, require the County
Administrator to:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Provide to the general public annual summaries of contracting and procurement
opportunities with the County from information received from the County following
budget approval.
Make an easily accessible location available where specifications, bid documents, RFPs
and material relating to current and upcoming projects may be reviewed.
Provide project information on Internet websites.
Encourage and assist minority and women businesses in becoming certified through DGS
by sponsoring workshops and/or conferences which inform and assist minority and
women businesses with the DGS certification process.
SECTION 7. PROCEDURES TO ENSURE EQUAL OPPORTUNITY FOR MINORITY AND
WOMEN BUSINESSES TO COMPETE FOR PROJECTS
A.
Construction Projects:
The County shall provide equal opportunity for MBEs/WBEs to compete for construction projects
specified in the County Code, 16 P.S. §1802(a). Those acts shall include those matters hereinafter set out.
1.
The County Administrator shall compile a list of certified MBEs/WBEs located in
Lancaster County, using information obtained from the Pennsylvania Department of
General Services (DGS) or from other institutions or agencies providing such
information.
The list shall describe the capabilities of certified MBEs/WBEs in Lancaster County,
depending upon the scope of the project involved. The list shall include at least the
following information: name of the business, address, telephone number, services or
MINORITY & WOMEN BUSINESS
PARTICIPATION &
COOPERATION PLAN
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
008200-7
products provided, capabilities of the firm, line of work performed by the firm and type
of work the firm is interested in performing.
The list shall be updated by the County Administrator and shall be open for inspection
and available to the County, general contractors and purchasers.
2.
For each project put out for bids, notice of the contract shall be transmitted to the
appropriate MBEs/WBEs on the above list.
3.
For each project put out for bids, published notice of the project shall include a
notice of the provisions of this Plan, which relate to construction contracts.
A period of not less than (10) days must be given between the first advertisement
published and the date fixed for opening of bids to provide MBEs/WBEs adequate
time to obtain bonding and any needed technical assistance. Exceptions may be
made in cases of special emergency.
4.
5.
For any contract put out for bids, the contractor shall:
a.
b.
c.
Notify those certified MBEs/WBEs appearing on the list maintained pursuant to
paragraph 1 of the portion of the project which will be subcontracted and solicit
bids from those MBEs/WBEs.
Submit a listing of the MBE/WBE participation that will be utilized on the
appropriate form (MB/WB Form 1) or facsimile thereof with the bid in order for
the bid to be considered responsive. Bidders must indicate the total dollar value
of MBE/WBE participation for the contract. In the event the bidder has no
MBE/WBE participation, he/she is still required to indicate this on the forms by
entering the word or number zero. Blank forms will not be deemed to represent
zero participation. BIDS SUBMITTED WITHOUT THE MB/WB FORM 1
WILL NOT BE CONSIDERED. Bidders must either submit verification of the
good faith effort made (in addition to the MB/WB Form 1) to increase minority
and women business participation with their bid or they may wait until the lowest
bidder has been established and only that bidder would be responsible for
providing the remaining documentation on the Checklist for Review of Good
Faith Efforts; MB/WB Form 1A (Certificate of MB/WB Unavailability); or
MB/WB Form 2 (Letter of Intent to Perform as a Subcontractor or Provide
Materials or Services) within 72 hours after the bid opening.
Submit bid records to the County Administrator with respect to:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
A listing of those elements of the project for which subcontracts will be
used; potential subcontractors notified of the project; and the number of
those potential subcontractors that are certified MBEs/WBEs appearing
on the list maintained pursuant to paragraph 1 above.
Those subcontractors that bid or otherwise respond to notice of the
project and the number of those that appear on the list of certified
MBEs/WBEs maintained pursuant to paragraph 1 above.
Those subcontractors awarded contracts as part of the project and the
number and identity of those that appear on the list of certified
MBEs/WBEs maintained pursuant to paragraph 1 above.
The percentage of work on the project that is to be performed by certified
MBEs/WBEs appearing on the list maintained pursuant to paragraph 1
above.
MINORITY & WOMEN BUSINESS
PARTICIPATION &
COOPERATION PLAN
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
008200-8
d.
6.
7.
B.
These policies shall be a part of the request for proposals for any such project,
and non-compliance shall be grounds for declaring the bid non-responsive at the
discretion of the County.
The successful bidder shall submit to the County Administrator:
a.
Detailed subcontractor information.
b.
c.
Requests for approval of changes in subcontractor during projects.
Complete subcontractor records at project end to the contracting/purchasing
department.
The County will meet its payment obligations in accordance with established County
policy and State law.
Procurement Contracts:
The County shall provide equal opportunity for local MBEs/WBEs to compete for contracts for the
purchase of apparatus, supplies, materials or equipment specified in the County Code, 16 P.S. §1802(a).
Those actions shall include those matters hereinafter set out.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
For those procurement contracts requiring the formal bid process, the County shall
include in contract specifications specific instructions and procedures to define
MBEs/WBEs compliance requirements.
The County Administrator shall provide a list of local certified MBEs/WBEs identical to
the list described in Section 7, A.1 of this Plan.
For procurement contracts requiring formal bids in accordance with State law, notice of
the contract shall be transmitted by the County Administrator to appropriate certified
MBEs/WBEs on the above list.
For procurement contracts requiring formal bids in accordance with State law, documents
related to the contract shall be available at the County Administrator's office.
For procurement contracts requiring formal bids in accordance with State law, the
information in bid documents shall state the policy expressed in this Plan as well as bid
procedures and regulations.
For procurement contracts requiring formal bids in accordance with State law, published
notice of the contract shall include a summary of the provisions of this Plan, which
relates to contracts.
When a bidder is unable to perform successfully on a procurement contract, certified
MBEs/WBEs shall be provided an equal opportunity to replace the non-performing
bidder.
A period of not less than ten (10) days will be given between the first advertisement and
the date fixed for the opening of bids to provide MBEs/WBEs adequate time to obtain
bonding and any needed technical assistance. Exceptions may be made in cases of
special emergency as declared by the County.
The County will meet its payment obligations in accordance with established County
policy and State law.
MINORITY & WOMEN BUSINESS
PARTICIPATION &
COOPERATION PLAN
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
008200-9
C.
Service Projects:
The County shall forward to the County Administrator a description of all projects, as they are developed,
which would require services other than those of professionals, i.e. those services planned for
privatization or outsourcing. The County Administrator shall supply the County with current listings
profiling those local certified MBEs/WBEs, which specialize in areas of service, needed by the County.
The County shall include with bids the procedures to define MBEs/WBEs compliance requirements. All
bidders shall prepare information as defined in Section 7, A and B defining "good faith efforts" for
MBEs/WBEs participation.
D.
Responsibilities of MBEs and WBEs:
MBEs/WBEs are responsible for self-promotion as it pertains to consideration in the contracting process.
In addition to self-promotion, the following steps are strongly recommended for MBEs/WBEs
considering contractual relations with the County.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Submit information to the contract recipients to identify firm status as that of a certified
MBE/WBE.
Firms should become certified as MBEs/WBEs pursuant to the procedures established by
the Pennsylvania Department of General Services.
Contact federal, state and local minority and women business liaison offices and
directions to obtain information on potential jobs.
Provide capability statements to state agencies, the County Administrator, consulting
engineers and subcontractors stating types of work performed by the firm, size of job that
the firm could handle, bonding information and any special skills.
Make every effort to establish contacts and relationships with contractors for potential
future business, including attending pre-bid conferences and subscribing to industry and
trade journals.
Respond promptly to solicitation requests.
Notify the County Administrator immediately of change in ownership of MBE/WBE.
Document all contacts and communication made above so as to be able to assist the
County Administrator in determining compliance with the Plan.
SECTION 8. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR OVERALL VOLUNTARY CONSTRUCTION,
PROCUREMENT, AND SERVICE PROJECTS VERIFIABLE GOALS
A.
Participation Level:
1.
2.
3.
4.
The County has established MBE/WBE minimum participation levels (MPLs) of five to
ten percent (5 - 10%) for MBEs/WBEs of the dollar amount of the bid for contracts for
construction projects, procurement projects, and service projects.
The MPLs serve exclusively as a threshold in determining bidder responsibility. A
bidder will not be rejected as not responsible solely because it fails to reach the MPLs.
To determine the participation level, which has been reached, a bidder may divide the
total dollar amount of the commitments by the total dollar amount of the bidder's bid.
The County may waive goals prior to advertisement when the County Administrator
determines that there exists no availability.
An MBE/WBE firm who is the prime bidder on a project must comply with the
MBE/WBE participation guidelines outlined in this Plan, i.e. engage in the good faith
effort requirements, etc.
MINORITY & WOMEN BUSINESS
PARTICIPATION &
COOPERATION PLAN
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
008200-10
5.
6.
B.
Responsiveness:
1.
2.
3.
C.
MBE/WBE subcontractors must perform at least seventy-five percent (75%) of the cost
of the subcontract, not including cost of materials, with its own employees.
The County Administrator is available for technical assistance to all bidders/contractors
submitting bids to the County.
Bidders must complete and submit MB/WB Form 1 with the bid. Failure to submit this
form with the bid will result in the bid being rejected as nonresponsive.
A bidder should only solicit MBE/WBE subcontractors, vendors, manufacturers, or
suppliers whose services, material, or supplies are within the scope of work and which
the bidder reasonably believes it will chose to subcontract with or purchase from.
Bidders failing to meet the minimum levels of participation must submit concurrently
with the bid, the Checklist for Review of Good Faith Efforts as an explanation of why the
MPLs have not been met. This explanation must demonstrate that the bidder has not
engaged in discriminatory practices in solicitation and utilization of certified
MBEs/WBEs to perform as subcontractors or suppliers of goods and services related to
the performance of the contract.
Responsibility:
1.
2.
The submittals of each bidder are subject to review to determine whether the bidder has
discriminated in the selection of manufacturers, subcontractors, and suppliers. If a bidder
has met the prescribed MPLs for MBE/WBE participation, the bidder will be presumed
not to have discriminated in their selections. Where the MPLs are not met, the County
Administrator will determine whether discrimination has occurred. If, after investigation
including a review of the Checklist for Review of Good Faith Efforts and MB/WB Form
1A, it is found that discrimination has occurred, the reviewed bidder shall thereby be
deemed to be not responsible and the bid will be rejected.
Documentation submitted by the bidder should meet the following standards for review:
a.
b.
c.
3.
D.
The bidder whose actions resulted in a limited or no commitment to
MBEs/WBEs was not motivated by consideration of race or gender;
MBEs and WBEs were not treated less favorably than other businesses in the
contract solicitation and commitment process; and
Solicitation and commitment decisions were not based upon policies, which
disparately affect MBEs and WBEs.
Commitments to MBE and WBE firms made at the time of bidding must be maintained
throughout the term of the contract, unless a change in commitment to these firms is
preapproved by the County.
Access to Information.
The County may obtain documents and information from any bidder, contractor, subcontractor, supplier,
or manufacturer that may be required in order to ascertain bidder or contractor responsibility. Failure to
provide requested information may result in the contractor being declared not responsible.
MINORITY & WOMEN BUSINESS
PARTICIPATION &
COOPERATION PLAN
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
008200-11
SECTION 9. ENFORCEMENT
A.
Good Faith Efforts
1.
Determinations of Good Faith Efforts shall be made by the County Administrator and
include but are not limited to the following guidelines:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
2.
Whether the prime bidder attended any mandatory pre-solicitation or pre-bid
conferences that were scheduled by the County;
Whether the prime bidder provided written notice to a reasonable number of
specific MBEs/WBEs that their interest in the contract was being solicited in
sufficient time to allow the MBEs/WBEs to participate effectively;
Whether the prime bidder followed up initial solicitations of interest by
contacting MBEs/WBEs to determine whether the MBEs/WBEs were interested;
Whether the prime bidder selected portions of the work to be performed by
MBEs/WBEs in order to increase the likelihood of meeting MBE/WBE goals
(including, where appropriate, breaking down contracts into economically
feasible units to facilitate MBE/WBE participation);
Whether the prime bidder provided interested MBEs/WBEs with adequate
information about the plans, specifications and requirements of the contract;
Whether the prime bidder negotiated in good faith with interested MBEs/WBEs,
not rejecting MBEs/WBEs as unqualified without sound reasons based on a
thorough investigation of their capabilities;
Whether the prime bidder made efforts to assist interested MBEs/WBEs in
obtaining bonding, lines of credit or insurance required by the County;
Whether the prime bidder effectively used the services of Lancaster County's and
City's minority and women community organizations, minority and women
contractor's groups, local, state and federal minority and women business
assistance offices and other organizations that provide assistance in the
recruitment and placement of MBEs/WBEs;
Whether the prime bidder has retained the names of the MBEs/WBEs whom the
bidder contacted or who have contacted the bidder, including the names, address,
and telephone number of all such contacts; a description of efforts made to
subcontract, a description of the outcome and a statement giving the reasons why
the bidder and the MBE/WBE did not succeed in reaching a subcontracting or
joint venture agreement;
Whether the prime bidder attempted to recruit MBEs/WBEs from at least the
same geographic area from which the bidder attempted to recruit other
subcontractors and other members of a joint venture;
Whether the prime bidder, consistent with industry practice, gave MBEs/WBEs
necessary access to and adequate time to review all necessary project plans,
drawings, specifications and other documents, as well as adequate time to
prepare subcontract bids and/or negotiate joint venture arrangements; and/or
Whether the prime bidder in rejecting a MBE/WBE as not qualified identified the
factors which constitute the MBE/WBE not being qualified other than the
amount of the MBEs'/WBEs' bid.
Documentation of good faith efforts shall be submitted with and become a part of the bid
to be considered responsive. Bids containing no documentation shall be deemed nonresponsive.
MINORITY & WOMEN BUSINESS
PARTICIPATION &
COOPERATION PLAN
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
008200-12
B.
Sanctions:
When the County Administrator determines that a successful bidder has failed to make or
maintain good faith efforts as required by this Plan, the County Administrator may recommend to
the Board of Commissioners any or all of the sanctions as follows:
•
•
•
•
Deem it as an element of "poor performance" and consider it in the award of
future contracts to the bidder.
Refuse to award the contract to the bidder.
Remove the bidder from the bid list for a period of one (1) year.
Suspend the bidder from participating in future contracts, i.e. debarment for a
period of one (1) year.
If deemed appropriate by the County Administrator, referral shall be made to the Office of the
Attorney General for investigation.
The Board of Commissioners shall act on the County Administrator's recommendations if the
bidder fails to timely file Exceptions.
C.
Exceptions to Recommendations for Sanctions
1.
2.
3.
D.
E.
If the County Administrator recommends that sanctions be imposed, the bidder may file
Exceptions to the recommended sanctions within seven (7) calendar days of the date of
the recommendations. Exceptions must be filed in writing with the County. The
Exceptions must specify the factual basis and include appropriate supporting evidence.
The County shall hear the Exceptions within thirty (30) calendar days of receipt. The
County shall issue a written decision within fifteen (15) calendar days of the date of
hearing, which decision shall be final and binding.
The County may, in its discretion, delay the award of contracts while Exceptions are
pending.
PA Department of General Services Database of Women-Owned and Minority-Owned
Businesses
DGS website:
www.dgs.state.pa.us/bcabd
(scroll to the right on
the screen, and click on “MBE/WBE Database”)
Contact:
Usha Hannigan
Division Chief
Bureau of Minority and Women Business Opportunities
717-787-6708
[email protected]
List of Certified Women-Owned and Minority-Owned Business:
1. Available from Owner. Contact Barry Garman at 717-299-8323.
** END OF SECTION **
MINORITY & WOMEN BUSINESS
PARTICIPATION &
COOPERATION PLAN
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
008200-13
CHECKLIST
FOR REVIEW OF GOOD FAITH EFFORTS
(MB/WB Form 1 due on day of bid and MB/WB Form 1A and MB/WB Form 2 must accompany this form at bid opening
or within 72 hours of bid opening)
Have
you
( ) Yes
attended
any
of
the
( ) No
(Where and date)
mandatory
pre-bid
conferences
scheduled?
Have you utilized the services of the County Administrator, available minority and women community organizations,
minority and women contractors' group, local, state and federal minority and women business assistance offices and other
organizations that provide assistance in the recruitment and placement of minorities and women? ( ) Yes
( ) No
(Show how)
Have you provided interested local MBEs and WBEs with adequate and equal access to information about the plans,
specifications
and
requirements
of
the
contract
and
insurance
or
licenses?
( ) Yes
( ) No
Did you provide written notice to all appropriate local certified MBEs and WBEs within the identified
subcontracting/supplier/service categories that their interest in the contract was being solicited and in sufficient time to
allow the MBEs and WBEs to participate? Additionally, did the solicitation contain a description and location of the
project, the work for which the subcontractors' bids are being solicited, date, time and location where the subcontractors'
bids
are
to
be
submitted,
locations
where
bidding
documents
could
be
reviewed?
( ) Yes
( ) No
Have you selected portions of the work to be performed by MBEs and WBEs in order to increase the likelihood of
meeting MBE and WBE goals including breaking it into economically feasible units where appropriate?
( ) Yes
( ) No
Have you designated someone in your firm to be the single contact for MBEs and WBEs that may have questions, etc.?
( ) Yes
( ) No
(Please indicate name of person and title)
Have you worked with the County Administrator in developing and administrating areas of technical assistance for MBEs
and WBEs, i.e. bonding, lines of credit or insurance?
( ) Yes
( ) No
Did you follow up initial solicitations of interest by contacting MBEs and WBEs to determine with certainty whether they
are interested in bidding?
( ) Yes
( ) No
Did you negotiate in good faith with interested MBEs and WBEs, not rejecting MBEs and/or WBEs as unqualified
without
sound
reasons
based
on
a
thorough
investigation
of
their
capabilities?
( ) Yes
( ) No
(Show how)
Signature
Title
MB/WB FORM 1
MBE AND WBE UTILIZATION COMMITMENT
(Must be submitted with bid – MB/WB Form 1A and MB/WB Form 2 can be submitted with bid or within 72 hours
of bid opening)
We,
,
do
certify
(Project
that
on
the
Name)
,
(Project Number)
(Dollar Amount of Bid)
we will expend a minimum of _______% of the total dollar amount of the contract with MBEs and/or WBEs.
MBEs and/or WBEs will be employed as construction subcontractors, vendors, or suppliers. Such work will be
subcontracted to the following firms listed below. This form must be completed and submitted with the bid and
documentation of good faith efforts regardless of the amount or lack of participation attained. CERTIFIED MBEs
and WBEs MUST COMPLETE MB/WB FORM 2 TO BE SUBMITTED WITH BID OR WITHIN 72
HOURS OF THE BID OPENING.
Name
and
Number of Firm
Indicate
Phone MBE/WBE
Category
Description
of Work
Dollar
Value
The undersigned will enter into a formal agreement with MBEs and/or WBEs for work listed in this schedule
conditional upon execution of a contract. Failure to fulfill this commitment may constitute a breach of the contract.
The undersigned hereby certifies that s/he has read the terms of this commitment and is authorized to bind the
Bidder to the commitment herein set forth.
Date:
(Name of Bidder)
By:
Title:
Name of
MBE/WBE
Address &
Phone#
Date of
Contact
Contact
Person
Reason for
Unavailability
Date:
Title:
Signature:
Pursuant to the Minority and Women Business Participation Plan, the undersigned certifies that the above MBE(s) and/or WBE(s) were contacted in
good faith and that said MBE(s) and/or WBE(s) were unable to submit a bid for reasons
indicated.
Supplemental information pursuant to MB/WB Forms 1 and 2 are attached.
Work/Service/Goods
Needed
(Name of Prime Contractor)
Project:
(MB/WB Form 1 and MB/WB Form 2 must accompany this form - This compliance form can be submitted at bid opening or within 72 hours following)
MB/WB FORM 1A
CERTIFICATE OF MBE AND/OR WBE UNAVAILABILITY
SUBCONTRACTING / SUPPLIES / SERVICES
Bid#
MB/WB FORM 2
LETTER OF INTENT TO PERFORM AS A SUBCONTRACTOR
OR
PROVIDE MATERIALS OR SERVICES
(General Contractor must submit MB/WB Form 1 @ bid opening / MB/WB Form 2 must be accompanied by MB/WB
Forms 1A and the Good Faith Checklist @ bid opening or within 72 hours)
SUBJECT:
(Project Name)
TO:
(Name of General Contractor)
The undersigned intends to perform work in connection with the above project as a MBE or WBE certified by the
Pennsylvania Department of General Services.
Black
Hispanic
Native American
Asian Pacific
Asian Indian
Women
The undersigned is prepared to perform the following described work or provide materials or services in connection with
the above project (specify in detail particular work items, materials or services to be performed or provided):
at the following price:
.
The following commencement date has been projected for such work, and the undersigned is projecting completion of
such work as follows:
ITEMS
Projected
Commencement
Date
Projected
Completion
Date
Subcontracting at any tier must be reported and is subject to all MBE and WBE compliance requirements. This form must
be used for MBE and/or WBE subcontracting at any level.
Date:
(Signature of MBE/WBE Owner)
Phone#:
(Name of MBE/WBE Contractor/Supplier/Service Firm)
(Address of MBE/WBE)
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 011000
SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Work covered by the Contract Documents.
Type of the Contract.
Work phases.
Work under other contracts.
Owner-furnished products.
Use of premises.
Owner's occupancy requirements.
Work restrictions.
Specification formats and conventions.
Division 01 Section "Multiple Contract Summary" for division of responsibilities for the
Work.
Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures
governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
Project Identification: Renovations for Children & Youth Agency, Project Number 14106
1.
B.
Project Location: Lancaster County Government Center, 150 North Queen Street,
Lancaster, Pennsylvania
Owner:
1.
County of Lancaster
150 North Queen Street
Lancaster, PA 17603
Contact: Barry Garman, Assistant County Engineer
Phone: (717)-299-8323
SUMMARY
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
011000 - 1
C.
D.
Architect: Refers to Architect and/or Engineer throughout the Project Manual.
1.
Thomas Marcinkoski, A.I.A.
Project Architect
Greenfield Architects, Ltd.
1853 William Penn Way
Lancaster, PA 17601
Phone: (717) 390-4614
2.
Tim Warren, P.E.
President
JDB Engineering
3687 Concord Road
York, PA 17402
The Work consists of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.4
Phone: (717) 757-5602
The renovation and build-out of office space for two existing, unoccupied office suites
(one on the first floor of the 3-story annex and the other on the second floor of the highrise) comprising approximately 15,000 square feet total. The renovation will include
increasing the north/south corridor width on the first floor, and reducing the second floor
east/west corridor on the second floor, both of which must remain in operation during
construction. Spaces adjacent to the proposed alterations will be occupied during this
renovation.
The existing fire suppression system will be extended and portions will be modernized in
those suites only.
The existing life safety systems will be extended.
Existing structural steel will be spray fireproofed in the first floor suite only to upgrade
the fire rating from 1-hour to 2-hours. The second floor fireproofing has been completed
under a previous contract.
Existing lighting in the second floor suite will be re-utilized and re-located within the
suite to conform to the new office layout.
Existing mechanical system (VAV boxes) will be re-utilized; new VAV’s where required
shall be installed and connected to the existing air distribution system.
Existing ductwork will be altered in the first floor and second floor suite to the new plan
configuration.
The building automation/energy management system will be retained.
Demountable partitions and systems furniture will be incorporated into the office buildout in conjunction with, but outside of this contract.
TYPE OF CONTRACT
A.
Project will be constructed under multiple contracts. See Division 01 Section "Multiple
Contract Summary" for a description of work included under each separate contract. Contracts
for this Project include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
SUMMARY
General Construction
Mechanical Construction
Electrical Construction
Plumbing and Fire Protection Construction
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
011000 - 2
1.5
WORK PHASES
A.
The Work shall be conducted in a single phase.
B.
Before commencing Work, submit a schedule showing the sequence, commencement and
completion dates, and move-out and -in dates of Owner's personnel for all of the Work.
1.6
OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS
A.
Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes providing support systems to receive
Owner's equipment and making plumbing, mechanical, and electrical connections.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
1.7
Owner will arrange for and deliver Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples to
Contractor.
Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner-furnished items according to
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
After delivery, Owner will inspect delivered items for damage. Contractor shall be
present for and assist in Owner's inspection.
If Owner-furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing, Owner will arrange for
replacement.
Owner will arrange for manufacturer's field services and for delivery of manufacturer's
warranties to Contractor.
Owner will furnish Contractor the earliest possible delivery date for Owner-furnished
products. Using Owner-furnished earliest possible delivery dates, Contractor shall
designate delivery dates of Owner-furnished items in Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Contractor shall review Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples and return them to
Architect noting discrepancies or anticipated problems in use of product.
Contractor is responsible for receiving, unloading, and handling Owner-furnished items
at Project site.
Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner-furnished items from damage during
storage and handling, including damage from exposure to the elements.
If Owner-furnished items are damaged as a result of Contractor's operations, Contractor
shall repair or replace them.
Contractor shall install and otherwise incorporate Owner-furnished items into the Work.
Among those items available to the contractor upon inspection and confirmation with the
Owner are steel door frames and flush wood doors in the Owner’s inventory.
USE OF PREMISES
A.
General: Each Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction operations as
indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits.
B.
Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of
Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1.
2.
SUMMARY
Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of Project site and use by the public.
Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways, loading areas, and entrances serving
premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all
times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
011000 - 3
a.
b.
C.
1.8
Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.
Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of
materials and equipment on-site.
Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout
construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its
occupants during construction period.
OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building during entire
construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize
conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's dayto-day operations. Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy
and to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial
Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such
placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.9
Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used
facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used
facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's
operations.
Provide temporary partitions in existing corridors to maintain the proper required exiting
through renovated spaces to 1) existing east exit on first floor; 2) extending a temporary
corridor from the end of the existing second floor corridor to the east stair of high rise.
Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of
the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy.
Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner
occupancy.
Before Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational,
and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy,
Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied
portions of building.
On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service
for occupied portions of building.
WORK RESTRICTIONS
A.
On-Site Work Hours: Work shall be generally performed inside the existing building during
normal business working hours of 7:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, except
otherwise indicated.
1.
SUMMARY
Weekend Hours: Any work hours required beyond the indicated hours will need to be
coordinated with Owner and Architect.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
011000 - 4
2.
3.
4.
B.
Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
C.
1.10
A.
Notify Architect and Owner not less than five days in advance of proposed utility
interruptions.
Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's and Owner's written
permission.
All exterior construction work needs to be coordinated with Owner and City of Lancaster.
SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the
50-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.
1.
2.
B.
Early Morning Hours: Any work hours required beyond the indicated hours will need to
be coordinated with Owner and Architect.
Hours for Utility Shutdowns: Any work hours required beyond the indicated hours will
need to be coordinated with Owner and Architect.
Hours for Core Drilling and other excessive noisy activity: Any work hours required will
need to be coordinated with Owner and Architect. The Owner reserves the right to
shutdown any construction activity if they determine the level of noise to be unacceptable
for occupants.
Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help crossreferencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric
sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers are
not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to
determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents.
Division 01: Sections in Division 01 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in
the Specifications.
Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
1.
2.
Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract
Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate.
Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words
shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where
applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.
Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.
Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor.
Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for
clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by
others when so noted.
a.
SUMMARY
The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context,
are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
011000 - 5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
**END OF SECTION**
SUMMARY
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
011000 - 6
SECTION 011200
MULTIPLE CONTRACT SUMMARY
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes a summary of each contract, including responsibilities for coordination
and temporary facilities and controls.
B.
Specific requirements of each contract are also indicated in individual Specification Sections
and on Drawings.
C.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Division 01 Section "Summary" for the Work covered by the Contract Documents,
restrictions on use of the premises, phasing, Owner-occupancy requirements, and work
restrictions.
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for general coordination
requirements.
Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for specific requirements for
temporary facilities and controls.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is
complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all
openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.
COORDINATION
A.
Project Coordinator shall be responsible for coordination between the General Construction
Contract, Plumbing Contract, Mechanical Contract, Electrical Contract, and Owner’s
Furnishings Vendor.
1.
B.
General Construction Contractor shall act as Project Coordinator.
Mechanical/Electrical Coordinator, who shall be subordinate to Project Coordinator, shall be
responsible for coordination between the Plumbing Contract, Mechanical Contract, and
Electrical Contract.
MULTIPLE CONTRACT
SUMMARY
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
011200 - 1
1.
1.5
Mechanical Contractor shall act as Mechanical/Electrical Coordinator.
PROJECT COORDINATOR
A.
Project Coordinator: Full-time Project Coordinator shall be experienced in administration and
supervision of building construction, including mechanical and electrical work.
1.
Coordination activities of Project Coordinator include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Provide overall coordination of the Work.
Coordinate shared access to workspaces.
Coordinate product selections for compatibility.
Provide overall coordination of temporary facilities and controls.
Coordinate, schedule, and approve interruptions of permanent and temporary
utilities, including those necessary to make connections for temporary services.
Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by each
contract and the Owner’s separate contracts.
Prepare Coordination Drawings in collaboration with each Contractor to
coordinate work by more than one contract.
Coordinate sequencing and scheduling of the Work. Include the following:
1)
2)
3)
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
Initial Coordination Meeting: At earliest possible date, arrange and conduct
a meeting with separate contractors for sequencing and coordinating the
Work; negotiate reasonable adjustments to schedules.
Prepare a combined Contractor's Construction Schedule for entire Project.
Base schedule on Work Task Outline Schedule. Secure time commitments
for performing critical construction activities from separate contractors.
Show activities of each contract on a separate sheet. Prepare a simplified
summary sheet indicating combined construction activities of contracts.
Distribute copies of schedules to Architect, Owner, and separate contractors
for approval, review and use.
Provide photographic documentation.
Provide quality-assurance and quality-control services specified in Division 01
Section "Quality Requirements."
Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate tests and inspections, and
coordinate schedule of tests and inspections.
Provide information necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility
structures affected by construction.
Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference
points, and establish permanent benchmarks on Project site.
Provide field surveys of in-progress construction and site work.
Provide progress cleaning of common areas and coordinate progress cleaning of
areas or pieces of equipment where more than one contractor has worked.
Coordinate cutting and patching.
Coordinate protection of the Work.
Coordinate firestopping.
Coordinate completion of interrelated punch list items.
MULTIPLE CONTRACT
SUMMARY
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
011200 - 2
t.
u.
v.
w.
2.
Responsibilities of Project Coordinator for temporary facilities and controls include, but
are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
B.
Provide common-use field office for use by all personnel engaged in construction
activities.
Provide telephone service for common-use facilities.
Mechanical/Electrical Coordinator: Full-time Mechanical/Electrical Coordinator shall be
experienced in coordination of mechanical and electrical construction, including coordination of
type of operations required for this Project.
1.
Coordination activities of Mechanical/Electrical Coordinator include, but are not limited
to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
1.6
Coordinate preparation of Project Record Documents if information from more
than one contractor is to be integrated with information from other contractors to
form one combined record.
Print and submit Record Drawings / Documents if installations by more than one
contractor are indicated on the same Contract Drawing or Shop Drawing.
Collect Record Specification Sections from other contractors, collate Sections into
numeric order, and submit complete set.
Coordinate preparation of operation and maintenance manuals if information from
more than one contractor is to be integrated with information from other
contractors to form one combined record.
Schedule and sequence mechanical and electrical activities.
Coordinate sharing access to workspaces by mechanical and electrical contractors.
Coordinate integration of mechanical and electrical work into limited spaces.
Coordinate protection of mechanical and electrical contractors' work.
Coordinate cutting and patching for mechanical and electrical work.
Prepare mechanical and electrical Coordination Drawings.
Coordinate tests and inspections for mechanical and electrical work.
Coordinate mechanical and electrical temporary services and facilities.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACTS
A.
Extent of Contract: Unless the Agreement contains a more specific description of the Work,
names and terminology on Drawings and in Specification Sections determine which contract
includes a specific element of Project.
1.
2.
3.
Unless otherwise indicated, the Work described in this Section for each contract shall be
complete systems and assemblies, including products, components, accessories, and
installation required by the Contract Documents.
Local custom and trade-union jurisdictional settlements do not control the scope of the
Work of each contract. When a potential jurisdictional dispute or similar interruption of
work is first identified or threatened, affected contractors shall negotiate a reasonable
settlement to avoid or minimize interruption and delays.
Blocking, backing panels, sleeves, and metal fabrication supports for the work of each
contract shall be the work of each contract for its own work.
MULTIPLE CONTRACT
SUMMARY
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
011200 - 3
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Substitutions: Each contractor shall cooperate with other contractors involved to coordinate
approved substitutions with remainder of the Work.
1.
C.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.7
Project Coordinator shall coordinate substitutions.
Temporary Facilities and Controls: In addition to specific responsibilities for temporary
facilities and controls indicated in this Section and in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities
and Controls," each contractor is responsible for the following:
1.
D.
Furnishing of access panels for the work of each contract shall be the work of each
contract for its own work. Installation of access panels shall be the work of each contract
for its own work.
Cutting and Patching: Provided by each contract for its own work.
Through-penetration firestopping for the Work of each contract shall be provided by each
contract for its own Work. All contractors shall retain proof of all fireproofing
packaging, tubes, boxes, bags, including copy of fireproofing materials purchase order
for review by city building inspector.
Within five working days after preliminary horizontal bar-chart-type construction
schedule submittal has been received from Project Coordinator, submit a matching
preliminary horizontal bar-chart schedule showing construction operations sequenced and
coordinated with overall construction. Sign-off of construction schedule by all
contractors needs to occur by September 15, 2014.
Project closeout requirements.
Installation, operation, maintenance, and removal of each temporary facility usually
considered as its own normal construction activity, and costs and use charges associated
with each facility, except as provided otherwise for this section.
Plug-in electric power cords and extension cords, supplementary plug-in task lighting,
and special lighting necessary exclusively for its own activities.
Any necessary furniture, utilities, and telephone service for office use in space provided
by Owner.
Temporary enclosures for its own construction activities.
General hoisting facilities for its own construction activities, up to 2 tons (2000 kg).
Waste disposal facilities, including collection and legal disposal of its own hazardous,
dangerous, unsanitary, or other harmful waste materials.
Progress cleaning of its own areas on a daily basis.
Secure lockup of its own tools, materials, and equipment.
Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities necessary exclusively for its
own construction activities.
Temporary Heating and Ventilation:
The Mechanical Contract is responsible for
providing/monitoring temporary heating and ventilation, temporary meters, and temporary
connections. The Owner will be responsible for utility-use charges.
GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
A.
Work in the General Construction Contract includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1.
Selective demolition.
MULTIPLE CONTRACT
SUMMARY
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
011200 - 4
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Temporary facilities and controls in the General Construction Contract include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
1.8
Interior closure of exterior walls (knee or sill walls, window soffits), thermal and
moisture protection.
First floor floor/ceiling deck above and column sprayed fire-resistive materials and board
fire protection (the second floor SFRM is complete and requires patching by each trade
doing its own work.)
Interior construction, including partitions, doors, interior glazed openings, and fittings.
Fire-protection specialties.
Interior finishes, finish carpentry, architectural woodwork and built-in casework.
Miscellaneous items, including painting of mechanical and electrical work.
Furnishings, specifically window treatments, will be provided by the Owner.
Systems furniture and demountable partitions will be Owner-provided outside of this
contract.
Temporary facilities and controls that are not otherwise specifically assigned to the
Plumbing Contract, Mechanical Contract, Electrical Contract.
Temporary enclosure for building exterior, except as indicated.
Project identification and temporary signs.
General waste disposal facilities.
Pest control.
Temporary fire-protection equipment.
Barricades, warning signs, and lights.
Security enclosure and lockup.
Environmental protection.
Restoration of Owner's existing facilities used as temporary facilities.
PLUMBING CONTRACT
A.
Work in the Plumbing Contract is generally indicated on the plumbing and fire protection group
of the Contract Drawings, specified in Divisions 21 and 22 of the Contract Specifications, and
includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Plumbing fixtures.
Domestic water distribution.
Sanitary waste.
Water-based fire-suppression systems.
Plumbing connections to equipment furnished by other contractors.
Alteration and extension of existing wet piped sprinkler system.
Temporary facilities and controls in the Plumbing Contract include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1.
2.
Piped (potable) water service for construction phase services by all contractors.
Plumbing connections to existing systems and temporary facilities and controls furnished
by other contractors.
MULTIPLE CONTRACT
SUMMARY
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
011200 - 5
1.9
MECHANICAL CONTRACT
A.
Work in the Mechanical Contract is generally indicated on the mechanical group of the Contract
Drawings, specified in Division 23 of the Contract Specifications, and includes, but is not
limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Temporary facilities and controls in the Mechanical Contract include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1.
1.10
A.
Energy supply, including hot- and chilled-water supply systems.
HVAC systems and equipment.
HVAC instrumentation and controls.
HVAC testing, adjusting, and balancing.
Building automation system.
Mechanical connections to equipment furnished by other contractors.
Temporary heating and ventilation.
ELECTRICAL CONTRACT
Work in the Electrical Contract is generally indicated on the electrical group of the Contract
Drawings, specified in Divisions 26, 27 and 28 of the Contract Specifications, and includes, but
is not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Electrical distribution.
Interior lighting.
Communication and security.
Special electrical systems, including the following:
a.
5.
B.
Fire alarm system.
Electrical connections to equipment furnished by other contractors.
Temporary facilities and controls in the Electrical Contract include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1.
2.
3.
Electric power service and distribution.
Lighting.
Electrical connections to existing systems and temporary facilities and controls furnished
by other contractors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
**END OF SECTION**
MULTIPLE CONTRACT
SUMMARY
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
011200 - 6
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 012200
UNIT PRICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.3
Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting
and handling Change Orders.
Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for general testing and inspecting
requirements.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Unit price is an amount incorporated in the Agreement, as a price per unit of measurement for
materials, equipment, or services, or a portion of the Work, added to or deducted from the
Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the scope of Work or estimated quantities of Work
required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased.
PROCEDURES
A.
Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance,
applicable taxes, overhead, and profit.
B.
Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires
establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified
in those Sections.
C.
Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use
of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an
independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.
D.
List of Unit Prices: A schedule of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections
referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price.
UNIT PRICES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
012200 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES
A.
Unit Price No. GC-1: Firestopping of existing openings.
1.
2.
B.
Unit Price No. GC-2: Provide, purchase and install of single door maglocks and accessories.
1.
2.
C.
2.
Description: Provide and install individual electrically interlocked magnetic lock and
release devices for double doors, with all brackets, emergency release devices and other
accessories as required, in accordance with Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." Also
see EC-5.
Unit of Measurement: Per pair of doors.
Unit Price No. EC-1: Patching of existing abandoned work boxes/j-boxes with fireproofing on
second floor.
1.
2.
E.
Description: Provide and install individual electrically interlocked magnetic lock and
release devices for single doors, with all brackets, emergency release devices and other
accessories as required, in accordance with Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." Also
see EC-4.
Unit of Measurement: Per door.
Unit Price No. GC-3: Provide, purchase and install of double door maglocks and accessories.
1.
D.
Description: Firestop and seal all existing, concealed penetrations/openings in existing
horizontal or vertical fire barriers, smoke barriers or fire partitions according to the
required hourly assembly rating by using the UL-approved through-penetration firestop
systems, joint systems, electrical circuit protective system or duct assembly.
Unit of Measurement: Annular area and depth of penetration sealed, or other unit of
measurement as proposed by general contractor and agreed to by Owner prior to issuance
of Construction Change Directive or Change Order for various types of penetrations.
Description: Fill all abandoned above ceiling electrical boxes that are attached to the
existing fireproofed structural steel or deck with cementitous fireproofing. Boxes are
typically directly attached to steel and have no fireproofing behind the box. Filling with
fireproofing to the minimum thickness of the surrounding steel is required.
Unit of Measurement: Cost per dozen boxes to be filled with minimum 1/2” trowelled-on
fireproofing.
Unit Price No. EC-2: Individual Data Drops Installation.
1.
2.
UNIT PRICES
Description: Provide and install individual data drops, outlet box terminations and
connector wiring according to Division 27 Section "Voice and Data Communications
Cabling”.
Unit of Measurement: Per Unit.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
012200 - 2
F.
Unit Price No. EC-3: Individual Duplex Receptacle Outlet Box Installation.
1.
2.
G.
Unit Price No. EC-4: Provide Electrical Connections for Security Door Maglocks.
1.
2.
H.
3.
Description: Provide and install individual paging and sound making speaker assemblies
and associated conduit and wiring to equipment control panel according to Division 27
Section "Sound Masking and Paging System”.
Unit of Measurement: Per Unit.
Unit Price No. EC-6: Fire Alarm System Visual Notification Appliance Installation.
2.
3.
J.
Description: Provide electrical connections for the installation of security door maglocks,
request to exit controls, manual secondary emergency release buttons and card readers
that are provided and/or installed by the General Contractor. Provide and install
associated wiring and conduit to building security panels according to Division 28
Section "Integrated Access Control & Security System” and “Door Entry System”.
Unit of Measurement: Per Unit.
Unit Price No. EC-5: Paging and Sound Masking Speaker Installation.
2.
I.
Description: Provide and install individual duplex receptacles, outlet box, coverplate,
terminations, (1) 20A single-pole circuit breaker and 50’ linear feet of wire and conduit
according to Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices”.
Unit of Measurement: Per Unit.
Description: Provide and install individual fire alarm system visual notification
appliances and associated conduit and wiring according to Division 28 Section "Digital
Addressable Fire Alarm System”.
Unit of Measurement: Per Unit.
Unit Price No. EC-7: Fire Alarm System Audible and Visual Notification Appliance
Installation.
2.
3.
Description: Provide and install individual fire alarm system audible and visual
notification appliances and associated conduit and wiring according to Division 28
Section "Digital Addressable Fire Alarm System”.
Unit of Measurement: Per Unit.
**END OF SECTION**
UNIT PRICES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
012200 - 3
SECTION 012500
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable
product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
1.
2.
1.4
Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to
changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or
unavailability of required warranty terms.
Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not
required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to
Contractor or Owner.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product
or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and
title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1.
2.
Substitution Request Form: Use forms included at end of Part 3.
Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable:
a.
b.
SUBSTITUTION
PROCEDURES
Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be
provided, if applicable.
Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other
parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
012500 - 1
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
3.
Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution.
Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within
10 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or
documentation, whichever is later.
a.
b.
1.5
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section.
Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific
features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work
specified.
Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
Samples, where applicable or requested.
Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.
Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided
within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays
in delivery.
Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible
with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.
Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated
results.
Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or
Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.
Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Compatibility of Substitutions:
Investigate and document compatibility of proposed
substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform
compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.
PROCEDURES
A.
Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved
substitutions.
SUBSTITUTION
PROCEDURES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
012500 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for
change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related
submittals.
1.
Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect
will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these
requirements:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
B.
Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified
product provided.
Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution
has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received
within 30 days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered
or rejected at discretion of Architect.
1.
Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect
will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these
requirements:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
SUBSTITUTION
PROCEDURES
Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities
Owner must assume.
Owner's additional responsibilities may include
compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of
other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.
Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents.
Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified
product provided.
Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
012500 - 3
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution
has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
**END OF SECTION**
SUBSTITUTION
PROCEDURES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
012500 - 4
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
Date:
____________________
Contractor:
Architect: Greenfield Architects Ltd.
____________________
Subcontractor:
__________________________
Requested Substitution:
Replacing:
Contractor and Subcontractor request that Owner and Architect authorize the Requested Substitution
described above. Contractor and Subcontractor, jointly and severally, make the following promises
and representations about the Requested Substitution.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
The Requested Substitution complies in all respects with all applicable building laws, codes
and regulations.
Contractor and Subcontractor have carefully evaluated the Authorized Substitution and have
determined that it complies in all respects with all requirements of the plans, specifications
and contract documents for the Project except as specifically noted herein or in any attached
exhibit.
Contractor and Subcontractor clearly understand that any authorizations to make the
Requested Substitution will be based entirely on the promises and representations of
Contractor and Subcontractor and will not permit, authorize or approve any deviation
from the plans, specifications or contract documents except as specifically set forth
herein or in any exhibit.
Contractor and Subcontractor are completely and solely responsible for compliance of the
Requested Substitution with all requirements of the plans, specifications and contract
documents except as specifically set forth herein or in any attached exhibit.
Contractor and Subcontractor expressly warrant that the Requested Substitution is
merchantable and suitable for its intended purpose.
The Requested Substitution varies from the requirements of the plans, specifications and
contract documents only in the following respects:
Errors, Omissions or oversights by Owner or Architect in review of this request shall not be
the basis for any claim or defense by Contractor or Subcontractor.
________________________________
Contractor
_________________________________
Subcontractor
Owner and Architect hereby authorize the Requested Substitution to be made.
Dated: ________ ____________________
(Owner)
Dated: _________ _________________________
(Architect)
SECTION 012600
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing
Contract modifications.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling
requests for substitutions made after Contract award.
MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A.
1.4
Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not
involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710,
"Architect's Supplemental Instructions." (form included at end of Part 3).
PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A.
Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed
changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If
necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.
1.
2.
Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them
instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
Within 10 to 14 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost
adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with
total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data
to substantiate quantities.
Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of
the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and
CONTRACT MODIFICATION
PROCEDURES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
012600 - 1
finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting
an extension of the Contract Time.
B.
Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the
Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
1.5
Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the
Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the
proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,
and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the
Contract Time.
Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" if the
proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system
specified.
Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests (form included at end
of Part 3).
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A.
1.6
On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures
of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701 (form included at end of Part 3).
CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A.
Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on
AIA Document G714 (form included at end of Part 3). Construction Change Directive instructs
Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
1.
B.
Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It
also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the
Contract Time.
Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the
Construction Change Directive.
1.
After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to
substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
CONTRACT MODIFICATION
PROCEDURES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
012600 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
**END OF SECTION**
CONTRACT MODIFICATION
PROCEDURES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
012600 - 3
®
TM
AIA Document G701 – 2001
Change Order
PROJECT (Name and address):
TO CONTRACTOR (Name and address):
OWNER:
CHANGE ORDER NUMBER:
DATE:
ARCHITECT:
CONTRACTOR:
ARCHITECT’S PROJECT NUMBER:
FIELD:
CONTRACT DATE:
CONTRACT FOR:
OTHER:
THE CONTRACT IS CHANGED AS FOLLOWS:
(Include, where applicable, any undisputed amount attributable to previously executed Construction Change Directives)
The original Contract Sum was
The net change by previously authorized Change Orders
The Contract Sum prior to this Change Order was
The Contract Sum will be increased by this Change Order in the amount of
The new Contract Sum including this Change Order will be
$
$
$
$
$
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
The Contract Time will be increased by Zero ( 0 ) days.
The date of Substantial Completion as of the date of this Change Order therefore is
NOTE: This Change Order does not include changes in the Contract Sum, Contract Time or Guaranteed Maximum Price which
have been authorized by Construction Change Directive until the cost and time have been agreed upon by both the Owner and
Contractor, in which case a Change Order is executed to supersede the Construction Change Directive.
NOT VALID UNTIL SIGNED BY THE ARCHITECT, CONTRACTOR AND OWNER.
ARCHITECT (Firm name)
CONTRACTOR (Firm name)
OWNER (Firm name)
ADDRESS
ADDRESS
ADDRESS
BY (Signature)
BY (Signature)
BY (Signature)
(Typed name)
(Typed name)
(Typed name)
DATE
DATE
DATE
AIA Document G701™ – 2001. Copyright © 1979, 1987, 2000 and 2001 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:
This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA ®
Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible
under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:23:35 on 11/02/2006 under Order No.1000249369_3 which expires on 7/19/2007,
and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(3259680816)
1
®
TM
AIA Document G709 – 2001
Work Changes Proposal Request
PROJECT (Name and address):
PROPOSAL REQUEST NUMBER:
DATE OF ISSUANCE:
OWNER (Name and address):
CONTRACT FOR:
CONTRACT DATE:
FROM ARCHITECT (Name and
address):
ARCHITECT’S PROJECT NUMBER:
OWNER:
ARCHITECT:
CONSULTANT:
CONTRACTOR:
FIELD:
OTHER:
TO CONTRACTOR (Name and
address):
Please submit an itemized proposal for changes in the Contract Sum and Contract Time for proposed modifications
to the Contract Documents described herein. Within Zero ( 0 ) days, the Contractor must submit this proposal or
notify the Architect, in writing, of the date on which proposal submission is anticipated.
THIS IS NOT A CHANGE ORDER, A CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE OR A DIRECTION TO PROCEED WITH THE
WORK DESCRIBED IN THE PROPOSED MODIFICATIONS.
DESCRIPTION (Insert a written description of the Work):
ATTACHMENTS (List attached documents that support description):
REQUESTED BY THE ARCHITECT:
(Signature)
(Printed name and title)
AIA Document G709™ – 2001. Copyright © 1993 and 2001 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA®
Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,
or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the
law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:54:03 on 07/06/2006 under Order No.1000187799_3 which expires on 8/3/2006, and is not
for resale.
User Notes:
(3819309148)
1
®
TM
AIA Document G710 – 1992
Architect's Supplemental
PROJECT (Name and address):
Instructions
ARCHITECT'S SUPPLEMENTAL
INSTRUCTION NO:
OWNER:
ARCHITECT:
CONSULTANT:
OWNER (Name and address):
DATE OF ISSUANCE:
CONTRACTOR:
CONTRACT FOR:
FIELD:
FROM ARCHITECT (Name and
address):
CONTRACT DATE:
OTHER:
TO CONTRACTOR (Name and
address):
ARCHITECT’S PROJECT NUMBER:
The Work shall be carried out in accordance with the following supplemental instructions issued in accordance with
the Contract Documents without change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. Proceeding with the Work in
accordance with these instructions indicates your acknowledgment that there will be no change in the Contract Sum
or Contract Time.
DESCRIPTION:
ATTACHMENTS:
(Here insert listing of documents that support description.)
ISSUED BY THE ARCHITECT:
(Signature)
(Printed name and title)
AIA Document G710™ – 1992. Copyright © 1980 and 1992 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA®
Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,
or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the
law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:22:45 on 05/08/2006 under Order No.1000187799_3 which expires on 8/3/2006, and is not
for resale.
User Notes:
(3759366036)
1
®
TM
AIA Document G714 – 2007
Construction Change Directive
PROJECT: (Name and address)
OWNER:
DIRECTIVE NUMBER:
DATE:
CONTRACT FOR:
TO CONTRACTOR: (Name and address)
ARCHITECT:
CONSULTANT:
CONTRACT DATED:
ARCHITECT’S PROJECT NUMBER:
CONTRACTOR:
FIELD:
OTHER:
You are hereby directed to make the following change(s) in this Contract:
(Describe briefly any proposed changes or list any attached information in the alternative)
PROPOSED ADJUSTMENTS
1.
The proposed basis of adjustment to the Contract Sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price is:
• Lump Sum increase of $0.00
• Unit
• As
Price of $
per
provided in Section 7.3.3 of AIA Document A201-2007
• As follows:
2.
The Contract Time is proposed to (remain unchanged). The proposed adjustment, if any, is 0 days.
When signed by the Owner and Architect and received by the Contractor, this document
becomes effective IMMEDIATELY as a Construction Change Directive (CCD), and the
Contractor shall proceed with the change(s) described above.
Contractor signature indicates agreement
with the proposed adjustments in Contract
Sum and Contract Time set forth in this
CCD.
ARCHITECT (Firm name)
OWNER (Firm name)
CONTRACTOR (Firm name)
ADDRESS
ADDRESS
ADDRESS
BY (Signature)
BY (Signature)
BY (Signature)
(Typed name)
(Typed name)
(Typed name)
DATE
DATE
DATE
AIA Document G714™ – 2007. Copyright © 2001 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA®
Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,
or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the
law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:11:34 on 09/03/2009 under Order No.5427632253_1 which expires on 07/07/2010, and is not
for resale.
User Notes:
(1280201807)
1
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 012900
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process
Applications for Payment.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements governing the use of unit
prices.
Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for
handling changes to the Contract.
Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements
governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract
Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's
Applications for Payment.
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values for each portion of the project
required to be priced separately with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. Costloaded Critical Path Method Schedule may serve to satisfy requirements for the schedule of
values.
1.
Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms
and schedules, including the following:
a.
b.
c.
PAYMENT
PROCEDURES
Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets, for the two plan areas:
plaza and a portion of the sidewalk renovation.
Submittal schedule.
Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction
schedule.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
012900 - 1
2.
3.
4.
B.
Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than
seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
Sub-schedules for Phased Work: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring
separately phased payments, provide sub-schedules showing values coordinated with
each phase of payment.
Sub-schedules for Separate Elements of Work: Where the Contractor's construction
schedule defines separate elements of the Work, provide sub-schedules showing values
coordinated with each element.
Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for
the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1.
Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Project name and location.
Name of Architect.
Architect's project number.
Contractor's name and address.
Date of submittal.
Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the
following for each item listed:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Related Specification Section or Division.
Description of the Work.
Name of subcontractor.
Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
Name of supplier.
Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest onehundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.
1)
2)
3)
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
PAYMENT
PROCEDURES
Labor.
Materials.
Equipment.
Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of each of the two Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate
with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal
subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.
Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated
and stored, but not yet installed.
Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.
Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
012900 - 2
a.
8.
1.5
Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual
work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values
or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result
in a change in the Contract Sum.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A.
Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent
with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.
1.
B.
Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial
Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
Payment Application Times: Submit each Application for Payment to Architect by the 1st of
the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the
last day of the month.
1.
Submit draft copy of each Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for
review by Architect.
C.
Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 “Application and Certificate for
Payment” and AIA Document G703 Application and Certificate for Payment Continuation
Sheet“ (forms included at end of Part 3).
D.
Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person
authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete
applications without action.
1.
2.
3.
E.
Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule.
Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment,
whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at
time of Application for Payment.
Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last
day of construction period covered by application.
Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or
equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items
stored on-site and items stored off-site.
1.
2.
3.
PAYMENT
PROCEDURES
Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of
surety to payment, for stored materials.
Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices.
Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include
overhead and profit on stored materials.
Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
012900 - 3
a.
b.
c.
F.
Transmittal: Submit four signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment
to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of
lien and similar attachments if required.
1.
G.
2.
3.
4.
Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after
deduction for retainage, on each item.
When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full
waivers.
Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit
waivers.
Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner.
Initial Applications for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of first Applications for Payment include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
I.
Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
information about application.
Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's
lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and
related to the Work covered by the payment.
1.
H.
Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous
Applications for Payment.
Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application
for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment.
Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and
remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.
List of subcontractors, addresses, e-mails, contacts, and fax numbers.
Schedule of values.
Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final; final approval schedule must
be signed off prior to Payment #2).
Combined Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final) incorporating
Work of multiple contracts, with indication of acceptance of schedule by each Contractor.
Products list (preliminary if not final).
Schedule of unit prices.
Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final).
List of Contractor's staff assignments.
List of Contractor's principal consultants.
Building permits are by the Owner.
Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for
performance of the Work.
Initial progress report.
Report of preconstruction conference.
Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
Performance and payment bonds.
Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificates of
Substantial Completion, submit Applications for Payment showing 100 percent completion for
portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.
PAYMENT
PROCEDURES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
012900 - 4
1.
2.
J.
Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously
for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
Final Payment Applications: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final
Applications for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted
and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof
that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
Evidence that claims have been settled.
Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of
date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed
responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
Final liquidated damages settlement statement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
**END OF SECTION**
PAYMENT
PROCEDURES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
012900 - 5
VIA
ARCHITECT:
FROM
CONTRACTOR:
$
$
$
$
ADDITIONS
$
$
$
DEDUCTIONS
$
/
/
OTHER:
FIELD:
CONTRACTOR:
ARCHITECT:
OWNER:
Distribution to:
Date:
Date:
1
This Certificate is not negotiable. The AMOUNT CERTIFIED is payable only to the Contractor
named herein. Issuance, payment and acceptance of payment are without prejudice to any rights of
the Owner or Contractor under this Contract
ARCHITECT:
By:
AMOUNT CERTIFIED ......................................................................... $
(Attach explanation if amount certified differs from the amount applied. Initial all figures on this
Application and on the Continuation Sheet that are changed to conform with the amount certified.)
In accordance with the Contract Documents, based on on-site observations and the data comprising
this application, the Architect certifies to the Owner that to the best of the Architect's knowledge,
information and belief the Work has progressed as indicated, the quality of the Work is in
accordance with the Contract Documents, and the Contractor is entitled to payment of the
AMOUNT CERTIFIED.
ARCHITECT'S CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT
Notary Public:
My Commission expires:
County of:
Subscribed and sworn to before
me this
day of
CONTRACTOR:
By:
State of:
The undersigned Contractor certifies that to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information
and belief the Work covered by this Application for Payment has been completed in accordance
with the Contract Documents, that all amounts have been paid by the Contractor for Work for
which previous Certificates for Payment were issued and payments received from the Owner, and
that current payment shown herein is now due.
APPLICATION NO:
PERIOD TO:
CONTRACT FOR:
CONTRACT DATE:
PROJECT NOS:
AIA Document G702™ – 1992. Copyright © 1953, 1963, 1965, 1978 and 1992 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S.
Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will
be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:48:23 on 07/06/2006 under Order No.1000187799_3 which expires on 8/3/2006, and is
not for resale.
User Notes:
(402259051)
CHANGE ORDER SUMMARY
Total changes approved in previous months by Owner
Total approved this Month
TOTALS
NET CHANGES by Change Order
$
8. CURRENT PAYMENT DUE .....................................................................
9. BALANCE TO FINISH, INCLUDING RETAINAGE
6. TOTAL EARNED LESS RETAINAGE ......................................................... $
(Line 4 Less Line 5 Total)
7. LESS PREVIOUS CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT ..................................... $
(Line 6 from prior Certificate)
Total Retainage (Lines 5a + 5b or Total in Column I of G703) ............... $
Application is made for payment, as shown below, in connection with the Contract.
Continuation Sheet, AIA Document G703, is attached.
1. ORIGINAL CONTRACT SUM ..................................................................... $
2. Net change by Change Orders ........................................................... $
3. CONTRACT SUM TO DATE (Line 1 ± 2) ................................................... $
4. TOTAL COMPLETED & STORED TO DATE (Column G on G703) .............. $
5. RETAINAGE:
a.
% of Completed Work
(Column D + E on G703)
$
b.
% of Stored Material
$
(Column F on G703)
CONTRACTOR'S APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
PROJECT:
TO OWNER:
Application and Certificate for Payment
(Line 3 less Line 6)
TM
AIA Document G702 – 1992
®
B
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A
ITEM
NO.
PERIOD TO:
APPLICATION DATE:
APPLICATION NO:
AIA Document G703™ – 1992. Copyright © 1963, 1965, 1966, 1967,1970, 1978, 1983 and 1992 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is
protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:50:01 on 07/06/2006 under Order No.1000187799_3 which expires on
8/3/2006, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(3557316621)
C
ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NO:
D
E
F
G
H
I
WORK COMPLETED
TOTAL
MATERIALS
BALANCE TO RETAINAGE
COMPLETED
FROM
SCHEDULED
%
PRESENTLY
FINISH
(IF VARIABLE
AND
STORED
PREVIOUS THIS PERIOD STORED (NOT
VALUE
(G ÷ C)
(C - G)
RATE)
TO DATE
APPLICATION
IN D OR E)
(D+E+F)
(D + E)
AIA Document G702, APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATION FOR PAYMENT,
containing Contractor's signed certification is attached.
In tabulations below, amounts are stated to the nearest dollar.
Use Column I on Contracts where variable retainage for line items may apply.
Continuation Sheet
GRAND TOTAL
TM
AIA Document G703 – 1992
®
1
®
TM
AIA Document G706 – 1994
Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims
PROJECT: (Name and address)
ARCHITECT’S PROJECT NUMBER:
TO OWNER: (Name and address)
CONTRACT FOR:
CONTRACT DATED:
OWNER:
ARCHITECT:
CONTRACTOR:
SURETY:
OTHER:
STATE OF:
COUNTY OF:
The undersigned hereby certifies that, except as listed below, payment has been made in full and all obligations have
otherwise been satisfied for all materials and equipment furnished, for all work, labor, and services performed, and
for all known indebtedness and claims against the Contractor for damages arising in any manner in connection with
the performance of the Contract referenced above for which the Owner or Owner's property might in any way be
held responsible or encumbered.
EXCEPTIONS:
SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS ATTACHED HERETO:
1.
Consent of Surety to Final Payment. Whenever
Surety is involved, Consent of Surety is
required. AIA Document G707, Consent of
Surety, may be used for this purpose
Indicate Attachment
Yes
No
CONTRACTOR: (Name and address)
BY:
The following supporting documents should be attached
hereto if required by the Owner:
(Signature of authorized representative)
1.
Contractor's Release or Waiver of Liens,
conditional upon receipt of final payment.
(Printed name and title)
2.
Separate Releases or Waivers of Liens from
Subcontractors and material and equipment
suppliers, to the extent required by the Owner,
accompanied by a list thereof.
3.
Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens (AIA
Document G706A).
Subscribed and sworn to before me on this date:
Notary Public:
My Commission Expires:
AIA Document G706™ – 1994. Copyright © 1970 and 1994 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA®
Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,
or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the
law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:26:37 on 05/08/2006 under Order No.1000187799_3 which expires on 8/3/2006, and is not
for resale.
User Notes:
(1766980638)
1
®
TM
AIA Document G706A – 1994
Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens
PROJECT: (Name and address)
AIA Standard
TO OWNER: (Name and address)
OWNER:
ARCHITECT’S PROJECT NUMBER:
ARCHITECT:
CONTRACT FOR:
CONTRACT DATED:
CONTRACTOR:
SURETY:
OTHER:
STATE OF:
COUNTY OF:
The undersigned hereby certifies that to the best of the undersigned's knowledge, information and belief, except as
listed below, the Releases or Waivers of Lien attached hereto include the Contractor, all Subcontractors, all suppliers
of materials and equipment, and all performers of Work, labor or services who have or may have liens or
encumbrances or the right to assert liens or encumbrances against any property of the Owner arising in any manner
out of the performance of the Contract referenced above.
EXCEPTIONS:
SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS ATTACHED HERETO:
1.
Contractor's Release or Waiver of Liens,
conditional upon receipt of final payment.
CONTRACTOR: (Name and address)
2.
BY:
Separate Releases or Waivers of Liens from
Subcontractors and material and equipment
suppliers, to the extent required by the Owner,
accompanied by a list thereof.
(Signature of authorized
representative)
(Printed name and title)
Subscribed and sworn to before me on this date:
Notary Public:
My Commission Expires:
AIA Document G706A™ – 1994. Copyright © 1982 and 1994 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA®
Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,
or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the
law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 09:15:10 on 11/10/2008 under Order No.1000362958_1 which expires on 7/7/2009, and is not
for resale.
User Notes:
(2561864848)
1
®
TM
AIA Document G707 – 1994
Consent Of Surety to Final Payment
PROJECT: (Name and address)
OWNER:
ARCHITECT’S PROJECT NUMBER:
ARCHITECT:
CONTRACT FOR:
TO OWNER: (Name and address)
CONTRACTOR:
CONTRACT DATED:
SURETY:
OTHER:
In accordance with the provisions of the Contract between the Owner and the Contractor as indicated above, the
(Insert name and address of Surety)
, SURETY,
on bond of
(Insert name and address of Contractor)
, CONTRACTOR,
hereby approves of the final payment to the Contractor, and agrees that final payment to the Contractor shall not relieve the
Surety of any of its obligations to
(Insert name and address of Owner)
, OWNER,
as set forth in said Surety's bond.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety has hereunto set its hand on this date:
(Insert in writing the month followed by the numeric date and year.)
(Surety)
(Signature of authorized representative)
Attest:
(Seal):
(Printed name and title)
AIA Document G707™ – 1994. Copyright © 1982 and 1994 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA®
Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,
or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the
law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 14:28:51 on 05/08/2006 under Order No.1000187799_3 which expires on 8/3/2006, and is not
for resale.
User Notes:
(3517591305)
1
SECTION 013100
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on
Project including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Coordination Drawings.
Administrative and supervisory personnel.
Project meetings.
Requests for Interpretation (RFIs).
B.
Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility
will be assigned to a specific contractor.
C.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Division 01 Section "Multiple Contract Summary" for a description of the division of
Work among separate contracts and responsibility for coordination activities not in this
Section.
Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and
submitting Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Division 01 Section "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and
field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.
Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract
Documents.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
AND COORDINATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
013100 - 1
B.
Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other
contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work.
Each contractor shall coordinate its operations with operations, included in different Sections,
that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees
at meetings.
1.
D.
Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Preparation of the Schedule of Values.
Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
Delivery and processing of submittals.
Progress meetings.
Preinstallation conferences.
Project closeout activities.
Startup and adjustment of systems.
Project closeout activities.
Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.
1.
1.5
Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts
and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
E.
Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure
maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to
ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and
repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.
Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually
incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials
that are designated as Owner's property.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability
necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if
coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
AND COORDINATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
013100 - 2
1.
Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed
data. Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
Sheet Size: At least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches.
Number of Copies: Submit two opaque copies of each submittal. Architect will return
one copy.
a.
4.
B.
Submit five copies where Coordination Drawings are required for operation and
maintenance manuals. Architect will retain two copies; remainder will be
returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Drawing.
Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those
Sections.
Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key
personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project
site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone
numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and
telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to
Project.
1.
1.6
Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural,
structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.
Indicate required installation sequences.
Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of
dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum
clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of
such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be
considered changes to the Contract.
Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each
temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.
ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL
A.
General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory
personnel as required for proper performance of the Work.
1.
1.7
Include special personnel required for coordination of operations with other contractors.
PROJECT MEETINGS
A.
General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
AND COORDINATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
013100 - 3
2.
3.
B.
Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the
meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three
days of the meeting.
Preconstruction Conference:
Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting
construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after
execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location.
Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
1.
2.
Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;
Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned
parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar
with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
3.
C.
Tentative construction schedule.
Phasing.
Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.
Designation of key personnel and their duties.
Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
Procedures for RFIs.
Procedures for testing and inspecting.
Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
Distribution of the Contract Documents.
Submittal procedures.
Preparation of Record Documents.
Use of the premises and existing building.
Work restrictions.
Owner's occupancy requirements.
Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
Construction waste management and recycling.
Parking availability.
Office, work, and storage areas.
Equipment deliveries and priorities.
First aid.
Security.
Progress cleaning.
Working hours.
Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes.
Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each
construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1.
Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or
affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and
installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect
of scheduled meeting dates.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
AND COORDINATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
013100 - 4
2.
Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
y.
3.
4.
5.
D.
The Contract Documents.
Options.
Related RFIs.
Related Change Orders.
Purchases.
Deliveries.
Submittals.
Review of mockups.
Possible conflicts.
Compatibility problems.
Time schedules.
Weather limitations.
Manufacturer's written recommendations.
Warranty requirements.
Compatibility of materials.
Acceptability of substrates.
Temporary facilities and controls.
Space and access limitations.
Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
Testing and inspecting requirements.
Installation procedures.
Coordination with other work.
Required performance results.
Protection of adjacent work.
Protection of construction and personnel.
Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including
required corrective measures and actions.
Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who
should have been present.
Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.
Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the
Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at biweekly intervals. Coordinate dates of
meetings with preparation of payment requests.
1.
2.
Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized
to conclude matters relating to the Work.
Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
a.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
AND COORDINATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
013100 - 5
in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction
behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to
do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and
subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
1)
b.
Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
20)
3.
4.
Interface requirements.
Sequence of operations.
Status of submittals.
Deliveries.
Off-site fabrication.
Access.
Site utilization.
Temporary facilities and controls.
Work hours.
Hazards and risks.
Progress cleaning.
Quality and work standards.
Status of correction of deficient items.
Field observations.
RFIs.
Status of proposal requests.
Pending changes.
Status of Change Orders.
Pending claims and disputes.
Documentation of information for payment requests.
Minutes: General Contractor to record meeting results and distribute copies of meeting
minutes to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting
from each meeting.
Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who
should have been present.
a.
E.
Review schedule for next period.
Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress
meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue
revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at biweekly intervals. Project
coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as
progress meetings and preinstallation conferences.
1.
Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized
to conclude matters relating to the Work.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
AND COORDINATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
013100 - 6
2.
Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting.
Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for
discussion as appropriate to status of Project.
a.
b.
c.
Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last
coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of
schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Combined Contractor's Construction
Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure
commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions
are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed
within the Contract Time.
Schedule Updating: Revise Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule after
each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or
recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.
Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the
following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
3.
1.8
Interface requirements.
Sequence of operations.
Status of submittals.
Deliveries.
Off-site fabrication.
Access.
Site utilization.
Temporary facilities and controls.
Work hours.
Hazards and risks.
Progress cleaning.
Quality and work standards.
Change Orders.
Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to
others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.
REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs)
A.
Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents,
and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the
form specified.
1.
2.
B.
RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor
will be returned with no response.
Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's
work or work of subcontractors.
Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and
the following:
1.
2.
Project name.
Date.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
AND COORDINATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
013100 - 7
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Name of Contractor.
Name of Architect.
RFI number, numbered sequentially.
Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time
or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
Contractor's signature.
Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop
Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.
a.
C.
Hard-Copy RFIs: Form included at end of Part 3.
1.
D.
Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number.
Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as
indicated above.
1.
E.
Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions,
thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials,
assemblies, and attachments.
Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.
Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it.
Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m.
will be considered as received the following working day.
1.
The following RFIs will be returned without action:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
Requests for approval of submittals.
Requests for approval of substitutions.
Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents.
Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.
Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Architect's time for response will start again.
Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to
Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."
a.
If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or
the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI
response.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
AND COORDINATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
013100 - 8
F.
On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response
to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor
disagrees with response.
G.
RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.
Submit log weekly. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Project name.
Name and address of Contractor.
Name and address of Architect.
RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.
RFI description.
Date the RFI was submitted.
Date Architect's response was received.
Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and
Proposal Request, as appropriate.
Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as
appropriate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
**END OF SECTION**
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
AND COORDINATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
013100 - 9
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI)
Project: Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
To:
Re:
R.F.I. Number: _________________
Lancaster County Government Center _
150 N. Queen Street, Lancaster, PA
From:
________________________
_________________________________
Date:
________________________
_________________________________
A/E Project Number:
_________________________________
Contract For:
__________
_________________
___________________________________________________________________________
Specification Section:
Paragraph:
Drawing Reference:
Detail:
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Request:
Signed by:
Date:
___________________________________________________________________________
Response:
Attachments
___________________________________________________________________________
Response From:
To:
Date Rec’d:
Date Ret=d:
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Signed by:
Date:
_____________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 013200
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress
of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Preliminary Construction Schedule.
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Submittals Schedule.
Daily construction reports.
Material location reports.
Field condition reports.
Special reports.
Division 01 Section "Multiple Contract Summary" for preparing a combined Contractor's
Construction Schedule.
Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values.
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and
distributing meeting and conference minutes.
Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting construction
photographs.
Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.
Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and
inspections.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring,
and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume
time and resources.
1.
2.
3.
Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the
planned early start and finish times.
Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS
DOCUMENTATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
013200 - 1
B.
Cost Loading: The allocation of the Schedule of Values for the completion of an activity as
scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum, unless
otherwise approved by Architect.
C.
CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction
project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations
determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.
D.
Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network
schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
E.
Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.
F.
Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.
1.
2.
3.
Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a
jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet
schedule milestones and Contract completion date.
Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the
early start of the successor activity.
Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without
adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.
G.
Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for
greater detail.
H.
Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction
element.
I.
Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement.
J.
Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing activities and activity
relationships.
K.
Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of
an activity as scheduled.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submittals Schedule: Submit five copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a
tabular format:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Scheduled date for first submittal.
Specification Section number and title.
Submittal category (action or informational).
Name of subcontractor.
Description of the Work covered.
Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit six opaque copies.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS
DOCUMENTATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
013200 - 2
1.
Approval of cost-loaded preliminary construction schedule will not constitute approval of
Schedule of Values for cost-loaded activities.
C.
Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit six opaque copies, large enough to show entire network
for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities.
D.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit six opaque copies of initial schedule, large enough
to show entire schedule for entire construction period.
1.
E.
Submit an electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, on CD-R, and labeled to
comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (Initial or Updated)
and date on label.
CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit six copies of each of the following
computer-generated reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number,
activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start
date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days.
1.
2.
3.
Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date,
or actual start date if known.
Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in
ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.
Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.
F.
Daily Construction Reports: Submit three copies at weekly intervals.
G.
Material Location Reports: Submit three copies at weekly intervals.
H.
Field Condition Reports: Submit three copies at time of discovery of differing conditions.
I.
Special Reports: Submit three copies at time of unusual event.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures
related to the Preliminary Construction Schedule and Contractor's Construction Schedule,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Review software limitations and content and format for reports.
Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule.
Discuss constraints, including phasing, work stages, area separations, interim milestones,
and partial Owner occupancy.
Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products.
Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts.
Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals.
Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting
agencies.
Review time required for completion and startup procedures.
Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS
DOCUMENTATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
013200 - 3
10.
11.
1.6
Review submittal requirements and procedures.
Review procedures for updating schedule.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of
construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
B.
Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of
subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required
schedules and reports.
1.
2.
Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties
involved.
Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule
them in proper sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE
A.
Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required
by construction schedule.
Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering,
manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.
1.
2.
Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary bar-chart schedule. Include
submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those required to
maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time
for manufacture or fabrication.
a.
3.
2.2
At Contractor's option, show submittals on the Preliminary Construction Schedule,
instead of tabulating them separately.
Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's
Construction Schedule.
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A.
Procedures:
Scheduling."
B.
Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice of Award to date of Final
Completion.
1.
Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning &
Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an
early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS
DOCUMENTATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
013200 - 4
C.
Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal
element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless
specifically allowed by Architect.
Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long
lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities
in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals,
approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 01
Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in
Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule.
Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 10 days for startup and testing.
Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for
Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures
necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and
as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.
Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract.
Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by
Owner.
Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include
delivery date indicated in Division 01 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated
stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.
Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include
delivery date indicated in Division 01 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated
stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.
Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
7.
Coordination with existing construction.
Limitations of continued occupancies.
Uninterruptible services.
Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.
Use of premises restrictions.
Provisions for future construction.
Seasonal variations.
Environmental control.
Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the
Work, including, but not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Subcontract awards.
Submittals.
Purchases.
Mockups.
Fabrication.
Sample testing.
Deliveries.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS
DOCUMENTATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
013200 - 5
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
8.
Installation.
Tests and inspections.
Adjusting.
Curing.
Startup and placement into final use and operation.
Area Separations: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the
Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced
or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Structural completion.
Permanent space enclosure.
Completion of mechanical installation.
Completion of electrical installation.
Substantial Completion.
E.
Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but
not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion.
F.
Cost Correlation: At the head of schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating planned
and actual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of the Work performed as of dates used for
preparation of payment requests.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Refer to Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment
procedures.
Contractor shall assign cost to construction activities on the CPM schedule. Costs shall
not be assigned to submittal activities unless specified otherwise but may, with
Architect's approval, be assigned to fabrication and delivery activities. Costs shall be
under required principal subcontracts for testing and commissioning activities, operation
and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project Record Documents, and
demonstration and training (if applicable), in the amount of 5 percent of the Contract
Sum.
Each activity cost shall reflect an accurate value subject to approval by Architect.
Total cost assigned to activities shall equal the total Contract Sum.
G.
Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its
submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the
proposed change on the overall project schedule.
H.
Computer Software: Prepare schedules using a program that has been developed specifically to
manage construction schedules.
2.3
PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A.
Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of
each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 60
days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash
requirement prediction based on indicated activities.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS
DOCUMENTATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
013200 - 6
2.4
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)
A.
General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.
B.
Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for the
Notice to Proceed. Outline significant construction activities for the first 60 days of
construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement
prediction based on indicated activities.
C.
CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a computerized, time-scaled
CPM network analysis diagram for the Work.
1.
Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be
accepted for use no later than 30 days after date established for the Notice to Proceed.
a.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall
not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion
dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule.
Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including
subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule
information.
Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting
progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates.
Use "one workday" as the unit of time. Include list of nonworking days and holidays
incorporated into the schedule.
CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work.
Using the preliminary network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical
paths.
1.
Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship
of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the
following activities:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
3.
Preparation and processing of submittals.
Mobilization and demobilization.
Purchase of materials.
Delivery.
Fabrication.
Utility interruptions.
Installation.
Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities.
Testing and commissioning.
Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim
completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract
milestone dates.
Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled
network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary
to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS
DOCUMENTATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
013200 - 7
4.
Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate
paths with most float near the edges.
a.
E.
Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a list of straight "early start-total
float" sort. Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
F.
Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity.
Description of activity.
Principal events of activity.
Immediate preceding and succeeding activities.
Early and late start dates.
Early and late finish dates.
Activity duration in workdays.
Total float or slack time.
Average size of workforce.
Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the Schedule of Values).
Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports
showing the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
G.
Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical
path.
Identification of activities that have changed.
Changes in early and late start dates.
Changes in early and late finish dates.
Changes in activity durations in workdays.
Changes in the critical path.
Changes in total float or slack time.
Changes in the Contract Time.
Value Summaries: Prepare two cumulative value lists, sorted by finish dates.
1.
2.
3.
4.
In first list, tabulate activity number, early finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar
value.
In second list, tabulate activity number, late finish date, dollar value, and cumulative
dollar value.
In subsequent issues of both lists, substitute actual finish dates for activities completed as
of list date.
Prepare list for ease of comparison with payment requests; coordinate timing with
progress meetings.
a.
b.
In both value summary lists, tabulate "actual percent complete" and "cumulative
value completed" with total at bottom.
Submit value summary printouts one week before each regularly scheduled
progress meeting.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS
DOCUMENTATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
013200 - 8
2.5
REPORTS
A.
Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following
information concerning events at Project site:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
List of subcontractors at Project site.
List of separate contractors at Project site.
Approximate count of personnel at Project site.
Equipment at Project site.
Material deliveries.
High and low temperatures and general weather conditions.
Accidents.
Meetings and significant decisions.
Unusual events (refer to special reports).
Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
Meter readings and similar recordings.
Emergency procedures.
Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
Change Orders received and implemented.
Construction Change Directives received and implemented.
Services connected and disconnected.
Equipment or system tests and startups.
Partial Completions and occupancies.
Substantial Completions authorized.
B.
Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of
materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials
previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on
and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project
site.
C.
Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions
and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for
interpretation. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with
recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
2.6
SPECIAL REPORTS
A.
General: Submit special reports directly to Owner, Architect and MEP Engineer within one day
of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.
B.
Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at
Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report.
List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of
results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these
events are known or predictable.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS
DOCUMENTATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
013200 - 9
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A.
Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect
actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly
scheduled progress meeting.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have
been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each
such meeting.
Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not
limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.
Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors,
testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know
schedule responsibility.
1.
2.
Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the
same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned
portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.
**END OF SECTION**
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS
DOCUMENTATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
013200 - 10
SECTION 013233
PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Preconstruction photographs.
Periodic construction photographs.
Final completion construction photographs.
Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation.
Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation as
project record documents at Project closeout.
Section 024119 "Selective Structure Demolition" for photographic documentation before
selective demolition operations commence.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For photographer.
B.
Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked
for location and direction of each photograph. Indicate elevation or story of construction.
Include same information as corresponding photographic documentation.
C.
Digital Photographs: Submit image files within three days of taking photographs.
1.
2.
3.
Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 8 megapixels.
Format: Minimum 3200 by 2400 pixels, in unaltered original files, with same aspect
ratio as the sensor, uncropped, date and time stamped, in folder named by date of
photograph, accompanied by key plan file.
Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file
metadata tag:
a.
b.
c.
d.
PHOTOGRAPHIC
DOCUMENTATION
Name of Project.
Name and contact information for photographer.
Name of Architect.
Name of Contractor.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
013233 - 1
e.
f.
g.
1.4
Date photograph was taken.
Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and
elevation or story of construction.
Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Photographer Qualifications: An individual who has been regularly engaged as a professional
photographer of construction projects for not less than three years.
USAGE RIGHTS
A.
Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimited
reproduction of photographic documentation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA
A.
Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum
sensor size of 8 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 3200 by 2400 pixels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A.
Photographer: Engage a qualified photographer to take construction photographs.
B.
General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to
clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted.
1.
C.
Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera,
without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.
1.
2.
D.
Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each
photographic location.
Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image.
Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project
site, available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those
submitted to Architect.
Preconstruction Photographs: Before commencement of demolition, take photographs of
Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction,
from different vantage points, as directed by Architect.
PHOTOGRAPHIC
DOCUMENTATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
013233 - 2
1.
2.
3.
4.
Flag construction limits before taking construction photographs.
Take 15 photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the
Work.
Take 15 photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to accurately
record physical conditions at start of construction.
Take additional photographs as required to record settlement or cracking of adjacent
structures, pavements, and improvements.
E.
Periodic Construction Photographs: Take minimum of (5) photographs daily for the work
through the building work areas. Otherwise, with permission from Owner, take 15 photographs
weekly, with timing each month adjusted to coincide with the cutoff date associated with each
Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress
since last photographs were taken.
F.
Architect-Directed Construction Photographs: From time to time, Architect will instruct
photographer about number and frequency of photographs and general directions on vantage
points. Select actual vantage points and take photographs to show the status of construction and
progress since last photographs were taken.
G.
Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take 15 color photographs after date of
Substantial Completion for submission as project record documents. Architect will inform
photographer of desired vantage points.
1.
H.
Do not include date stamp.
Additional Photographs:
photographs specified.
1.
2.
3.
Architect may request photographs in addition to periodic
Three days' notice will be given, where feasible.
In emergency situations, take additional photographs within 24 hours of request.
Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Special events planned at Project site.
Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses.
Photographs to be taken at fabrication locations away from Project site. These
photographs are not subject to unit prices or unit-cost allowances.
Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work.
Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance.
Owner's request for special publicity photographs.
**END OF SECTION**
PHOTOGRAPHIC
DOCUMENTATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
013233 - 3
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 013300
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural
requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the
schedule of values.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require
Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual
Specification Sections as "action submittals."
B.
Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not
require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with
requirements.
Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual
Specification Sections as "informational submittals."
C.
Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems
used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent
fixed-layout document format.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates
required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing,
fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making
corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and
reviewing submittals required by those corrections.
1.
SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES
Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and
Contractor's construction schedule.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
013300 - 1
2.
3.
Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include
submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals
required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of
long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.
Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's
construction schedule.
a.
4.
Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
1.5
Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing
for submittals.
Scheduled date for first submittal.
Specification Section number and title.
Submittal category: Action; informational.
Name of subcontractor.
Description of the Work covered.
Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
Scheduled date of fabrication.
Scheduled dates for purchasing.
Scheduled dates for installation.
Activity or event number.
SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings can be
provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
1.
Architect will furnish each Prime Contractor one (1) set of digital data drawing files of
the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings. Additional file request by
Contractors will be charged a fee of $100.00 per file or per drawing.
a.
b.
c.
B.
Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital
data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.
Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in
AUTOCAD 2012 or earlier.
Contractor shall execute a CADD FILE Release Form available from Architect.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1.
2.
3.
4.
SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES
Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless
partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.
Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification
Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.
Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
013300 - 2
a.
C.
Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.
Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the
Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of
the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time
if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor
when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner
as initial submittal.
Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.
Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants,
Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal.
Paper Submittals:
identification.
1.
2.
3.
Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record
Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.
Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Project name.
Date.
Name of Architect.
Name of Contractor.
Name of subcontractor.
Name of supplier.
Name of manufacturer.
Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
1)
i.
j.
k.
l.
4.
Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a
decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals
shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,
061000.01.A).
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
Other necessary identification.
Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and
unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents,
initial submittal may serve as final submittal.
a.
SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES
Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for
Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified
number of copies to Architect.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
013300 - 3
5.
Transmittal for Paper Submittals:
Assemble each submittal individually and
appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal
form. Architect will return without review submittals received from sources other than
Contractor.
a.
Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals:
following information:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
Provide locations on form for the
Project name.
Date.
Destination (To:).
Source (From:).
Name and address of Architect.
Name of Contractor.
Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
Category and type of submittal.
Submittal purpose and description.
Specification Section number and title.
Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name
for each of multiple items.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Indication of full or partial submittal.
Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.
Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
Remarks.
Signature of transmitter.
E.
Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.
F.
Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's
letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested
by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract
Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information
as related submittal.
G.
Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1.
2.
3.
Note date and content of previous submittal.
Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of
revision.
Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action
stamp.
H.
Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
I.
Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final
action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.
SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
013300 - 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A.
General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by
individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification
Sections.
1.
2.
3.
Action Submittals: Submit 4 paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated.
Architect, will return 3 copies.
Informational Submittals: Submit 2 paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise
indicated. Architect will not return copies.
Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that
entity.
a.
b.
B.
Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1.
2.
3.
If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data
are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
4.
5.
Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
Manufacturer's product specifications.
Standard color charts.
Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.
Testing by recognized testing agency.
Application of testing agency labels and seals.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Availability and delivery time information.
Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.
Submit Product Data in the following format:
a.
C.
Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted
certificates and certifications where indicated.
Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications
where indicated.
5 paper copies of Product Data unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return 4
copies.
Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1.
SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES
Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents.
following information, as applicable:
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
Include the
013300 - 5
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.
Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:
a.
D.
Identification of products.
Schedules.
Compliance with specified standards.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
5 opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect will return 4 copies.
Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1.
2.
Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together
in one submittal package.
Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for qualitycontrol comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a.
b.
4.
SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES
Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual
Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time
of use.
Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's
property, are the property of Contractor.
Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
a.
5.
Generic description of Sample.
Product name and name of manufacturer.
Sample source.
Number and title of applicable Specification Section.
Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.
Number of Samples: Submit 2 full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern,
texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's
product line. Architect will return 1 submittal with options selected.
Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and
physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the
following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or
containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
013300 - 6
color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing
and inspection.
a.
Number of Samples: Submit 3 sets of Samples. Architect will retain 2 Sample
sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a
project record sample.
1)
2)
E.
Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication
techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to
be demonstrated.
If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in
material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least [3] sets of
paired units that show approximate limits of variations.
Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary
indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the
following information in tabular form:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract
Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.
Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.
Number and name of room or space.
Location within room or space.
Submit product schedule in the following format:
a.
Three paper copies of product schedule or list unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will return two copies.
F.
Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience
of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact
information of architects and owners, and other information specified.
G.
Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure
Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and
personnel certified.
H.
Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is
authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
I.
Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying
that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of
manufacturing experience where required.
J.
Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
K.
Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
013300 - 7
L.
Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
M.
Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on
evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or
on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
N.
Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.
Include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Name of evaluation organization.
Date of evaluation.
Time period when report is in effect.
Product and manufacturers' names.
Description of product.
Test procedures and results.
Limitations of use.
O.
Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation
of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
P.
Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed
before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
Q.
Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests
performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location,
for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
R.
Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.
Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.
Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for
calculations. Include page numbers.
2.2
DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES
A.
Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1.
SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES
If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit
a written request for additional information to Architect.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
013300 - 8
B.
Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and
other required submittals, submit three paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the
responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor
to be designed or certified by a design professional.
1.
Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the
Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing
these services.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A.
Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with
other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections
and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B.
Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700
"Closeout Procedures."
C.
Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,
and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2
ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A.
Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and
will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.
B.
Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will
return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to
appropriate party.
C.
Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial
submittals has received prior approval from Architect.
D.
Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered non-responsive, and will be returned
for re-submittal without review.
E.
Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without
action.
**END OF SECTION**
SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
013300 - 9
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 014000
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality
control.
B.
Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities
are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections
may also cover production of standard products.
Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other qualityassurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document
requirements.
Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required
by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of
this Section.
Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
construction will comply with requirements.
B.
Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and
completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract
enforcement activities performed by Architect.
C.
Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed
to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where
indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to
show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified
QUALITY
REQUIREMENTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
014000 - 1
installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved
mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.
1.
Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from
the building but on Project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and
subassemblies.
D.
Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before
products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance
with specified criteria.
E.
Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing
agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to
establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.
F.
Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g.,
plant, mill, factory, or shop.
G.
Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation
of the Work and for completed Work.
H.
Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
I.
Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an
employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,
including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
1.
J.
1.4
Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that
certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or
that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).
Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully
completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project;
being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A.
Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards
establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply
with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but
apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
B.
Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.
To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as
appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision
before proceeding.
QUALITY
REQUIREMENTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
014000 - 2
1.5
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: For mockups, provide plans, sections, and elevations, indicating materials and
size of mockup construction.
1.
2.
1.6
Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components.
Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and
responsibilities.
B.
Qualification Data : For Contractor's quality-control personnel.
C.
Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
D.
Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.7
Specification Section number and title.
Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
Description of test and inspection.
Identification of applicable standards.
Identification of test and inspection methods.
Number of tests and inspections required.
Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
Requirements for obtaining samples.
Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.
CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL
A.
1.8
Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of
approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or
defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with
requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
A.
Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other
Sections. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Date of issue.
Project title and number.
Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
QUALITY
REQUIREMENTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
014000 - 3
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
B.
Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information
documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other
Sections. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.9
Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report.
Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting
manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in
other Sections. Include the following:
1.
D.
Identification of product and Specification Section.
Complete test or inspection data.
Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspecting.
Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative
making report.
Statement that equipment complies with requirements.
Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels
required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar
to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
QUALITY
REQUIREMENTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
014000 - 4
C.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
D.
Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
E.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed
for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and
extent to those indicated for this Project.
F.
Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be
performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy
qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
1.
G.
Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for
specialists.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the
experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according
to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where
required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.
1.
2.
NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary
Laboratory Accreditation Program.
H.
Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation
of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for
this Project.
I.
Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this
Project.
J.
Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing
for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the
following:
1.
Contractor responsibilities include the following:
a.
b.
QUALITY
REQUIREMENTS
Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.
Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing
results to prevent delaying the Work.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
014000 - 5
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
K.
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test,
inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor.
Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work
complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers
that will be employed during the construction at Project.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.
a.
6.
7.
L.
1.10
A.
Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory
mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with
performance requirements.
Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will
perform same tasks for Project.
Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and
methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.
When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups; do
not reuse products on Project.
Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.
Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.
Integrated Exterior Mockups: Construct integrated exterior mockup according to approved
Shop Drawings. Coordinate installation of exterior envelope materials and products for which
mockups are required in individual Specification Sections, along with supporting materials.
QUALITY CONTROL
Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,
Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1.
2.
Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to
perform.
Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as
authorized by Change Orders.
QUALITY
REQUIREMENTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
014000 - 6
3.
B.
Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work
that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the
Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.
Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are
Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that
the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.
1.
2.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required
by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of
Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.
Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing
agency to perform these quality-control services.
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in
writing by Owner.
Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires
testing or inspecting will be performed.
Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
C.
Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal
Procedures."
D.
Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical
representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's
services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and
conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed
portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.
E.
Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
F.
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of
duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1.
2.
3.
Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the
Work during performance of its services.
Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests
are conducted.
Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
QUALITY
REQUIREMENTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
014000 - 7
4.
5.
6.
G.
Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
H.
A.
Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar qualitycontrol services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's qualitycontrol plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule.
Update as the Work progresses.
1.
1.11
Access to the Work.
Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
site.
Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance
and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and
replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1.
I.
Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar
quality-control service through Contractor.
Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve
or accept any portion of the Work.
Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party
involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.
SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency as required by
authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures
and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.
Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed
in the Work during performance of its services.
Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control
service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.
Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion,
which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
QUALITY
REQUIREMENTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
014000 - 8
5.
6.
Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
ACCEPTABLE TESTING AGENCIES
A.
3.2
Owner will approve all qualified testing agencies.
TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A.
Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
3.3
Date test or inspection was conducted.
Description of the Work tested or inspected.
Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.
Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test
and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A.
General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1.
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched
areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible
as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching
in Section 017300 "Execution."
B.
Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C.
Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services.
**END OF SECTION**
QUALITY
REQUIREMENTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
014000 - 9
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 014200
REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
DEFINITIONS
A.
General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B.
"Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,
and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the
Conditions of the Contract.
C.
"Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"
"authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."
D.
"Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on
Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,"
"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
E.
"Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control
performance of the Work.
F.
"Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations.
G.
"Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,
assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
H.
"Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I.
"Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site
is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on
which Project is to be built.
1.3
INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A.
Applicability of Standards:
Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent
requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if
REFERENCES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
014200 - 1
bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards
are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B.
Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless
otherwise indicated.
C.
Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with
industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not
bound with the Contract Documents.
1.
1.4
Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain
copies directly from publication source.
ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A.
Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson
Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional
Associations of the U.S."
B.
Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate
and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
AA
Aluminum Association (The)
www.aluminum.org
(703) 358-2960
AABC
Associated Air Balance Council
www.aabchq.com
(202) 737-0202
AAMA
American Architectural Manufacturers Association
www.aamanet.org
(847) 303-5664
AASHTO
American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials
www.transportation.org
(202) 624-5800
AATCC
American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists
www.aatcc.org
(919) 549-8141
ABAA
Air Barrier Association of America
www.airbarrier.org
(866) 956-5888
ABMA
American Bearing Manufacturers Association
www.abma-dc.org
(202) 367-1155
ACI
American Concrete Institute
www.concrete.org
(248) 848-3700
REFERENCES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
014200 - 2
ACPA
American Concrete Pipe Association
www.concrete-pipe.org
(972) 506-7216
AEIC
Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The)
www.aeic.org
(205) 257-2530
AF&PA
American Forest & Paper Association
www.afandpa.org
(800) 878-8878
(202) 463-2700
AGA
American Gas Association
www.aga.org
(202) 824-7000
AHAM
Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers
www.aham.org
(202) 872-5955
AHRI
Air-Conditioning, Heating, andRefrigeration Institute, The
www.ahrinet.org
(703) 524-8800
AI
Asphalt Institute
www.asphaltinstitute.org
(859) 288-4960
AIA
American Institute of Architects (The)
www.aia.org
(800) 242-3837
(202) 626-7300
AISC
American Institute of Steel Construction
www.aisc.org
(800) 644-2400
(312) 670-2400
AISI
American Iron and Steel Institute
www.steel.org
(202) 452-7100
AITC
American Institute of Timber Construction
www.aitc-glulam.org
(303) 792-9559
ALSC
American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated
www.alsc.org
(301) 972-1700
AMCA
Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.
www.amca.org
(847) 394-0150
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
www.ansi.org
(202) 293-8020
AOSA
Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.
www.aosaseed.com
(405) 780-7372
APA
APA - The Engineered Wood Association
www.apawood.org
(253) 565-6600
APA
Architectural Precast Association
www.archprecast.org
(239) 454-6989
REFERENCES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
014200 - 3
API
American Petroleum Institute
www.api.org
(202) 682-8000
ARI
Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute
www.ari.org
(703) 524-8800
ARMA
Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association
www.asphaltroofing.org
(202) 207-0917
ASCE
American Society of Civil Engineers
www.asce.org
(800) 548-2723
(703) 295-6300
ASCE/SEI
American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering
Institute
(See ASCE)
ASHRAE
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and AirConditioning Engineers
www.ashrae.org
(800) 527-4723
ASME
ASME International
(American Society of Mechanical Engineers International)
www.asme.org
(800) 843-2763
(973) 882-1170
ASSE
American Society of Sanitary Engineering
www.asse-plumbing.org
(440) 835-3040
ASTM
ASTM International
(American Society for Testing and Materials International)
www.astm.org
(610) 832-9500
ATIS
Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions
www.atis.org
(202) 628-6380
AWCMA
American Window Covering Manufacturers Association
(Now WCMA)
AWCI
Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry
www.awci.org
(703) 534-8300
AWI
Architectural Woodwork Institute
www.awinet.org
(571) 323-3636
AWPA
American Wood Protection Association
(Formerly: American Wood Preservers' Association)
www.awpa.com
(205) 733-4077
AWS
American Welding Society
www.aws.org
(800) 443-9353
(305) 443-9353
AWWA
American Water Works Association
(800) 926-7337
REFERENCES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
(404) 636-8400
014200 - 4
www.awwa.org
(303) 794-7711
BHMA
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
www.buildershardware.com
(212) 297-2122
BIA
Brick Industry Association (The)
www.bia.org
(703) 620-0010
BICSI
BICSI, Inc.
www.bicsi.org
(800) 242-7405
(813) 979-1991
BIFMA
BIFMA International
(Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's
Association International)
www.bifma.com
(616) 285-3963
BISSC
Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee
www.bissc.org
(866) 342-4772
CCC
Carpet Cushion Council
www.carpetcushion.org
(610) 527-3880
CDA
Copper Development Association
www.copper.org
(800) 232-3282
(212) 251-7200
CEA
Canadian Electricity Association
www.canelect.ca
(613) 230-9263
CEA
Consumer Electronics Association
www.ce.org
(866) 858-1555
(703) 907-7600
CFFA
Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc.
www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com
(216) 241-7333
CGA
Compressed Gas Association
www.cganet.com
(703) 788-2700
CIMA
Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association
www.cellulose.org
(888) 881-2462
(937) 222-2462
CISCA
Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association
www.cisca.org
(630) 584-1919
CISPI
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
www.cispi.org
(423) 892-0137
CLFMI
Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute
www.chainlinkinfo.org
(301) 596-2583
CPA
Composite Panel Association
www.pbmdf.com
REFERENCES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
(703) 724-1128
014200 - 5
CRI
Carpet and Rug Institute (The)
www.carpet-rug.com
(800) 882-8846
(706) 278-3176
CRRC
Cool Roof Rating Council
www.coolroofs.org
(866) 465-2523
(510) 485-7175
CRSI
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
www.crsi.org
(847) 517-1200
(800) 328-6306
CRRC
Cool Roof Rating Council
www.coolroofs.org
(866) 465-2523
(510) 485-7175
CSA
Canadian Standards Association
www.csa.ca
(800) 463-6727
(416) 747-4000
CSA
CSA International
(Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services)
www.csa-international.org
(866) 797-4272
(416) 747-4000
CSI
Construction Specifications Institute (The)
www.csinet.org
(800) 689-2900
(703) 684-0300
CSSB
Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau
www.cedarbureau.org
(604) 820-7700
CTI
Cooling Technology Institute
(Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute)
www.cti.org
(281) 583-4087
DHI
Door and Hardware Institute
www.dhi.org
(703) 222-2010
ECA
Electrical Components Association
www.ec-central.org
(703)907-8024
EIA
Electronic Industries Alliance
www.eia.org
(703) 907-7500
EIMA
EIFS Industry Members Association
www.eima.com
(800) 294-3462
(770) 968-7945
EJCDC
Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee
http://content.asce.org/ejcdc/
(703) 295-6000
EJMA
Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.
www.ejma.org
(914) 332-0040
ESD
ESD Association
(Electrostatic Discharge Association)
www.esda.org
(315) 339-6937
REFERENCES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
014200 - 6
ETL SEMCO
Intertek ETL SEMCO
(Formerly: ITS - Intertek Testing Service NA)
www.intertek-etlsemko.com
(800) 967-5352
FIBA
Federation Internationale de Basketball
(The International Basketball Federation)
www.fiba.com
41 22 545 00 00
FIVB
Federation Internationale de Volleyball
(The International Volleyball Federation)
www.fivb.ch
41 21 345 35 35
FM Approvals
FM Approvals LLC
www.fmglobal.com
(781) 762-4300
FM Global
FM Global
(Formerly: FMG - FM Global)
www.fmglobal.com
(401) 275-3000
FRSA
Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors (407) 671-3772
Association, Inc.
www.floridaroof.com
FSA
Fluid Sealing Association
www.fluidsealing.com
(610) 971-4850
FSC
Forest Stewardship Council
www.fsc.org
49 228 367 66 0
GA
Gypsum Association
www.gypsum.org
(301) 277-8686
GANA
Glass Association of North America
www.glasswebsite.com
GRI
(Part of GSI)
GS
Green Seal
www.greenseal.org
(202) 872-6400
GSI
Geosynthetic Institute
www.geosynthetic-institute.org
(610) 522-8440
HI
Hydronics Institute
www.gamanet.org
(908) 464-8200
HI/GAMA
Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers
Association
Division of Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration
Institute (AHRI)
(908) 464-8200
REFERENCES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
(785) 271-0208
014200 - 7
www.ahrinet.org
HMMA
Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association
(Part of NAAMM)
HPVA
Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association
www.hpva.org
(703) 435-2900
HPW
H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.
www.hpwhite.com
(410) 838-6550
IAPSC
International Association of Professional Security Consultants (515) 282-8192
www.iapsc.org
ICBO
International Conference of Building Officials
www.iccsafe.org
(888) 422-7233
ICEA
Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.
www.icea.net
(770) 830-0369
ICRI
International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.
www.icri.org
(847) 827-0830
ICPA
International Cast Polymer Association
www.icpa-hq.org
(703) 525-0320
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission
www.iec.ch
41 22 919 02 11
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The)
www.ieee.org
(212) 419-7900
IES
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
www.iesna.org
(703) 525-0320
IEST
Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology
www.iest.org
(847) 255-1561
IGMA
Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance
www.igmaonline.org
(613) 233-1510
ILI
Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.
www.iliai.com
(812) 275-4426
ISA
Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society, The
www.isa.org
(919) 549-8411
ISO
International Organization for Standardization
www.iso.ch
41 22 749 01 11
ISSFA
International Solid Surface Fabricators Association
(877) 464-7732
REFERENCES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
014200 - 8
www.issfa.net
(801) 341-7360
ITS
Intertek Testing Service NA
(Now ETL SEMCO)
ITU
International Telecommunication Union
www.itu.int/home
41 22 730 51 11
KCMA
Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association
www.kcma.org
(703) 264-1690
LGSEA
Light Gauge Steel Engineers Association
www.arcat.com
(202) 263-4488
LMA
Laminating Materials Association
(Now part of CPA)
LPI
Lightning Protection Institute
www.lightning.org
(800) 488-6864
MBMA
Metal Building Manufacturers Association
www.mbma.com
(216) 241-7333
MCA
Metal Construction Association
www.metalconstruction.org
(847) 375-4718
MFMA
Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.
www.maplefloor.org
(888) 480-9138
MFMA
Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.
www.metalframingmfg.org
(312) 644-6610
MH
Material Handling
(Now MHIA)
MHIA
Material Handling Industry of America
www.mhia.org
(800) 345-1815
(704) 676-1190
MIA
Marble Institute of America
www.marble-institute.com
(440) 250-9222
MPI
Master Painters Institute
www.paintinfo.com
(888) 674-8937
(604) 298-7578
MSS
Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and
Fittings Industry Inc.
www.mss-hq.com
(703) 281-6613
NAAMM
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
www.naamm.org
(630) 942-6591
REFERENCES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
014200 - 9
NACE
NACE International
(National Association of Corrosion Engineers International)
www.nace.org
(800) 797-6223
(281) 228-6200
NADCA
National Air Duct Cleaners Association
www.nadca.com
(202) 737-2926
NAGWS
National Association for Girls and Women in Sport
(800) 213-7193, ext.
453
www.aahperd.org/nagws/
NAIMA
North American Insulation Manufacturers Association
www.naima.org
(703) 684-0084
NBGQA
National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.
www.nbgqa.com
(800) 557-2848
NCAA
National Collegiate Athletic Association (The)
www.ncaa.org
(317) 917-6222
NCMA
National Concrete Masonry Association
www.ncma.org
(703) 713-1900
NCTA
National Cable & Telecommunications Association
www.ncta.com
(202) 222-2300
NEBB
National Environmental Balancing Bureau
www.nebb.org
(301) 977-3698
NECA
National Electrical Contractors Association
www.necanet.org
(301) 657-3110
NeLMA
Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association
www.nelma.org
(207) 829-6901
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
www.nema.org
(703) 841-3200
NETA
InterNational Electrical Testing Association
www.netaworld.org
(888) 300-6382
(269) 488-6382
NFHS
National Federation of State High School Associations
www.nfhs.org
(317) 972-6900
NFPA
NFPA
(National Fire Protection Association)
www.nfpa.org
(800) 344-3555
(617) 770-3000
NFRC
National Fenestration Rating Council
www.nfrc.org
(301) 589-1776
REFERENCES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
014200 - 10
NGA
National Glass Association
www.glass.org
(866) 342-5642
(703) 442-4890
NHLA
National Hardwood Lumber Association
www.natlhardwood.org
(800) 933-0318
(901) 377-1818
NLGA
National Lumber Grades Authority
www.nlga.org
(604) 524-2393
NOFMA
NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association
(Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers
Association)
www.nofma.org
(901) 526-5016
NOMMA
National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association
www.nomma.org
(888) 516-8585
NRCA
National Roofing Contractors Association
www.nrca.net
(800) 323-9545
(847) 299-9070
NRMCA
National Ready Mixed Concrete Association
www.nrmca.org
(888) 846-7622
(301) 587-1400
NSF
NSF International
(National Sanitation Foundation International)
www.nsf.org
(800) 673-6275
(734) 769-8010
NSSGA
National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association
www.nssga.org
(800) 342-1415
(703) 525-8788
NTMA
National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The)
www.ntma.com
(800) 323-9736
(540) 751-0930
NWFA
National Wood Flooring Association
www.nwfa.org
(800) 422-4556
(636) 519-9663
PCI
Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute
www.pci.org
(312) 786-0300
PDI
Plumbing & Drainage Institute
www.pdionline.org
(800) 589-8956
(978) 557-0720
PGI
PVC Geomembrane Institute
http://pgi-tp.cee.uiuc.edu
(217) 333-3929
PTI
Post-Tensioning Institute
www.post-tensioning.org
(248) 848-3180
RCSC
Research Council on Structural Connections
www.boltcouncil.org
REFERENCES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
014200 - 11
RFCI
Resilient Floor Covering Institute
www.rfci.com
(706) 882-3833
Redwood Inspection Service
www.redwoodinspection.com
(925) 935-1499
SAE
SAE International
www.sae.org
(877) 606-7323
(724) 776-4841
SCAQMD
South Coast Air Quality Management District
www.aqmd.com
(909) 396-2000
SCTE
Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers
www.scte.org
(800) 542-5040
(610) 363-6888
SDI
Steel Deck Institute
www.sdi.org
(847) 458-4647
SDI
Steel Door Institute
www.steeldoor.org
(440) 899-0010
SEFA
Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association
www.sefalabs.com
(877) 294-5424
(516) 294-5424
SEI/ASCE
Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil
Engineers
(See ASCE)
SIA
Security Industry Association
www.siaonline.org
(866) 817-8888
(703) 683-2075
SJI
Steel Joist Institute
www.steeljoist.org
(843) 626-1995
SMA
Screen Manufacturers Association
www.smacentral.org
(561) 533-0991
SMACNA
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'
National Association
www.smacna.org
(703) 803-2980
SMPTE
Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers
www.smpte.org
(914) 761-1100
SPFA
Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance
(Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry,
Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division)
www.sprayfoam.org
(800) 523-6154
SPIB
Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The)
www.spib.org
(850) 434-2611
RIS
REFERENCES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
014200 - 12
SPRI
Single Ply Roofing Industry
www.spri.org
(781) 647-7026
SSINA
Specialty Steel Industry of North America
www.ssina.com
(800) 982-0355
(202) 342-8630
SSPC
SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings
www.sspc.org
(877) 281-7772
(412) 281-2331
STI
Steel Tank Institute
www.steeltank.com
(847) 438-8265
SWI
Steel Window Institute
www.steelwindows.com
(216) 241-7333
SWPA
Submersible Wastewater Pump Association
www.swpa.org
(847) 681-1868
TCA
Tilt-Up Concrete Association
www.tilt-up.org
(319) 895-6911
TCNA
Tile Council of North America, Inc.
www.tileusa.com
(864) 646-8453
TEMA
Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association
www.tema.org
(914) 332-0040
TIA/EIA
Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic
Industries Alliance
www.tiaonline.org
(703) 907-7700
TMS
The Masonry Society
www.masonrysociety.org
(303) 939-9700
TPI
Truss Plate Institute, Inc.
www.tpinst.org
(703) 683-1010
TPI
Turfgrass Producers International
www.turfgrasssod.org
(800) 405-8873
(847) 649-5555
TRI
Tile Roofing Institute
www.tileroofing.org
(312) 670-4177
UL
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
www.ul.com
(877) 854-3577
(847) 272-8800
UNI
Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association
www.uni-bell.org
(972) 243-3902
USAV
USA Volleyball
(888) 786-5539
REFERENCES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
014200 - 13
www.usavolleyball.org
(719) 228-6800
USGBC
U.S. Green Building Council
www.usgbc.org
(800) 795-1747
USITT
United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.
www.usitt.org
(800) 938-7488
(315) 463-6463
WASTEC
Waste Equipment Technology Association
www.wastec.org
(800) 424-2869
(202) 244-4700
WCLIB
West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
www.wclib.org
(800) 283-1486
(503) 639-0651
WCMA
Window Covering Manufacturers Association
www.wcmanet.org
(212) 297-2122
WDMA
Window & Door Manufacturers Association
(Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door
Association)
www.wdma.com
(800) 223-2301
(312) 321-6802
WI
Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute
of California)
www.wicnet.org
(916) 372-9943
WMMPA
Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association
www.wmmpa.com
(800) 550-7889
(530) 661-9591
WSRCA
Western States Roofing Contractors Association
www.wsrca.com
(800) 725-0333
(650) 570-5441
WWPA
Western Wood Products Association
www.wwpa.org
(503) 224-3930
C.
Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names,
telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and upto-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
DIN
Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.V.
www.din.de
49 30 2601-0
IAPMO
International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials
www.iapmo.org
(909) 472-4100
ICC
International Code Council
www.iccsafe.org
(888) 422-7233
ICC-ES
ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.
www.icc-es.org
(800) 423-6587
(562) 699-0543
REFERENCES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
014200 - 14
D.
Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications
or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the
following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed
to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
COE
Army Corps of Engineers
www.usace.army.mil
(202) 761-0011
CPSC
Consumer Product Safety Commission
www.cpsc.gov
(800) 638-2772
(301) 504-7923
DOC
Department of Commerce
www.commerce.gov
(202) 482-2000
DOD
Department of Defense
http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil
(215) 697-6257
DOE
Department of Energy
www.energy.gov
(202) 586-9220
EPA
Environmental Protection Agency
www.epa.gov
(202) 272-0167
FAA
Federal Aviation Administration
www.faa.gov
(866) 835-5322
FCC
Federal Communications Commission
www.fcc.gov
(888) 225-5322
FDA
Food and Drug Administration
www.fda.gov
(888) 463-6332
GSA
General Services Administration
www.gsa.gov
(800) 488-3111
HUD
Department of Housing and Urban Development
www.hud.gov
(202) 708-1112
LBL
Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory
www.lbl.gov
(510) 486-4000
NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program
(See TRB)
NIST
National Institute of Standards and Technology
www.nist.gov
(301) 975-6478
OSHA
Occupational Safety & Health Administration
www.osha.gov
(800) 321-6742
(202) 693-1999
REFERENCES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
014200 - 15
PBS
Public Buildings Service
(See GSA)
PHS
Office of Public Health and Science
http://www.hhs.gov/ophs/
(202) 690-7694
RUS
Rural Utilities Service
(See USDA)
(202) 720-9540
SD
State Department
www.state.gov
(202) 647-4000
TRB
Transportation Research Board
http://gulliver.trb.org
(202) 334-2934
USDA
Department of Agriculture
www.usda.gov
(202) 720-2791
USP
U.S. Pharmacopeia
www.usp.org
(800) 227-8772
USPS
Postal Service
www.usps.com
(202) 268-2000
E.
Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and
regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to
change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
ADAAG
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
Architectural Barriers Act (ABA)
(800) 8722253
(202) 2720080
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
Available from U.S. Access Board
www.access-board.gov
CFR
Code of Federal Regulations
Available from Government Printing Office
(866) 5121800
(202) 5121800
www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html
DOD
Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards
(215) 6972664
Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point
http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil
DSCC
REFERENCES
Defense Supply Center Columbus
(See FS)
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
014200 - 16
FED-STD
Federal Standard
(See FS)
FS
Federal Specification
(215) 6972664
Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point
http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil/
Available from Defense Standardization Program
www.dsp.dla.mil
Available from General Services Administration
(202) 6198925
www.gsa.gov
Available from National Institute of Building Sciences
(202) 2897800
www.wbdg.org/ccb
FTMS
Federal Test Method Standard
(See FS)
MIL
(See MILSPEC)
MIL-STD
(See MILSPEC)
MILSPEC
Military Specification and Standards
(215) 6972664
Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point
http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil
UFAS
Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards
Available from Access Board
(800) 8722253
(202) 2720080
www.access-board.gov
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
**END OF SECTION**
REFERENCES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
014200 - 17
SECTION 015000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Division 01 Section "Summary" for limitations on utility interruptions and other work
restrictions.
Division 01 Section "Multiple Contract Summary" for division of responsibilities for
temporary facilities and controls.
Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of
implementation and termination schedule and utility reports.
Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements.
Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity
requirements for products in those Sections.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is
complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all
openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.
USE CHARGES
A.
General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum.
Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not
limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having
jurisdiction.
B.
Water Service: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering
and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as
required for construction operations.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
AND CONTROLS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
015000 - 1
C.
1.5
Electric Power Service: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use
without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of
services as required for construction operations.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for
construction personnel.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B.
Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its
use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned
responsibilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric
fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch OD line
posts and 2-7/8-inch OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch OD top and bottom rails.
Provide concrete bases for supporting posts.
B.
Temporary Walls / Enclosures: Provide fire-rated steel stud partitions with one side of gypsum
board minimum 1/2 inch thick by 48 inches wide by maximum available lengths; regular-type
panels with tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C 36. The opposite (construction) side shall
have fire-treated plywood.
C.
Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool;
with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.
D.
Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
AND CONTROLS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
015000 - 2
2.2
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A.
Field Offices, General: Utilize space in existing basement.
Contractors to not interfere with required activities.
B.
Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of construction personnel.
Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan
racks, and bookcases.
Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 15 individuals. Provide
electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with not less than 1 receptacle
on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot square tack board.
Drinking water.
Coffee machine and supplies.
Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68
to 72 deg F.
Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc (215 lx) at desk
height.
Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Coordinate all storage requirements with Owner. Storage will
need to be accommodated within building.
1.
2.3
Coordinate with Owner and
Store combustible materials apart from building.
EQUIPMENT
A.
Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by
locations and classes of fire exposures.
B.
HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented,
self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
1.
2.
3.
Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating
units is prohibited.
Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for
temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return air grille
in system and remove at end of construction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the
Work.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
AND CONTROLS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
015000 - 3
B.
3.2
Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities
are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
1.
B.
Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as
facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial
Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.
1.
C.
Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a
drip pan of suitable size to minimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly
from pans.
Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of
construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location,
operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
1.
Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will not be permitted.
D.
Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities
for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from
adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a
harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
E.
Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction
activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction
from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on
completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to
produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
F.
Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as
long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner.
G.
Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination
for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
1.
2.
H.
Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
without operating entire system.
Install lighting for Project identification sign.
Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all
construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office.
1.
Provide additional telephone lines for the following:
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
AND CONTROLS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
015000 - 4
a.
2.
At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3.
I.
Police and fire departments.
Ambulance service.
Contractor's home office.
Architect's office.
Engineers' offices.
Owner's office.
Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.
Provide superintendent with cellular telephone for use when away from field office.
Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service,
including electronic mail, in common-use facilities.
1.
3.3
Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer in
each field office.
Provide DSL in primary field office.
SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.
Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
B.
Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel. No parking on site,
utilize public parking facilities.
C.
Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs as
indicated on Drawings. Install signs where indicated to inform public and individuals seeking
entrance to Project. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.
1.
2.
Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.
Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.
D.
Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle
waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction. Comply with Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements.
E.
Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.
1.
F.
Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and
equipment" and not temporary facilities.
Existing Elevator Use: Use of Owner's existing elevators will be permitted, as long as elevators
are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion,
restore elevator interior to condition existing before initial use.
1.
Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
AND CONTROLS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
015000 - 5
2.
G.
Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, as long as stairs are
cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore
stairs to condition existing before initial use.
1.
3.4
Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect
elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become
damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of
correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make
required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.
Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs
and to maintain means of egress. If, despite such protection, stairs become damaged,
restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work.
SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that
minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable
effects.
1.
Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."
B.
Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and
harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control
procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial
Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using
environmentally safe materials.
C.
Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially
completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance,
vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.
D.
Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.
E.
Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in
progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar
activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
1.
F.
Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate
temporary enclosures.
Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt
migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner and tenants from fumes and noise.
1.
2.
3.
Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side,
and fire-retardant plywood on construction operations side.
Insulate partitions to provide noise protection to occupied areas.
Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
AND CONTROLS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
015000 - 6
4.
5.
6.
G.
Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types
needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with
NFPA 241.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.5
Protect air-handling equipment.
Weather strip openings.
Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.
Prohibit smoking in construction areas.
Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar
sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel
at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be
followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
Provide temporary hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that
hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size
with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.
Building is fully sprinklered. Upon removal of existing ceilings, rotate sprinkler heads
upward until installations of new ceiling or APC grid.
OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A.
Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B.
Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
1.
Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated
results and to avoid possibility of damage.
C.
Operate Project-identification-sign lighting daily from dusk until 12:00 midnight.
D.
Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than
Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may
have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,
clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1.
2.
Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01
Section "Closeout Procedures."
**END OF SECTION**
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
AND CONTROLS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
015000 - 7
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 016000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for
use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Division 01 Section "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate.
Division 01 Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products
specified.
Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract
closeout.
Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products
and installations specified to be warranted.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless
explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not
considered new products.
Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal
process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities
related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties,
appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
PRODUCT
REQUIREMENTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
016000 - 1
C.
1.4
Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and
accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other
designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of
evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names
of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each
product.
1.
2.
Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals
Schedule.
Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
3.
Initial Submittal: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3
copies of initial product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for
variations from Contract requirements.
a.
4.
5.
B.
Specification Section number and title.
Generic name used in the Contract Documents.
Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations.
Manufacturer's name and address.
Supplier's name and address.
Installer's name and address.
Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period.
Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery
date.
At Contractor's option, initial submittal may be limited to product selections and
designations that must be established early in Contract period.
Completed List: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3
copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and
for variations from Contract requirements.
Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 days of
receipt of completed product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable
product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response,
or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement to comply with the
Contract Documents.
Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product
or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and
title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1.
2.
Substitution Request Form: Use facsimile of form provided at end of Section.
Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable:
PRODUCT
REQUIREMENTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
016000 - 2
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
3.
Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution.
Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within
15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or
documentation, whichever is later.
a.
b.
C.
Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided.
Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to
other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as
performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and
requirements indicated.
Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
Samples, where applicable or requested.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.
Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for
Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided
within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.
Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.
Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated
results.
Form of Acceptance: Change Order.
Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.
Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify
product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section
number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1.
Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product
request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable
product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional
information or documentation, whichever is later.
a.
PRODUCT
REQUIREMENTS
Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
016000 - 3
b.
D.
1.5
Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable
product request within time allocated.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01
Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more
products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously
selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
1.
2.
1.6
Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods
compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.
If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible
products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Delivery and Handling:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to
ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
Storage:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms.
Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of
installation and concealment.
Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and
equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.
PRODUCT
REQUIREMENTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
016000 - 4
1.7
PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A.
Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1.
2.
B.
Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Manufacturer's Warranty:
Preprinted written warranty published by individual
manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to
Owner.
Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract
Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide
more rights for Owner.
Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
properly executed.
Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a
written document using appropriate form properly executed.
Refer to Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific content requirements and
particular requirements for submitting special warranties.
Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A.
General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make
selection.
Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is
Architect's.
Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish "salient characteristics" of products.
Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or
equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in Part 2
"Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
PRODUCT
REQUIREMENTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
016000 - 5
B.
Product Selection Procedures:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the
named product that complies with requirements.
Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,
provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.
Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and
manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.
Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a
product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.
Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and
manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies
with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for
consideration of an unnamed product.
Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a
product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies
with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for
consideration of an unnamed product.
Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional
requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the
specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions"
Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system.
Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of
manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other
named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions,
and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in
Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the
other named manufacturers.
Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established
Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample.
Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
a.
10.
If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other
specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions"
Article for proposal of product.
Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected
from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that
complies with other specified requirements.
a.
b.
PRODUCT
REQUIREMENTS
Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of
colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern,
density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium
items.
Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors,
patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or
texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium
items.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
016000 - 6
2.2
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after the
Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion
of Architect.
B.
Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following
conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return
requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
2.3
Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner
must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect
for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and
similar considerations.
Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.
Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has
been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A.
Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will
return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the
indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
Samples, if requested.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
**END OF SECTION**
PRODUCT
REQUIREMENTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
016000 - 7
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 017300
EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the
Work including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Construction layout.
Installation of the Work.
Cutting and patching.
Coordination of Owner-installed products.
Progress cleaning.
Starting and adjusting.
Protection of installed construction.
Correction of the Work.
Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site.
Section 017329 “Cutting and Patching” for contractor’s responsibilities to repair areas
impacted by his own work.
Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project
Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and
levels, and final cleaning.
Section 024119 "Selective Structure Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected
portions of the building.
Section 078100 "Applied Fireproofing" for patching penetrations in fire-rated
construction.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of
other work. This includes the removal and storage of existing acoustical ceiling panels and grid
for re-use after above-ceiling work.
B.
Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after
installation of other work. This includes the re-installation of existing acoustical ceiling panels
EXECUTION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017300 - 1
and grid, or as required due to damage, the replacement of damaged existing panels and grid
with new identical material.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For professional engineer for those elements requiring engineering of
product.
B.
Certificates: Submit certificate signed by professional engineer for those elements requiring
engineering of product.
C.
Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time
cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching.
Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to
structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance
and other significant visual elements.
Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform
patching work.
Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.
Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting
and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be
relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time
permanent services and systems will be disrupted.
a.
1.5
Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during
interruption of permanent services and systems.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of
construction elements.
1.
Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of
locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding.
Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and
patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or
increase deflection
2.
Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components
in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in
increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements
include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
EXECUTION
Primary operational systems and equipment.
Fire separation assemblies.
Air or smoke barriers.
Fire-suppression systems.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017300 - 2
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
3.
Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or
components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in
reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or
decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not
limited to the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
4.
Mechanical systems piping and ducts.
Control systems.
Communication systems.
Fire-detection and -alarm systems.
Electrical wiring systems.
Security systems.
Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.
Membranes and flashings.
Exterior wall construction.
Sprayed fire-resistive material.
Equipment supports.
Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.
Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner
that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and
replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
B.
Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved
in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential
interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before
proceeding.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written
recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
B.
In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed
surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent
possible.
1.
2.
EXECUTION
If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,
will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of
in-place materials.
Salvage existing lobby quarry tile in amounts that may be re-incorporated into
miscellaneous patched areas. Grout re-installed tile to match existing.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017300 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate
and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical
systems, and other construction affecting the Work.
1.
2.
B.
Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the
Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where
indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance. Record observations.
1.
2.
3.
C.
3.2
Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are
to be installed.
Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
existing finishes or primers.
Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the
Work is required by other Sections, include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services,
and other utilities.
Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public
utilities serving Project site.
Description of the Work.
List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.
List of unacceptable installation tolerances.
Recommended corrections.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding
with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility and Owner that is necessary to
adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility
appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having
jurisdiction.
B.
Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
EXECUTION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017300 - 4
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
C.
Space Requirements:
Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
D.
Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control
of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in
Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."
3.3
CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A.
Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are
discovered, notify Architect promptly.
B.
General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of
construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain
required dimensions.
Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable
tolerances.
C.
Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and
electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.
D.
Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and
levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and
duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log
available for reference by Architect.
3.4
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
EXECUTION
Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.
Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in
unoccupied spaces.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017300 - 5
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C.
Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D.
Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E.
Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction
items on site and placement in permanent locations.
F.
Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
G.
Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be
factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated
requirements.
H.
Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size
and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with
other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size
and type required for load conditions.
1.
2.
3.
Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
I.
Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
J.
Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
3.5
OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS
A.
Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel.
B.
Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by
Owner's construction personnel.
1.
EXECUTION
Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule
for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually
agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences
in actual construction progress.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017300 - 6
2.
3.6
Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation
conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend
preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of
the Work depend on Owner's construction.
PROGRESS CLEANING
A.
General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas.
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1.
2.
3.
Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if
the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.
Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
a.
4.
Enforce
Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.
Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors
are working concurrently.
B.
Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C.
Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1.
2.
Remove liquid spills promptly.
Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.
D.
Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E.
Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F.
Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure
freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G.
Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials
down sewers or into waterways.
H.
During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
EXECUTION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017300 - 7
I.
Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through
the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
J.
Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise
deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.7
STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A.
Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation.
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
B.
Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation
without binding.
C.
Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service:
"Quality Requirements."
3.8
Remove
Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
**END OF SECTION**
EXECUTION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017300 - 8
SECTION 017329
CUTTING AND PATCHING
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Division 01 Section “Unit Prices” on patching existing concealed penetrations.
Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for demolition of selected portions
of the building.
Divisions 2 through 49 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to
cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.
Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for patching fire-rated construction.
Division 07 Section “Applied Fireproofing” for first floor fireproofing that is required
and second floor fireproofing installed under prior contract.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of
other Work.
B.
Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after
installation of other Work.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before
the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the
following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate
why they cannot be avoided.
Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to
structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance
and other significant visual elements.
Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work.
Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.
CUTTING AND
PATCHING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017329 - 1
5.
6.
7.
1.5
Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting
and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be
relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long
services/systems will be disrupted.
Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to
structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of
reinforcement with original structure.
Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting
and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of
unsatisfactory work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change
their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.
B.
Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a
manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased
maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operating elements include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
Primary operational systems and equipment.
Air or smoke barriers.
Fire-suppression systems.
Mechanical systems piping and ducts.
Control systems.
Communication systems.
Conveying systems.
Electrical wiring systems.
Operating systems of special construction in Division 13 Sections.
Miscellaneous Elements:
in a manner that could
capacity to perform as
operational life or safety.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components
change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their
intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased
Miscellaneous elements include the following:
Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.
Membranes and flashings.
Exterior curtain-wall construction.
Equipment supports.
Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.
Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.
D.
Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or
in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's
aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually
unsatisfactory manner.
E.
Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved
in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential
CUTTING AND
PATCHING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017329 - 2
interference and conflict.
proceeding.
1.6
Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before
WARRANTY
A.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing
warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
B.
In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use
materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
1.
If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,
will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to
be performed.
1.
2.
3.2
Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates,
including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.
Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
B.
Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
C.
Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage
to adjoining areas.
CUTTING AND
PATCHING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017329 - 3
D.
3.3
Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems
are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before
cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.
PERFORMANCE
A.
General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and
patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1.
B.
Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.
In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size
required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover
openings when not in use.
Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a
diamond-core drill.
Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31
Sections where required by cutting and patching operations.
Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections.
1.
2.
Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate integrity of installation.
Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence
of patching and refinishing.
a.
b.
3.
Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing
materials.
Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall
CUTTING AND
PATCHING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017329 - 4
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
a.
4.
5.
6.
Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane
surface of uniform appearance.
Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition.
Fireproofing:
a.
b.
D.
Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint
coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface
containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent
surfaces.
Patch attachment points for utilities by hand trowelling or spray-applying
cementitious fireproofing material to thickness consistent with the existing
fireproofing and to meet and maintain the same hourly rating required for the
building assemblies (typically 2-hour unrestrained rating for existing
beams/columns/floor deck). This is typical at areas that have existing sprayfireproofing.
In first floor areas where existing fireproofing is to have additional sprayfireproofing applied, each prime contractor shall provide his own patching prior to
installation of the additional fireproofing on the first floor work area.
Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely
remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.
**END OF SECTION**
CUTTING AND
PATCHING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017329 - 5
SECTION 017700
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Inspection procedures.
Warranties.
Final cleaning.
Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for
Payment for Substantial and Final Completion.
Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting Final Completion
construction photographs and negatives.
Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site.
Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings,
Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.
Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements
for the Work in those Sections.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial
Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.
1.
2.
3.
4.
CLOSEOUT
PROCEDURES
Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on
the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017700 - 1
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
B.
Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of
request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled
requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection
or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by
Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1.
2.
1.4
Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals,
Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property
surveys, and similar final record information.
Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by
Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
Complete startup testing of systems.
Submit test/adjust/balance records.
Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final
Completion.
FINAL COMPLETION
A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final
Completion, complete the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment
Procedures."
Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be
completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy
of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for
acceptance.
Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.
Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training videotapes.
Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,
Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.
Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor
of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
CLOSEOUT
PROCEDURES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017700 - 2
1.
1.5
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected. Contractor will bear the cost of reinspection based
on hourly rate for Architect/Engineer to visit site and prepare report.
LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A.
Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area
affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction
including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1.
2.
3.
Organize list of spaces in sequential order, proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.
Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
Include the following information at the top of each page:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
1.6
Project name.
Date.
Name of Architect.
Name of Contractor.
Page number.
WARRANTIES
A.
Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of
the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated.
B.
Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of
designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during
construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.
C.
Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch
paper.
Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.
Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
CLOSEOUT
PROCEDURES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017700 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FINAL CLEANING
A.
General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
B.
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
CLOSEOUT
PROCEDURES
Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
foreign substances.
Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured
surface.
Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;
shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish
mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
Remove labels that are not permanent.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017700 - 4
l.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or
that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
1)
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
C.
Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and
electrical nameplates.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and
similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and
other foreign substances.
Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during
construction.
Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and
defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply
with requirements for new fixtures.
Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or
excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous
materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of
lawfully.
**END OF SECTION**
CLOSEOUT
PROCEDURES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017700 - 5
SECTION 017823
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Operation and maintenance documentation directory.
Emergency manuals.
Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes
and systems and equipment.
Division 01 Section "Multiple Contract Summary" for coordinating operation and
maintenance manuals covering the Work of multiple contracts.
Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for
operation and maintenance manuals.
Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance
manuals.
Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for
operation and maintenance manuals.
Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual
requirements for the Work in those Sections.
DEFINITIONS
A.
System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular
interaction.
B.
Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Initial Submittal: Submit 2 draft copies of each manual at least 15 days before requesting
inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete operation and maintenance
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017823 - 1
directory. Architect will return one copy of draft and mark whether general scope and content
of manual are acceptable.
B.
Final Submittal: Submit one copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final
inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection.
1.
1.5
Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 3 copies of
each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments.
COORDINATION
A.
Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more
than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information
furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY
A.
Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
List of documents.
List of systems.
List of equipment.
Table of contents.
B.
List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation
and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.
C.
List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For
pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.
D.
Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance
manual.
E.
Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual,
identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the
Contract Documents.
If no designation exists, assign a designation according to
ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building
Systems."
2.2
MANUALS, GENERAL
A.
Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each
system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system.
Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:
1.
Title page.
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017823 - 2
2.
3.
B.
Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Subject matter included in manual.
Name and address of Project.
Name and address of Owner.
Date of submittal.
Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor.
Name and address of Architect.
Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed
to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project
Manual.
1.
D.
Table of contents.
Manual contents.
If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to
accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each
volume of the set.
Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by
system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,
equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.
1.
Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to
accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on
spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded
oversize sheets.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize
data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Crossreference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper
operation or maintenance of equipment or system.
Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of
contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.
Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each
tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of
equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification
Section number and title of Project Manual.
Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic
software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.
Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper.
Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
a.
b.
If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and
use as foldouts.
If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled
envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017823 - 3
manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents,
and drawing locations.
2.3
EMERGENCY MANUALS
A.
Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Type of emergency.
Emergency instructions.
Emergency procedures.
Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include
instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Fire.
Flood.
Gas leak.
Water leak.
Power failure.
Water outage.
System, subsystem, or equipment failure.
Chemical release or spill.
C.
Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages,
and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for
notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.
D.
Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.4
Instructions on stopping.
Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.
Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
Special operating instructions and procedures.
OPERATION MANUALS
A.
Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in
individual Specification Sections and the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.
Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
Operating standards.
Operating procedures.
Operating logs.
Wiring diagrams.
Control diagrams.
Piped system diagrams.
Precautions against improper use.
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017823 - 4
10.
B.
Descriptions: Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
Product name and model number.
Manufacturer's name.
Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
Equipment function.
Operating characteristics.
Limiting conditions.
Performance curves.
Engineering data and tests.
Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Startup procedures.
Equipment or system break-in procedures.
Routine and normal operating instructions.
Regulation and control procedures.
Instructions on stopping.
Normal shutdown instructions.
Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
Special operating instructions and procedures.
D.
Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as
installed.
E.
Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for
identification.
2.5
PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A.
Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.
Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and
sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
B.
Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and
arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and
telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference
Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C.
Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Product name and model number.
Manufacturer's name.
Color, pattern, and texture.
Material and chemical composition.
Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017823 - 5
D.
Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Inspection procedures.
Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
Repair instructions.
E.
Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and
related services.
F.
Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1.
2.6
Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A.
Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include
source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,
maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service
contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.
B.
Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,
identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product,
list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent,
and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C.
Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation
including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential
maintenance procedures:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins.
Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly
and component removal, replacement, and assembly.
Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
Test and inspection instructions.
Troubleshooting guide.
Precautions against improper maintenance.
Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.
Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
Demonstration and training videotape, if available.
Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of
required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017823 - 6
1.
2.
Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly,
quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.
Maintenance and Service Record:
Include manufacturers' forms for recording
maintenance.
F.
Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with
parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local
sources of maintenance materials and related services.
G.
Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and
telephone number of service agent.
H.
Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1.
Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
MANUAL PREPARATION
A.
Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides
an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
B.
Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures
for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies
indicated.
C.
Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care
and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance
data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
not part of a system.
1.
2.
E.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information
for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional
manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.
Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include
only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each
product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a
tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents.
Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
1.
Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and
where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or
systems.
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017823 - 7
F.
Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the
relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and
flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to
ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1.
2.
G.
Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance
manuals.
Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 01 Section
"Project Record Documents."
Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation
and maintenance documentation.
**END OF SECTION**
OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE DATA
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017823 - 8
SECTION 017839
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record
Documents, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Record Drawings.
Record Specifications.
Record Product Data.
Division 01 Section "Multiple Contract Summary" for coordinating Project Record
Documents covering the Work of multiple contracts.
Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.
Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record
Documents of the Work in those Sections.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1.
Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up Record Prints.
B.
Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and
contract modifications.
C.
Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal.
PROJECT RECORD
DOCUMENTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017839 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings
and Shop Drawings.
1.
Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the
marked-up Record Prints.
a.
b.
c.
2.
Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be
difficult to identify or measure and record later.
Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.
Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup
before enclosing concealed installations.
Dimensional changes to Drawings.
Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
Depths of foundations below first floor.
Locations and depths of underground utilities.
Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
Revisions to electrical circuitry.
Actual equipment locations.
Duct size and routing.
Locations of concealed internal utilities.
Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.
Changes made following Architect's written orders.
Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing
actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked,
show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.
Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
from original Drawings.
Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location.
PROJECT RECORD
DOCUMENTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017839 - 2
1.
2.
Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into
manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification
on cover sheets.
Identification: As follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.2
Project name.
Date.
Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
Name of Architect.
Name of Contractor.
RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A.
Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to
provide a record of selections made.
For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in
operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data.
Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where
applicable.
RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A.
Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
1.
2.
3.
2.4
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where
applicable.
MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A.
Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous
record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
PROJECT RECORD
DOCUMENTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017839 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A.
Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project
Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as
they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.
B.
Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the
field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project
Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and
in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to
Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
**END OF SECTION**
PROJECT RECORD
DOCUMENTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017839 - 4
SECTION 017900
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's
personnel, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
C.
1.3
Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
Demonstration and training videotapes.
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for requirements for
preinstruction conferences.
Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for demonstration and
training for products in those Sections.
Unit Price for Instruction Time: Length of instruction time will be measured by actual time
spent performing demonstration and training in required location. No payment will be made for
time spent assembling educational materials, setting up, or cleaning up.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Instruction Program: Submit two copies of outline of instructional program for demonstration
and training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and
instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each
training module.
1.
At completion of training, submit one complete training manual(s) for Owner's use.
B.
Qualification Data: For facilitator and instructor.
C.
Attendance Record:
instruction time.
D.
Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and
documentation of performance-based test.
DEMONSTRATION
AND TRAINING
For each training module, submit list of participants and length of
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017900 - 1
E.
Demonstration and Training Videotapes: Submit two copies within seven days of end of each
training module.
1.
Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
1.4
Name of Project.
Name and address of photographer.
Name of Architect.
Name of Contractor.
Date videotape was recorded.
Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and
elevation or story of construction.
Transcript: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper, punched and bound in heavy-duty, 3ring, vinyl-covered binders. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each
binder. Include a cover sheet with same label information as the corresponding
videotape. Include name of Project and date of videotape on each page.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating
maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for
this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful
learning performance.
B.
Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with
requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and
maintenance procedures and training.
C.
Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures
related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.5
Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction.
Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials,
instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays.
Review required content of instruction.
For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions
and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations.
minimize disrupting Owner's operations.
B.
Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction
time, and course content.
DEMONSTRATION
AND TRAINING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
Adjust schedule as required to
017900 - 2
C.
Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data
has been reviewed and approved by Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INSTRUCTION PROGRAM
A.
Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules
for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification
Sections, and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
B.
Motorized doors, including overhead coiling doors, overhead coiling grilles, and
automatic entrance doors.
Equipment, including projection screens.
Fire-protection systems, including fire alarm, fire pumps, and fire-extinguishing systems.
Intrusion detection systems.
Conveying systems, including elevators.
Heat generation, including boilers, feedwater equipment, pumps, and water distribution
piping.
Refrigeration systems, including chillers, cooling towers, condensers, pumps, and
distribution piping.
HVAC systems, including air-handling equipment, air distribution systems, and terminal
equipment and devices.
HVAC instrumentation and controls.
Electrical service and distribution, including transformers, switchboards, panelboards,
uninterruptible power supplies, and motor controls.
Packaged engine generators, including transfer switches.
Lighting equipment and controls.
Communication systems, including intercommunication, surveillance, clocks and
programming, voice and data, and television equipment.
Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include
a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each
module, include instruction for the following:
1.
Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
DEMONSTRATION
AND TRAINING
System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.
Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
Operating standards.
Regulatory requirements.
Equipment function.
Operating characteristics.
Limiting conditions.
Performance curves.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017900 - 3
2.
Documentation: Review the following items in detail:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3.
Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
4.
Alignments.
Checking adjustments.
Noise and vibration adjustments.
Economy and efficiency adjustments.
Troubleshooting: Include the following:
a.
b.
7.
Startup procedures.
Equipment or system break-in procedures.
Routine and normal operating instructions.
Regulation and control procedures.
Control sequences.
Safety procedures.
Instructions on stopping.
Normal shutdown instructions.
Operating procedures for emergencies.
Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.
Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
Special operating instructions and procedures.
Adjustments: Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.
Instructions on stopping.
Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.
Sequences for electric or electronic systems.
Special operating instructions and procedures.
Operations: Include the following, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
5.
Emergency manuals.
Operations manuals.
Maintenance manuals.
Project Record Documents.
Identification systems.
Warranties and bonds.
Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.
Diagnostic instructions.
Test and inspection procedures.
Maintenance: Include the following:
a.
b.
DEMONSTRATION
AND TRAINING
Inspection procedures.
Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017900 - 4
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
8.
List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
Procedures for routine cleaning
Procedures for preventive maintenance.
Procedures for routine maintenance.
Instruction on use of special tools.
Repairs: Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Diagnosis instructions.
Repair instructions.
Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly
instructions.
Instructions for identifying parts and components.
Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training
module. Assemble training modules into a combined training manual.
B.
Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.
3.2
INSTRUCTION
A.
Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules,
to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of
participants, instruction times, and location.
B.
Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain
systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires
seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.
1.
D.
Architect will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational
requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements.
Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy.
Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.
Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.
Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and remove from Project site.
Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before
initial training use.
DEMONSTRATION
AND TRAINING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017900 - 5
3.3
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEOTAPES
A.
General: Engage a qualified commercial photographer to record demonstration and training
videotapes. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and
demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice.
1.
At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective
and lesson outline.
B.
Videotape Format: Provide high-quality VHS color videotape in full-size cassettes.
C.
Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to
show area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time.
D.
Narration: Describe scenes on videotape by audio narration by microphone while videotape is
recorded. Include description of items being viewed. Describe vantage point, indicating
location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction.
E.
Transcript: Provide a typewritten transcript of the narration. Display images and running time
captured from videotape opposite the corresponding narration segment.
**END OF SECTION**
DEMONSTRATION
AND TRAINING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
017900 - 6
SECTION 024119
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
Division 01 Section "Summary" for use of premises, and phasing, and Owner-occupancy
requirements.
Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation" for preconstruction photographs
taken before selective demolition operations.
Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction and
environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations.
Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B.
Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner.
C.
Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and
reinstall them where indicated.
D.
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
1.4
MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A.
Historic items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their
contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to
Owner that may be encountered during selective demolition remain Owner's property.
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE
DEMOLITION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
024119 - 1
Carefully remove and salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver
promptly to Owner.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For professional engineer and refrigerant recovery technician.
B.
Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending
dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's building manager's and other tenants' on-site
operations are uninterrupted.
Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.
Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
Use of elevator and stairs.
Locations of proposed dust- and noise-control temporary partitions and means of
egress, including for other tenants affected by selective demolition operations.
Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of
Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.
Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste removal from
building.
C.
Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed
and salvaged.
D.
Predemolition Photographs: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site
improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by
selective demolition operations.
Comply with Division 01 Section "Photographic
Documentation." Submit before Work begins.
E.
Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility
licensed to accept hazardous wastes.
1.
1.6
Comply with submittal requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste
Management and Disposal."
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work
similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.
B.
Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification
program.
C.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
D.
Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE
DEMOLITION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
024119 - 2
E.
Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures
related to selective demolition including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.7
Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.
Review structural load limitations of existing structure.
Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,
demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed
by selective demolition operations.
Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
1.
Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."
B.
Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as
far as practical.
C.
Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding
with selective demolition.
D.
Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work, except as noted below:
1.
2.
3.
Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.
If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;
immediately notify Architect, Engineer and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous
materials under a separate contract.
Existing main trunk ductwork has joint/seam mastic sealer containing asbestos;
mechanical contractor is to avoid installation at existing seams that would give cause to
remove any portion of ductwork to accommodate new ductwork. On the occurrence of
any ductwork abatement by Owner, schedule and cost will remain unchanged, and delay
claims will not be accepted.
E.
Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
F.
Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.
1.
Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE
DEMOLITION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
024119 - 3
1.8
WARRANTY
A.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
B.
Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
C.
Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be
removed and salvaged.
D.
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
E.
Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing
any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of
structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations.
F.
Survey of Existing Conditions:
photographs.
1.
2.
G.
3.2
Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction
Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Photographic
Documentation."
Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be
reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements,
materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction.
Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition
activities.
UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A.
Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.
1.
Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in
Division 01 Section "Summary."
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE
DEMOLITION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
024119 - 4
B.
Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility
services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor.
Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before
proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass
area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other
parts of building.
Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal
remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
a.
3.3
Where entire wall is to be removed, existing services/systems may be removed
with removal of the wall.
PREPARATION
A.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1.
B.
Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 01 Section
"Temporary Facilities and Controls."
Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and
to and from occupied portions of building.
Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of
existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage
and damage to structure and interior areas.
Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are
exposed during selective demolition operations.
Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.
Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling
specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls."
Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required
to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes
to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction
being demolished.
1.
Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE
DEMOLITION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
024119 - 5
3.4
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A.
General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Removed and Salvaged Items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Clean salvaged items.
Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
Transport items to Owner's storage area on-site.
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete
selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting
members on the next lower level.
Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
remain.
Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden
space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable firesuppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and
promptly dispose of off-site.
Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid
free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint
equipment to match new equipment.
Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their
original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE
DEMOLITION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
024119 - 6
3.5
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS
A.
Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch at junctures
with construction to remain, using power-driven saw. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at
perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete
indicated for selective demolition. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated.
B.
Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to
remain and at regular intervals, using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw
cuts.
C.
Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain,
using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.
D.
Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and
remove.
E.
Resilient Floor Coverings:
Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to
recommendations in RFCI-WP and its Addendum. Where carpet is removed for new ceramic
tile (Corridor) remove mastic by preparation consistent with subsequent tile installation.
1.
2.
3.
Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the
methods recommended by RFCI.
Carpet tile manufacturer requires removal of 75% of existing adhesives, which can be
achieved without shot blast and with power operated scrapers.
Tests for adhesive compatibility are the Contractor’s responsibility as is the use of any
required primers, at no additional cost or increase in schedule duration to the Owner.
F.
Roofing: None required.
G.
Air-Conditioning Equipment: Remove equipment without releasing refrigerants.
H.
Windows: None required.
I.
Ceramic Tile (at existing first floor Corridor): Remove tile and this set mortar on concrete
floors by power chisel or in entire other method tile widths in amounts and areas sufficient for
the installation of tile that will be butted and match in width and thickness.
3.6
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A.
General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or
otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site
and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that
will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE
DEMOLITION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
024119 - 7
C.
3.7
Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
CLEANING
A.
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition
operations began.
**END OF SECTION**
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE
DEMOLITION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
024119 - 8
SECTION 035416
HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes hydraulic-cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling underlayment for
application below interior floor coverings.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans indicating substrates, locations, and average depths of
underlayment based on survey of substrate conditions.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of underlayment and floor-covering systems
certifying that products are compatible.
C.
Minutes of preinstallation conference.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of
underlayment products required for this Project.
B.
Product Compatibility: Manufacturers of underlayment and floor-covering systems certify in
writing that products are compatible.
C.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide hydraulic-cement underlayment systems
identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing
agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of
another qualified testing agency.
HYDRAULIC CEMENT
UNDERLAYMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
035416 - 1
D.
Sound Transmission Characteristics: Where indicated, provide hydraulic-cement underlayment
systems identical to those of assemblies tested for STC and IIC ratings per ASTM E 90 and
ASTM E 492 by a qualified testing agency.
E.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.7
Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration from
moisture or other detrimental effects.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate
temperature, ventilation, ambient temperature and humidity, and other conditions affecting
underlayment performance.
1.
1.8
Place hydraulic-cement-based underlayments only when ambient temperature and
temperature of substrates are between 50 and 80 deg F.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate application of underlayment with requirements of floor-covering products and
adhesives, to ensure compatibility of products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
HYDRAULIC-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENTS
A.
Underlayment: Hydraulic-cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be
applied in minimum uniform thickness of 1/4 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match
adjacent floor elevations.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work which meets the UL design designation to include, but not
limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Ardex; K-15 Self-Leveling Underlayment Concrete.
Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company; ProSpec Level Set 200.
Dayton Superior Corporation; EconoLevel.
Euclid Chemical Company (The); Super Flo-Top.
L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Levelex.
MAPEI Corporation; Novoplan Easy.
Maxxon Corporation; Level-Right.
USG Corporation; Levelrock SLC 400.
HYDRAULIC CEMENT
UNDERLAYMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
035416 - 2
2.
3.
4.
B.
Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement, or hydraulic or blended hydraulic
cement as defined by ASTM C 219.
Compressive Strength: Not less than 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days when tested
according to ASTM C 109.
Underlayment Additive: Resilient-emulsion product of underlayment manufacturer,
formulated for use with underlayment when applied to substrate and conditions indicated.
Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch; or coarse sand as recommended by
underlayment manufacturer.
1.
Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for
underlayment thickness required.
C.
Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F.
D.
Reinforcement: For underlayment applied to wood substrates, provide galvanized metal lath or
other corrosion-resistant reinforcement recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer.
E.
Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate,
conditions, and application indicated.
1.
F.
Primer shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D.
Corrosion-Resistant Coating:
metal substrates.
1.
Recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for
Coating shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance.
1.
3.2
Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
B.
Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions to
prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment.
Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking.
Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer's written instructions,
laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and
other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond.
HYDRAULIC CEMENT
UNDERLAYMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
035416 - 3
1.
Moisture Testing: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed
with installation only after substrates do not exceed a maximum moisture-vapor-emission
rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.
2.
Install underlayment reinforcement recommended in writing by manufacturer.
C.
Metal Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer's written instructions, rust,
foreign matter, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond. Apply corrosionresistant coating compatible with underlayment if recommended in writing by underlayment
manufacturer.
D.
Nonporous Substrates: For ceramic tile, quarry tile, and terrazzo substrates, remove waxes,
sealants, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond, and prepare surfaces
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3
APPLICATION
A.
General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
1.
2.
3.
Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after
application recommended in writing by manufacturer.
Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to-substrate and
intercoat adhesion.
At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to
continue through underlayment.
B.
Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.
C.
Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface.
1.
2.
Apply a final layer without aggregate to product surface.
Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
D.
Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination
during application and curing processes.
E.
Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in
writing by underlayment manufacturer.
F.
Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including
areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.
3.4
PROTECTION
A.
Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction period.
**END OF SECTION**
HYDRAULIC CEMENT
UNDERLAYMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
035416 - 4
SECTION 055000
METAL FABRICATIONS
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Steel framing and supports for countertops.
Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified
in other Sections.
Interior aluminum window sills.
Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for metal framing anchors.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
B.
Paint products.
Grout.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.
1.
2.
3.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.
For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis
data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard
sizes.
D.
Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of assemblies, made from 12inch lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:
1.
Joinery, including concealed welds.
METAL FABRICATIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
055000 - 1
2.
3.
4.
Anchorage.
Expansion provisions.
Flashing and drainage.
E.
Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel sheet certifying that products
furnished comply with requirements.
F.
Welding certificates.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1.
2.
3.
1.5
AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."
AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
Build mockup of typical wall and sill as shown on Drawings.
Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
1.
2.
1.6
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without
field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that
actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
B.
Coordinate installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that are specified
in this Section but required for work of another Section. Deliver such items to Project site in
time for installation.
METAL FABRICATIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
055000 - 2
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
Special Finish Warranty at Sills: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes
or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within
specified warranty period.
1.
Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1.
2.
2.2
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
METALS, GENERAL
A.
2.3
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise
indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
FERROUS METALS
A.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.
B.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.
C.
Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal channels with continuous slot complying with
MFMA-3.
1.
2.
Size of Channels: As indicated.
Material: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653, structural steel, Grade 33
(Grade 230), with G90 (Z275) coating; 0.108-inch nominal thickness.
METAL FABRICATIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
055000 - 3
2.4
NONFERROUS METALS
A.
Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6.
B.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6.
C.
Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26, Alloy 443.0-F.
2.5
FASTENERS
A.
General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use
and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior
walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade,
and class required.
B.
Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M,
Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.
C.
Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts and,
where indicated, flat washers; ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M) for bolts and ASTM F 594
(ASTM F 836M) for nuts, Alloy Group 1 (A1).
D.
Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.
1.
Provide hot-dip or mechanically deposited, zinc-coated anchor bolts where item being
fastened is indicated to be galvanized.
E.
Eyebolts: ASTM A 489.
F.
Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 (ASME B18.6.7M).
G.
Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).
H.
Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1.
I.
Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1 (ASME B18.22M).
J.
Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1 (ASME B18.21.2M).
K.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times
the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to
ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
1.
2.
Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to
comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.
Material for Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 1 (A1) stainless-steel bolts
complying with ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M) and nuts complying with ASTM F 594
(ASTM F 836M).
METAL FABRICATIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
055000 - 4
2.6
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
B.
Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer
complying with MPI#79.
1.
2.
C.
Use primer with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 lb/gal.) or less when calculated according
to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.
Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with
topcoat.
1.
2.
Use primer with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 lb/gal.) or less when calculated according
to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Benjamin Moore & Co.; Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer CM18/19.
Carboline Company; Carbozinc 621.
ICI Devoe Coatings; Catha-Coat 313.
International Coatings Limited; Interzinc 315 Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer.
PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670.
Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Corothane I GalvaPac Zinc Primer.
Tnemec Company, Inc.; Tneme-Zinc 90-97.
D.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,
complying with SSPC-Paint 20.
E.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
F.
Nonshrink, Metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, ferrous-aggregate grout complying with
ASTM C 1107, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy-duty loading applications.
G.
Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-inPlace Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day
compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa), unless otherwise indicated.
2.7
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units
only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain
structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated
installation.
B.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces.
METAL FABRICATIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
055000 - 5
C.
Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
D.
Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
E.
Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
F.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk)
screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
G.
Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude
water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
H.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,
and similar items.
I.
Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring
devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.
1.
2.8
Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with
integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch
embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24
inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A.
General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to
complete the Work.
B.
Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise
indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent
construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware,
hangers, and similar items.
1.
2.
C.
Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.
Furnish inserts if units are installed after concrete is placed.
Fabricate supports for operable partitions from continuous steel beams of sizes indicated with
attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as indicated. Drill bottom flanges of beams to
receive partition track hanger rods; locate holes where indicated on operable partition Shop
Drawings.
METAL FABRICATIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
055000 - 6
D.
Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.
E.
Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated.
2.9
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.10
A.
STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed
below:
1.
2.
B.
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and
environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:
1.
2.
C.
A.
Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B) and Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPCSP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with
galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry,
unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1:
Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
1.
2.11
ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
ASTM A 153, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
ALUMINUM FINISHES - SILLS
High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with
AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat
and clear topcoat. Prepare, pre-treat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply
with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
1.
Color and Gloss: Sterling Gray Permadize Coating 7896018 to match existing sill that
remain through building on floors 3 through 7.
METAL FABRICATIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
055000 - 7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with
edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and
levels.
B.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
D.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal
fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for
use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and
other connectors.
E.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
F.
Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with
grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Do not install damaged components.
Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
Rigidly secure non-movement joints.
Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
METAL FABRICATIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
055000 - 8
B.
Metal Protection:
1.
2.
C.
3.3
Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing
nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting
contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1.
B.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
**END OF SECTION**
METAL FABRICATIONS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
055000 - 9
SECTION 061053
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.
Wood furring and grounds.
Interior wood trim.
Wood shelving and clothes rods.
Plywood backing panels.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in
least dimension.
B.
Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.4
NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association.
NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association.
NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1.
2.
Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include
physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent
testing agency.
MISCELLANEOUS
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
061053 - 1
3.
4.
5.
B.
Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in
effect for Project:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.5
For fire-retardant treatments specified to be High-Temperature (HT) type include
physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated
temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to
ASTM D 5664.
For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of
treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.
Preservative-treated wood.
Fire-retardant-treated wood.
Power-driven fasteners.
Powder-actuated fasteners.
Expansion anchors.
Metal framing anchors.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air
circulation around stacks and under coverings.
B.
Deliver interior wood materials that are to be exposed to view only after building is enclosed
and weatherproof, wet work other than painting is dry, and HVAC system is operating and
maintaining temperature and humidity at occupancy levels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency
is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on
end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade
compliance issued by grading agency.
Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed
sizes for dry lumber.
Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
MISCELLANEOUS
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
061053 - 2
2.2
WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2.
1.
Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium.
B.
Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C.
Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board
of Review.
1.
D.
Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of
each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by
inspection agency.
Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, and similar concealed members in contact with
masonry or concrete.
Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior
masonry or concrete walls.
Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawl spaces or
unexcavated areas.
Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27
(plywood).
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
C.
Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.
Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated.
Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for enclosed roof framing, framing in attic
spaces, and where indicated.
Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated.
For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of
each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by
inspection agency.
For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations
that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.
MISCELLANEOUS
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
061053 - 3
D.
2.4
Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry, unless otherwise indicated.
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A.
General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
construction, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Blocking.
Nailers.
Cants.
Furring.
Grounds.
Utility shelving.
B.
For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with 15
percent maximum moisture content of any species.
C.
For exposed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and the
following species and grades:
1.
D.
Eastern white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; Premium or
2 Common (Sterling) grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any
of the following species and grades:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB.
Hem-fir or hem-fir (north), Construction or 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or
WWPA.
Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir, Construction or 2 Common grade; NeLMA,
NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA.
Northern species, No. 2 Common grade; NLGA.
E.
For blocking not used for attachment of other construction Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber
of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will
interfere with its attachment and purpose.
F.
For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to
eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
G.
For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots
capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
2.5
INTERIOR WOOD TRIM
A.
General: Provide kiln-dried finished (surfaced) material without finger-jointing.
B.
Hardwood Lumber Trim for Transparent (Stain or Clear) Finish: Clear white maple.
MISCELLANEOUS
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
061053 - 4
C.
Hardwood Lumber for Transparent (Stain or Clear) Finish: Grade A Finish soft maple; NHLA.
D.
Lumber Trim for Opaque (Painted) Finish:
following species and grades:
1.
E.
Grade A Finish aspen, basswood, cottonwood, gum, magnolia, red alder, soft maple,
sycamore, tupelo, or yellow poplar; NHLA.
Moldings:
Made to patterns included in WMMPA WM 7 and graded according to
WMMPA WM 4.
1.
2.
2.6
Either finger-jointed or solid lumber, of the
Moldings for Transparent (Stain or Clear) Finish: N-grade white maple, selected for
compatible grain and color.
Moldings for Opaque (Painted) Finish: P-grade soft maple.
SHELVING AND CLOTHES RODS
A.
Shelving: Made from the following material, 3/4-inch thick.
1.
Wood boards of same species and grade indicated above for interior lumber trim for
opaque and transparent finish.
B.
Shelf Cleats: 3/4-by-5-1/2-inch boards with hole and notch to receive clothes rods, of same
species and grade indicated above for interior lumber trim for opaque finish.
C.
Shelf Brackets: Prime-painted formed steel with provision to support clothes rod where rod is
indicated.
D.
Clothes Rods: 1-1/2-inch-diameter, clear, kiln-dried hardwood rods.
E.
Rod Flanges: Clear, kiln-dried hardwood turnings.
2.7
PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A.
2.8
Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels:
DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D
Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch
nominal thickness.
FASTENERS
A.
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this Article for material and manufacture.
1.
Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated,
or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel.
B.
Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C.
Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
MISCELLANEOUS
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
061053 - 5
D.
Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E.
Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads
and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.
F.
Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).
G.
Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6);
with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
H.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in
unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and
inspecting agency.
1.
2.
2.9
Material:
Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and
ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade A1 or
A4).
METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G60
(Z180) coating designation.
1.
C.
A.
Use for interior locations where stainless steel is not indicated.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
1.
2.10
Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.
Harlen Metal Products, Inc.
KC Metals Products, Inc.
Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.
Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc.
USP Structural Connectors.
Use for exterior locations and where indicated.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
Adhesives for Gluing Furring to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with
ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.
1.
Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
MISCELLANEOUS
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
061053 - 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit
carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring,
nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other
construction.
B.
Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Metal Framing Anchors:
instructions.
D.
Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
1.
F.
Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written
Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where
framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips
not more than 16 inches o.c.
Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and
as follows:
1.
2.
Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96
inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to
close furred spaces.
Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at
ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not
inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width
as framing members and 2-inch nominal-thickness.
G.
Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with
fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with
function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or
optimum joint arrangement.
H.
Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber.
1.
2.
I.
Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.
Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.
Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying
with the following:
1.
NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
MISCELLANEOUS
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
061053 - 7
2.
J.
3.2
Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not
countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated.
WOOD GROUND, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A.
Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated
and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other
work involved.
B.
Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces,
unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not
less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness
of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
3.3
WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION
A.
Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required
for tolerance of finish work.
B.
Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal-size furring
horizontally and vertically at 24 inches o.c.
C.
Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal-size furring vertically at 16
inches o.c.
3.4
WOOD TRIM INSTALLATION
A.
Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum
lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long except where necessary.
Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and miter at
corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use
scarf joints for end-to-end joints.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Match color and grain pattern across joints.
Install trim after gypsum board joint-finishing operations are completed.
Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent
movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads and fill holes.
Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining finish
carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum
offset for reveal installation.
MISCELLANEOUS
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
061053 - 8
3.5
PROTECTION
A.
Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite
protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.
Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
**END OF SECTION**
MISCELLANEOUS
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
061053 - 9
SECTION 064023
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Interior standing and running trim.
Plastic-laminate cabinets.
Plastic-laminate countertops.
Closet and utility shelving.
Shop finishing of interior woodwork.
Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims,
and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other
construction before woodwork installation.
Division 06 Section "Wood Paneling."
DEFINITIONS
A.
Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for
installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork
installation.
B.
Rough carriages for stairs are a part of interior architectural woodwork. Platform framing,
headers, partition framing, and other rough framing associated with stairwork are specified in
Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry."
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For panel products, high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding
plastic laminate, solid-surfacing material, fire-retardant-treated materials, cabinet hardware and
accessories, handrail brackets and finishing materials and processes.
1.
Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL
WOODWORK
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
064023 - 1
B.
Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Show details full size.
Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed
blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.
Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other
items installed in architectural woodwork.
Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification
numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf.
Apply WI-certified compliance label to first page of Shop Drawings.
Shop-applied transparent finishes.
Plastic laminates.
PVC edge material.
Thermoset decorative panels.
Samples for Verification:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Lumber with or for transparent finish, not less than 50 sq. in., for each species and cut,
finished on 1 side and 1 edge.
Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparentfinished woodwork.
Veneer-faced panel products with or for transparent finish, 8 by 10 inches, for each
species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish as specified.
Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, 50 sq. in. for lumber and 8
by 10 inches for panels, for each finish system and color, with 1/2 of exposed surface
finished.
Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with 1
sample applied to core material and specified edge material applied to 1 edge.
Thermoset decorative-panels, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface
finish, with edge banding on 1 edge.
Corner pieces as follows:
a.
b.
8.
Cabinet-front frame joints between stiles and rails, as well as exposed end pieces,
18 inches high by 18 inches wide by 6 inches deep.
Miter joints for standing trim.
Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish.
E.
Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.
F.
Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program
certificates.
G.
Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL
WOODWORK
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
064023 - 2
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products
similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products and Certified participant in AWI's Quality
Certification Program.
C.
Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility
for production of interior architectural woodwork with sequence-matched wood veneers and
wood doors with face veneers that are sequence matched with woodwork and transparentfinished wood doors that are required to be of same species as woodwork.
D.
Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction,
finishes, installation, and other requirements.
1.
Provide AWI Quality Certification Program labels and certificates indicating that
woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.
E.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-retardant materials or products are indicated,
provide materials and products with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined by
testing identical products per test method indicated by UL, ITS, or another testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify with appropriate
markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper label or,
where required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that will be
concealed from view after installation.
F.
Forest Certification: Provide interior architectural woodwork produced from wood obtained
from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC 1.2,
"Principles and Criteria."
G.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
H.
1.6
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork
have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation
areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified
in "Project Conditions" Article.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL
WOODWORK
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
064023 - 3
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and
90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the
construction period.
B.
Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress
to avoid delaying the Work.
1.
2.
1.8
Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field
measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field
measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to
ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be
supported and installed as indicated.
B.
Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in
Division 08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)" to fabricator of
architectural woodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware
requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WOODWORK FABRICATORS
A.
2.2
Available Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, fabricators offering interior
architectural woodwork that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each
type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: White maple, plain sliced.
C.
Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed-grain hardwood.
D.
Wood Products: Comply with the following:
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL
WOODWORK
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
064023 - 4
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as
required by woodwork quality standard.
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering high-pressure decorative laminates that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.3
Abet Laminati, Inc.
Arborite; Division of ITW Canada, Inc.
Formica Corporation.
Lamin-Art, Inc.
Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div.
Panolam Industries International Incorporated.
Westinghouse Electric Corp.; Specialty Products Div.
Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with
requirements in this Article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with firetest-response characteristics specified.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Do not use treated materials that do not comply with requirements of referenced
woodworking standard or that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective.
Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise
adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from
untreated materials.
Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of UL,
U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with performance
requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Use the following treatment
type:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Exterior Type: Organic-resin-based formulation thermally set in wood by kiln drying.
Interior Type A: Low-hygroscopic formulation.
Mill lumber after treatment within limits set for wood removal that do not affect listed
fire-test-response characteristics, using a woodworking plant certified by testing and
inspecting agency.
Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during treatment and
drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from
drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated
woodwork.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL
WOODWORK
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
064023 - 5
5.
C.
Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels complying with the following requirements, made from
softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to
achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 25 or less per
ASTM E 84.
1.
2.
3.
D.
For panels 3/4 inch thick and less, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-2 except for
the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1600 psi (11 MPa); modulus of
elasticity, 300,000 psi (2070 MPa); internal bond, 80 psi (550 kPa); and screw-holding
capacity on face and edge, 250 and 225 lbf (1100 and 1000 N), respectively.
For panels 13/16 to 1-1/4 inches thick, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-1 except
for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1300 psi (9 MPa); modulus
of elasticity, 250,000 psi (1720 MPa); linear expansion, 0.50 percent; and screw-holding
capacity on face and edge, 250 and 175 lbf (1100 and 780 N), respectively.
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Duraflake FR" by
Weyerhaeuser.
Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: Medium-density fiberboard panels complying with ANSI A208.2,
made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time
of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of
200 or less per ASTM E 84.
1.
2.4
Kiln-dry materials before and after treatment to levels required for untreated materials.
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Medite FR" by SierraPine
Ltd.; Medite Div.
CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural
cabinets, except for items specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by
Describing Products)."
B.
Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch, 5-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch thick metal, and as
follows:
1.
Semiconcealed Hinges for Overlay Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01521.
C.
Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.
D.
Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter.
E.
Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141.
F.
Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081.
G.
Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091.
1.
Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-extension type;
zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL
WOODWORK
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
064023 - 6
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for drawers not more than 6 inches high and 24
inches wide.
File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for drawers more than 6 inches high or 24 inches
wide.
Pencil Drawer Slides: Grade 1; for drawers not more than 3 inches high and 24 inches
wide.
Keyboard Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for computer keyboard shelves.
Trash Bin Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for trash bins not more than 20 inches high and 16
inches wide.
H.
Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.
I.
Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.
J.
Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch OD, black, molded-plastic grommets
and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.
1.
K.
Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with
BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.
1.
L.
2.5
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "SG series" by Doug
Mockett & Company, Inc.
Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base.
For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class
requirements in BHMA A156.9.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less
than 15 percent moisture content.
B.
Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln
dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.
C.
Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior
walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead
expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
D.
Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
E.
VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that comply with
the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24):
1.
2.
F.
Wood Glues: 30 g/L.
Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L.
Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL
WOODWORK
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
064023 - 7
1.
2.6
Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premium-grade interior
woodwork complying with referenced quality standard.
B.
Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood
moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation
areas.
C.
Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before
fabrication.
D.
Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
indicated for the following:
1.
2.
3.
E.
2.
Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will
be complete.
Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled.
Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be
removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check
measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings
before disassembling for shipment.
Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing
fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or
roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts
to remove splinters and burrs.
1.
2.7
Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch Thick or
Less: 1/16 inch.
Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch.
Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch.
Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum
extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for
shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.
1.
F.
Ease edges to radius
Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A.
Grade: Premium.
B.
Wood Species and Cut: White maple, plain sliced.
1.
Provide split species on trim that faces areas with different wood species, matching each
face of woodwork to species and cut of finish wood surfaces in areas finished.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL
WOODWORK
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
064023 - 8
C.
For trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width.
D.
For rails wider or thicker than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for
width or thickness.
E.
Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members,
except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
F.
Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require
field assembly.
G.
Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in plant and prepare for
field assembly with bolted fittings designed to pull connections together.
2.8
PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS
A.
Grade: Premium.
B.
AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay.
C.
Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with
the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS.
Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP.
Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS.
Edges: Grade HGS.
Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:
1.
Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS.
a.
b.
2.
3.
Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC tape, 0.018-inch minimum thickness,
matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.
For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide
surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS.
Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber.
Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.
E.
Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative
laminate, Grade BKL.
F.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1.
G.
Match Architect's sample.
Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and
drawers, unless located directly under tops.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL
WOODWORK
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
064023 - 9
2.9
PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS
A.
Grade: Premium.
B.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS.
C.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1.
Match Architect's sample.
D.
Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts.
E.
Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces.
F.
Core Material: Medium-density fiberboard made with exterior glue.
G.
Core Material at Sinks: Medium-density fiberboard made with exterior glue.
2.10
CLOSET AND UTILITY SHELVING
A.
Grade: Premium.
B.
Shelf Material: 3/4-inch solid lumber.
C.
Cleats: 3/4-inch solid lumber.
D.
Wood Species: White maple.
2.11
SHOP FINISHING
A.
Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished.
B.
General: Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer
only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.
C.
General: Shop finish transparent-finished interior architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as
specified in this Section. Refer to Division 09 painting Sections for finishing opaque-finished
architectural woodwork.
D.
General: Drawings indicate items that are required to be shop finished. Finish such items at
fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Refer to Division 09 painting Sections for
finishing architectural woodwork not indicated to be shop finished.
E.
Shop Priming: Shop apply the prime coat including backpriming, if any, for transparentfinished items specified to be field finished. Refer to Division 09 painting Sections for material
and application requirements.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL
WOODWORK
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
064023 - 10
F.
Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing
architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
1.
G.
Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain
surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require
backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative
panels.
Transparent Finish:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Grade: Premium.
AWI Finish System: Catalyzed lacquer.
Staining: Match approved sample for color.
Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closedgrain wood before staining and finishing.
Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods.
Filled Finish for Open-Grain Woods: After staining (if any), apply paste wood filler to
open-grain woods and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood.
a.
7.
Apply wash-coat sealer after staining and before filling.
Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in
installation areas.
B.
Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for
fabrication of type of woodwork involved.
B.
Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for
fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.
C.
Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.
Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
D.
Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish
at cuts.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL
WOODWORK
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
064023 - 11
E.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply
with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used
to install woodwork.
F.
Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use
fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with
woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
G.
Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length
pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use
pieces less than 96 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf
running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.
1.
2.
3.
H.
Paneling: Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed panel-hanger clips. Do not
use face fastening, unless covered by trim.
1.
I.
Install flush paneling with no more than 1/16 inch in 96-inch vertical cup or bow and 1/8
inch in 96-inch horizontal variation from a true plane.
Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
1.
2.
3.
J.
Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and
finish same as wood base if finished.
Install wall railings on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing.
Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch
in 96 inches.
Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a
straight line.
Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish.
Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16
inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch penetration into wood
framing, blocking, or hanging strips.
Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other
supports into underside of countertop.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with
manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop.
Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.
Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation
from a straight line.
Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. and to walls
with adhesive.
Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 07 Section
"Joint Sealants."
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL
WOODWORK
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
064023 - 12
K.
Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes
with matching filler where exposed.
L.
Refer to Division 09 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork not
indicated to be shop finished.
3.3
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform
appearance.
B.
Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C.
Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
**END OF SECTION**
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL
WOODWORK
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
064023 - 13
SECTION 064200
WOOD PANELING
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Flush wood paneling.
Plastic-laminate-clad flush paneling.
Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims,
and hanging strips required for installing paneling and that are concealed within other
construction before paneling installation.
Division 06 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for interior woodwork other than
paneling.
Division 08 Section "Flush Wood Doors."
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Paneling includes wood furring, blocking, and shims for installing paneling, unless concealed
within other construction before paneling installation.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including finishing materials and processes.
B.
Product Data: For panel products, high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesives, fire-retardanttreated materials and finishing materials and processes.
1.
C.
Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
Shop Drawings: Show location of paneling, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other
components. Include dimensioned plans and elevations.
1.
Show details full size.
WOOD PANELING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
064200 - 1
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Samples for Initial Selection:
1.
2.
E.
Show locations and sizes of furring and blocking, including concealed blocking specified
in other Sections.
For paneling produced from premanufactured sets, show finished panel sizes, set
numbers, sequence numbers within sets, and method of cutting panels to produce
indicated sizes.
For paneling veneered in fabrication shop, show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain
direction, exposed face, and identification numbers indicating the flitch and sequence
within the flitch for each leaf.
Apply WI-certified compliance label to first page of Shop Drawings.
Shop-applied transparent finishes.
High-pressure decorative laminates.
Samples for Verification:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Lumber with or for transparent finish, not less than 50 sq. in., for each species and cut,
finished on 1 side and 1 edge.
Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparentfinished paneling.
Veneer-faced panel products with or for transparent finish, 8 by 10 inches, for each
species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish as specified.
Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish 50 sq. in. for lumber and 8
by 10 inches for panels, for each finish system and color, with 1/2 of exposed surface
finished.
Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with 1
sample applied to core material.
Corner pieces for stile and rail paneling, 18 inches high by 18 inches wide by 6 inches
deep.
F.
Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.
G.
Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program
certificates.
H.
Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products
similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products and Certified participant in AWI's Quality
Certification Program.
C.
Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility
for production of paneling and interior architectural wood work with sequence-matched wood
veneers.
WOOD PANELING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
064200 - 2
D.
Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards" for grades of paneling indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and
other requirements.
1.
Provide AWI Quality Certification Program labels and certificates indicating that
paneling, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.
E.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-retardant materials or products are indicated,
provide materials and products with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined by
testing identical products per test method indicated by UL, ITS, or another testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify with appropriate
markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper label or,
where required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that will be
concealed from view after installation.
F.
Forest Certification: Provide paneling produced from wood obtained from forests certified by
an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC 1.2, "Principles and Criteria."
G.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
H.
1.6
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.7
Do not deliver paneling until painting and similar operations that could damage paneling have
been completed in installation areas. If paneling must be stored in other than installation areas,
store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in
"Project Conditions" Article.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install paneling until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B.
Field Measurements: Where paneling is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions
of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on
Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying
the Work.
1.
2.
Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support paneling by field
measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating paneling without field
WOOD PANELING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
064200 - 3
measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to
ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that paneling can be installed as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for quality
grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Wood Products: Comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay.
Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as
required by woodwork quality standard.
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering high-pressure decorative laminates that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Abet Laminati, Inc.
Arborite; Division of ITW Canada, Inc.
Formica Corporation.
Lamin-Art, Inc.
Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div.
Panolam Industries Incorporated.
Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.
D.
Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
E.
Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement.
1.
F.
Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.
VOC Limits for installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that comply with
the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24):
1.
2.
Wood Glues: 30 g/L.
Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.
WOOD PANELING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
064200 - 4
3.
2.2
Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L.
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials that are acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction and that comply with requirements in this Article and with
fire-test-response characteristics specified.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with performance
requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Use the following treatment
type:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Exterior Type: Organic-resin-based formulation thermally set in wood by kiln drying.
Interior Type A: Low-hygroscopic formulation.
Mill lumber after treatment, within limits set for wood removal that do not affect listed
fire-test-response characteristics, using a woodworking plant certified by testing and
inspecting agency.
Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during treatment and
drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from
drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated
woodwork.
Kiln-dry materials before and after treatment to levels required for untreated materials.
Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels complying with the following requirements, made from
softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to
achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 25 or less per
ASTM E 84.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Do not use treated materials that do not comply with requirements of referenced
woodworking standard or that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective.
Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise
adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from
untreated materials.
Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of UL,
U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
For panels 3/4 inch thick and less, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-2 except for
the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1600 psi (11 MPa); modulus of
elasticity, 300,000 psi (2070 MPa); internal bond, 80 psi (550 kPa); and screw-holding
capacity on face and edge, 250 and 225 lbf (1110 and 1000 N), respectively.
For panels 13/16 to 1-1/4 inches thick, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-1 except
for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1300 psi (9 MPa); modulus
of elasticity, 250,000 psi (1720 MPa); linear expansion, 0.50 percent; and screw-holding
capacity on face and edge, 250 and 175 lbf (1110 and 780 N), respectively.
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Duraflake FR" by
Weyerhaeuser.
Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: Medium-density fiberboard panels complying with ANSI A208.2,
made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time
WOOD PANELING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
064200 - 5
of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of
200 or less per ASTM E 84.
1.
2.3
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Medite FR" by SierraPine
Ltd.; Medite Div.
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less
than 15 percent moisture content.
B.
Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln
dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.
C.
Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior
walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead
expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
2.4
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Paneling Grade: Provide Premium grade paneling complying with referenced quality standard.
B.
Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood
moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation
areas.
C.
Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before
fabrication.
D.
Arrange paneling in shop or other suitable space in proposed sequence for examination by
Architect. Mark units with temporary sequence numbers to indicate position in proposed
layout.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
Lay out one elevation at a time if approved by Architect.
Notify Architect seven days in advance of the date and time when layout will be available
for viewing.
Provide lighting of similar type and level as that of final installation for viewing layout,
unless otherwise approved by Architect.
Rearrange paneling as directed by Architect until layout is approved.
Do not trim end units and other nonmodular size units to less than modular size until after
Architect's approval of layout.
Obtain Architect's approval of layout before start of assembly. Mark units and Shop
Drawings with assembly sequence numbers based on approved layout.
Complete fabrication, including assembly and finishing, to maximum extent possible, before
shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and
installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing,
trimming, and fitting.
WOOD PANELING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
064200 - 6
1.
2.
F.
2.5
Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times paneling fabrication will be
complete.
Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled.
Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be
removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check
measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on approved Shop
Drawings before disassembling for shipment.
Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing
fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or
roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts
to remove splinters and burrs.
FLUSH WOOD PANELING FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A.
Grade: Premium.
B.
Wood Species and Cut: White maple, plain sliced.
1.
Lumber Trim and Edges: At paneling fabricator's option, trim and edges indicated as
solid wood (except moldings) may be either lumber or veneered construction of same
species and cut as panel faces and compatible with grain and color of panel faces.
C.
Matching of Adjacent Veneer Leaves: Random match.
D.
Matching within Panel Face: Balance match.
E.
Panel-Matching Method: No matching is required between panels. Select and arrange panels
for similarity of grain pattern and color between adjacent panels.
F.
Vertical Panel-Matching Method: Continuous match; veneer leaves of upper panels are
continuations of veneer leaves of lower panels.
G.
Panel Core Construction:
fiberboard.
H.
Exposed Panel Edges: Solid wood, 1/8 inch thick, white maple, edge band.
I.
Panel Reveals: As indicated on drawings.
J.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Paneling: Provide panels consisting of wood-veneer and fire-retardant
particleboard or fire-retardant, medium-density fiberboard. Panels shall have a flame-spread
index of 75 or less and a smoke-developed index of 450 or less per ASTM E 84.
K.
Provide paneling of thickness shown or, if not shown, 3/4-inch minimum thickness. Assemble
by gluing and concealed fastening.
2.6
Fire-retardant particleboard or fire-retardant, medium-density
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD FLUSH PANELING
A.
Grade: Premium.
WOOD PANELING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
064200 - 7
B.
Plastic-Laminate Cladding: High-pressure decorative laminate, in the following grades:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Faces: Grade HGS.
Backs: Grade BKH.
Exposed Edges: Same as faces.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1.
Match Architect's samples.
D.
Panel Core Construction:
fiberboard.
E.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Paneling: Provide panels consisting of fire-retardant plastic laminate
and fire-retardant particleboard or fire-retardant, medium-density fiberboard. Panels shall have
a flame-spread index of 75 or less and a smoke-developed index of 450 or less per ASTM E 84.
F.
Provide paneling of thickness shown or, if not shown, 3/4-inch minimum thickness. Assemble
by gluing and concealed fastening.
2.7
Fire-retardant particleboard or fire-retardant, medium-density
SHOP FINISHING
A.
Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as paneling to be finished.
B.
General: Finish paneling at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final
touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.
C.
Shop Priming: Shop apply the prime coat including backpriming, if any, for transparentfinished paneling specified to be field finished. Refer to Division 09 painting Sections for
material and application requirements.
D.
Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing
paneling, as applicable to each unit of work.
1.
E.
Backpriming: Apply two coats of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
concealed surfaces of paneling. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad paneling do
not require backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate.
Transparent Finish:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Grade: Premium.
AWI Finish System: Catalyzed lacquer.
Staining: Match Architect's sample.
Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closedgrain wood before staining and finishing.
Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods.
Filled Finish for Open-Grain Woods: After staining (if any), apply paste wood filler to
open-grain woods and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood.
WOOD PANELING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
064200 - 8
a.
7.
F.
Apply wash-coat sealer after staining and before filling.
Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.
Opaque Finish:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Grade: Premium.
AWI Finish System: Catalyzed lacquer.
Colors: Match Architect's samples.
Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Before installation, condition paneling to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation
areas.
B.
Before installing paneling, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as
required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Grade: Install paneling to comply with requirements for same grade specified in Part 2 for
fabrication of type of paneling involved.
B.
Install paneling level, plumb, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with
concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. Install with no
more than 1/16 inch in 96-inch vertical cup or bow and 1/8 inch in 96-inch horizontal variation
from a true plane.
1.
For flush paneling with revealed joints, install with variations in reveal width, alignment
of top and bottom edges, and flushness between adjacent panels not exceeding 1/32 inch.
C.
Scribe and cut paneling to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at
cuts.
D.
Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed panel-hanger clips and blind nailing.
Do not use face fastening unless covered by trim.
E.
Complete finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at shop or before
installation of paneling. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. Apply specified
finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only
sealer/prime coats are applied in shop.
F.
Refer to Division 09 Sections for final finishing of installed paneling.
WOOD PANELING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
064200 - 9
3.3
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Repair damaged and defective paneling, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace paneling. Adjust for uniform appearance.
B.
Clean paneling on exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or
soiled areas.
**END OF SECTION**
WOOD PANELING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
064200 - 10
SECTION 072100
THERMAL INSULATION
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Concealed building insulation.
Vapor retarders.
Sound attenuation insulation.
Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for insulation installed as part of a
perimeter fire-resistive joint system.
Division 09 Sections "Gypsum Board" and "Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies" for
installation in metal-framed assemblies of insulation specified by referencing this
Section.
Division 21 Section "Fire-Suppression Systems Insulation."
Division 22 Section "Plumbing Insulation."
Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation."
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers, or glass
fibers; produced in boards and blanket with latter formed into batts (flat-cut lengths) or rolls.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Plenum Rating: Provide glass-fiber insulation where indicated in ceiling plenums whose test
performance is rated as follows for use in plenums as determined by testing identical products
per "Erosion Test" and "Mold Growth and Humidity Test" described in UL 181, or on
comparable tests from another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
THERMAL
INSULATION
Erosion Test Results: Insulation shows no visible evidence of cracking, flaking, peeling,
or delamination of interior surface of duct assembly, after testing for 4 hours at 2500-fpm
air velocity.
Mold Growth and Humidity Test Results: Insulation shows no evidence of mold growth,
delamination, or other deterioration due to the effects of high humidity, after inoculation
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
072100 - 1
with Chaetomium globosium on all surfaces and storing for 60 days at 100 percent
relative humidity in the dark.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples for Verification: Full-size units for each type of exposed insulation indicated.
C.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency for insulation products.
D.
Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-testresponse characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method
indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
1.
2.
3.
1.7
Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling,
and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B.
Protect plastic insulation as follows:
1.
2.
3.
THERMAL
INSULATION
Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and
concealment.
Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project
site before installation time.
Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each
area of construction.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
072100 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1.
2.
2.2
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION
A.
Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below,
with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively:
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
2.3
DiversiFoam Products.
Dow Chemical Company.
Owens Corning.
Pactiv Building Products Division.
Type IV, 1.60 lb/cu. ft., unless otherwise indicated.
GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CertainTeed Corporation.
Guardian Fiberglass, Inc.
Johns Manville.
Knauf Fiber Glass.
Owens Corning.
B.
Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane
facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25
and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
C.
Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (blankets with reflective
membrane facing), Class A (membrane-faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less);
Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil-scrim-kraft, foil-scrim, or foil-scrimpolyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on 1 face.
D.
Where glass-fiber blanket insulation is indicated by the following thicknesses, provide blankets
in batt or roll form with thermal resistances indicated:
THERMAL
INSULATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
072100 - 3
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.4
3-5/8 inches thick with a thermal resistance of 11 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F.
5-1/2 inches thick with a thermal resistance of 19 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F.
6-1/2 inches thick with a thermal resistance of 21 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F.
12 inches thick with a thermal resistance of 38 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F.
VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating
of 0.13 perm.
B.
Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
C.
Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers.
D.
Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type I, Grade NS, Class 25,
Use NT related to exposure, and Use O related to vapor-barrier-related substrates.
E.
Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer and with
demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated.
2.5
AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS
A.
Vapor-Retarder Tape:
Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by insulation
manufacturers for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor-retarder facings.
B.
Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation
securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.
2.6
INSULATION FASTENERS
A.
Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of
holding insulation of thickness indicated securely in position indicated with self-locking washer
in place; and complying with the following requirements:
1.
Products:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
B.
AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers.
Eckel Industries of Canada; Stic-Klip Type N Fasteners.
Gemco; Spindle Type.
Plate: Perforated galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.
Spindle: Copper-coated, low carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter; length
to suit depth of insulation indicated.
Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick galvanized
steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation
securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches square or in diameter.
THERMAL
INSULATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
072100 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of
Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting
performance.
1.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing
projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
application indicated.
B.
Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any
time to ice, rain, and snow.
C.
Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit
tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere
with placement.
D.
Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls,
coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation
encapsulates piping.
E.
For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from
manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units
to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make
up total thickness.
3.4
INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION
A.
Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use
mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B.
Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to
edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed
installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.
C.
Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm-in-winter side of construction, unless
otherwise indicated.
THERMAL
INSULATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
072100 - 5
1.
D.
Install mineral-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the
following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
3.5
Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to
surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.
Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If
more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit
between ends.
Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between
edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures.
Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at
vented eaves.
For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced
blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to
flanges of metal studs.
Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown.
Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of
approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft.
INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN CEILINGS FOR SOUND ATTENUATION
A.
3.6
Install 3-inch- thick, unfaced glass-fiber blanket insulation over suspended ceilings at partitions
in a width that extends insulation 48 inches on either side of partition.
INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission.
Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to
cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber
insulation.
B.
Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs.
Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall
openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches o.c.
C.
Before installing vapor retarder, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal framing including
runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings. Seal overlapping
joints in vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's
written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing
members or other solid substrates.
D.
Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor-retarder fasteners
as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.
THERMAL
INSULATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
072100 - 6
E.
Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor
retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and
vapor retarder.
F.
Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work.
Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder.
3.7
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures,
physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation
is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction
immediately after installation.
**END OF SECTION**
THERMAL
INSULATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
072100 - 7
SECTION 078100
APPLIED FIREPROOFING
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Concealed SFRM.
Exposed SFRM.
Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for fire-safing insulation.
Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for fire-resistance-rated firestopping
systems.
Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for fire-resistance-rated joint systems.
DEFINITIONS
A.
SFRM: Sprayed fire-resistive material.
B.
Concealed: Fire-resistive materials applied to surfaces that are concealed from view behind
other construction when the Work is completed and have not been defined as exposed.
C.
Exposed: Fire-resistive materials applied to surfaces that are exposed to view when the Work is
completed, that are accessible through suspended ceilings, that are in elevator shafts and
machine rooms, that are in mechanical rooms, that are in air-handling plenums, and that are
identified as exposed on Drawings.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Structural framing plans indicating the following:
1.
2.
Locations and types of surface preparations required before applying SFRM.
Extent of SFRM for each construction and fire-resistance rating, including the following:
APPLIED
FIREPROOFING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
078100 - 1
a.
Applicable fire-resistance design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1)
b.
3.
For steel joist assemblies, include applicable fire-resistance design
designations, with each steel joist tested with the same maximum tensile
stress as each steel joist indicated on Drawings. Design designations with
steel joists tested at lower maximum tensile stress than those indicated are
not permitted.
Minimum thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-resistance ratings of
structural components and assemblies.
Treatment of SFRM after application.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of colored, exposed SFRM indicated.
D.
Samples for Verification: For each type of colored, exposed SFRM, two Samples, each 4
inches square, of each color, texture, and material formulation to be applied. Where finishes
involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of
variations expected.
E.
Product Certificates: For each type of SFRM, signed by product manufacturer.
F.
Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer, professional engineer, and testing agency.
G.
Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From SFRM manufacturer indicating the following:
1.
2.
3.
Materials have been tested for bond with substrates.
Materials have been verified by SFRM manufacturer to be compatible with substrate
primers and coatings.
Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
H.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for proposed SFRM.
I.
Research/Evaluation Reports: For SFRM.
J.
Field quality-control test and special inspection reports.
K.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by
SFRM manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's
products according to specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its SFRM to
Contractor or to an installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the
buyer.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain SFRM through one source from a single manufacturer.
APPLIED
FIREPROOFING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
078100 - 2
C.
SFRM Testing: By a qualified testing and inspecting agency engaged by Contractor or
manufacturer to test for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test
methods.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to test
for compliance with requirements for specified performance and test methods.
1.
2.
E.
SFRMs are randomly selected for testing from bags bearing the applicable classification
marking of UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
Testing is performed on specimens of SFRMs that comply with laboratory testing
requirements specified in Part 2 and are otherwise identical to installed fire-resistive
materials, including application of accelerant, sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling,
rolling, and water overspray, if any of these are used in final application.
Testing is performed on specimens whose application the independent testing and
inspecting agency witnessed during preparation and conditioning. Include in test reports
a full description of preparation and conditioning of laboratory test specimens.
Test for bond per ASTM E 736 and requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" for
coating materials. Provide bond strength indicated in referenced fire-resistance design,
but not less than minimum specified in Part 2.
Verify that manufacturer, through its own laboratory testing or field experience, has not
found primers or coatings to be incompatible with SFRM.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the fire-test-response characteristics
indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or
another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify
bags containing SFRM with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1.
2.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance
Directory" acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for SFRM serving as directapplied protection tested per ASTM E 119.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
F.
Provide products containing no detectable asbestos as determined according to the method
specified in 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix E, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy."
G.
Mockups: Apply mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
2.
H.
Extent of Mockups: Approximately 100 sq. ft. of surface for each product indicated.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures
related to SFRM including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
Review products, exposure conditions, design ratings, restrained and unrestrained
conditions, calculations, densities, thicknesses, bond strengths, and other performance
requirements.
APPLIED
FIREPROOFING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
078100 - 3
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.6
Review and finalize construction schedule and verify sequencing and coordination
requirements.
Review weather predictions, ambient conditions, and proposed temporary protections for
SFRM during and after installation.
Review surface conditions and preparations.
Review field quality-control testing procedures.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver products to Project site in original, unopened packages with intact and legible
manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, shelf life if
applicable, and fire-resistance ratings applicable to Project.
B.
Use materials with limited shelf life within period indicated. Remove from Project site and
discard materials whose shelf life has expired.
C.
Store materials inside, under cover, and aboveground; keep dry until ready for use. Remove
from Project site and discard wet or deteriorated materials.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not apply SFRM when ambient or substrate temperature is
40 deg F or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain temperature at
or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product application.
B.
Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of SFRM. Use natural
means or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fire-resistive material dries
thoroughly.
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Sequence and coordinate application of SFRM with other related work specified in other
Sections to comply with the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Provide temporary enclosure as required to confine spraying operations and protect the
environment.
Provide temporary enclosures for applications to prevent deterioration of fire-resistive
material due to exposure to weather and to unfavorable ambient conditions for humidity,
temperature, and ventilation.
Avoid unnecessary exposure of fire-resistive material to abrasion and other damage likely
to occur during construction operations subsequent to its application.
Do not apply fire-resistive material to metal roof deck substrates until concrete topping, if
any, has been completed. For metal roof decks without concrete topping, do not apply
fire-resistive material to metal roof deck substrates until roofing has been completed;
prohibit roof traffic during application and drying of fire-resistive material.
Do not apply fire-resistive material to metal floor deck substrates until concrete topping
has been completed.
APPLIED
FIREPROOFING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
078100 - 4
6.
7.
8.
1.9
Do not begin applying fire-resistive material until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and
other items penetrating fire protection are in place.
Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fireresistive material until application of fire protection is completed.
Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fire-resistive material has
been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to defective
applications.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Contractor and by Installer, in
which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace SFRMs that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
Cracking, flaking, spalling, or eroding in excess of specified requirements; peeling;
or delaminating of SFRM from substrates.
Not covered under the warranty are failures due to damage by occupants and
Owner's maintenance personnel, exposure to environmental conditions other than
those investigated and approved during fire-response testing, and other causes not
reasonably foreseeable under conditions of normal use.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONCEALED SFRM
A.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Concealed Cementitious SFRM:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
B.
Carboline Co., Fireproofing Products Div.; Pyrolite 15 High Yield.
Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn., Construction Products Div.; Monokote Type MK-6
and MK-6/HY.
Isolatek International Corp.; Cafco 300.
Southwest Vermiculite Co., Inc.; Type 5.
Carboline Co., Fireproofing Products Div.; Pyrolite 15 Blue.
Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn., Construction Products Div.; Retro-Gard.
Isolatek International Corp.; Cafco 300 SB.
Material Composition: Manufacturer's standard product, as follows:
1.
Concealed Cementitious SFRM: Factory-mixed, dry formulation of gypsum or portland
cement binders, additives, and lightweight mineral or synthetic aggregates mixed with
water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar for conveyance and application.
APPLIED
FIREPROOFING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
078100 - 5
C.
Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated, or higher values required to
attain designated fire-resistance ratings, measured per standard test methods referenced with
each property as follows:
1.
2.
Dry Density: 15 lb/cu. ft. for average and individual densities, or greater if required to
attain fire-resistance ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method."
Thickness: Minimum average thickness required for un-restrained fire-resistance design
indicated according to the following criteria, but not less than 0.375 inch, per
ASTM E 605:
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Bond Strength: 150 lbf/sq. ft. minimum per ASTM E 736 based on laboratory testing of
0.75-inch minimum thickness of SFRM.
Compressive Strength: 5.21 lbf/sq. in. minimum per ASTM E 761. Minimum thickness
of SFRM tested shall be 0.75 inch and minimum dry density shall be as specified but not
less than 15 lb/cu. ft.
Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937.
Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 759.
Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 760.
Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. in 24 hours per ASTM E 859. For
laboratory tests, minimum thickness of SFRM is 0.75 inch, maximum dry density is 15
lb/cu. ft, test specimens are not prepurged by mechanically induced air velocities, and
tests are terminated after 24 hours.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the following surface-burning
characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or
another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
a.
b.
10.
2.2
Where the referenced fire-resistance design lists a thickness of 1 inch or more, the
minimum allowable individual thickness of SFRM is the design thickness minus
0.25 inch.
Where the referenced fire-resistance design lists a thickness of less than 1 inch but
more than 0.375 inch, the minimum allowable individual thickness of SFRM is the
greater of 0.375 inch or 75 percent of the design thickness.
No reduction in average thickness is permitted for those fire-resistance designs
whose fire-resistance ratings were established at densities of less than 15 lb/cu. ft.
Flame-Spread Index: 10 or less.
Smoke-Developed Index: 0.
Fungal Resistance: No observed growth on specimens per ASTM G 21.
EXPOSED SFRM
A.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Exposed Cementitious SFRM:
a.
b.
APPLIED
FIREPROOFING
Carboline Co., Fireproofing Products Div.; Pyrolite 22.
Carboline Co., Fireproofing Products Div.; Pyrocrete 239.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
078100 - 6
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
B.
Material Composition: Manufacturer's standard product, as follows:
1.
C.
Carboline Co., Fireproofing Products Div.; Pyrocrete 40.
Carboline Co., Fireproofing Products Div.; Pyrocrete 240 High Yield.
Carboline Co., Fireproofing Products Div.; Pyrocrete 241.
Grace, W.R. & Co. - Conn., Construction Products Div.; Monokote Type Z106G.
Grace, W.R. & Co. - Conn., Construction Products Div.; Monokote Type Z106.
Grace, W.R. & Co. - Conn., Construction Products Div.; Monokote
Type Z106/HY.
Grace, W.R. & Co. - Conn., Construction Products Div.; Monokote Type Z146.
Isolatek International Corp.; Cafco 400.
Isolatek International Corp.; Fendolite M-II.
Pyrok, Inc.; Pyrok-HD.
Pyrok, Inc.; Pyrok-MD.
Exposed Cementitious SFRM: Factory-mixed, dry, cement aggregate formulation; or
chloride-free formulation of gypsum or portland cement binders, additives, and inorganic
aggregates mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar for conveyance and
application.
Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated, or higher values required to
attain designated un-restrained fire-resistance ratings, measured per standard test methods
referenced with each property as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Dry Density: Values for average and individual densities as required for fire-resistance
ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5,
"Displacement Method," but with an average density of not less than 22 lb/cu. ft.
Bond Strength: 434 lbf/sq. ft. minimum per ASTM E 736.
Compressive Strength: 51 lbf/sq. in. minimum per ASTM E 761.
Dry Density: Values for average and individual densities as required for fire-resistance
ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5,
"Displacement Method," but with an average density of not less than 39 lb/cu. ft.
Bond Strength: 1000 lbf/sq. ft. minimum per ASTM E 736.
Compressive Strength: 300 lbf/sq. in. minimum per ASTM E 761.
Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937.
Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 759.
Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 760.
Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. per ASTM E 859.
Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E 136.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the following surface-burning
characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or
another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
a.
b.
13.
14.
Flame-Spread Index: 10 or less.
Smoke-Developed Index: 0.
Fungal Resistance: No observed growth on specimens per ASTM G 21.
For exterior applications of SFRM, provide formulation listed and labeled by testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for surfaces exposed to
exterior.
APPLIED
FIREPROOFING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
078100 - 7
2.3
AUXILIARY FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary fire-resistive materials that are compatible with SFRM and
substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated.
B.
Substrate Primers: For use on each substrate and with each sprayed fire-resistive product,
provide primer that complies with one or more of the following requirements:
1.
2.
Primer's bond strength complies with requirements specified in UL's "Fire Resistance
Directory" for coating materials based on a series of bond tests per ASTM E 736.
Primer is identical to those used in assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics
of SFRM per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Adhesive for Bonding Fire-Resistive Material: Product approved by manufacturer of SFRM.
D.
Metal Lath: Expanded metal lath fabricated from material of weight, configuration, and finish
required to comply with fire-resistance designs indicated and fire-resistive material
manufacturer's written recommendations. Include clips, lathing accessories, corner beads, and
other anchorage devices required to attach lath to substrates and to receive SFRM.
E.
Reinforcing Fabric: Glass- or carbon-fiber fabric of type, weight, and form required to comply
with fire-resistance designs indicated; approved and provided by manufacturer of SFRM.
F.
Reinforcing Mesh: Metallic mesh reinforcement of type, weight, and form required to comply
with fire-resistance designs indicated; approved and provided by manufacturer of intumescent
mastic coating fire-resistive material. Include pins and attachment.
G.
Topcoat: Type recommended in writing by manufacturer of each SFRM for application over
concealed and exposed SFRM.
H.
Cement-Based Topcoat: Factory-mixed, cementitious hardcoat formulation recommended in
writing by manufacturer of SFRM for trowel or spray application over concealed and exposed
SFRM.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of work. A substrate is
in satisfactory condition if it complies with the following:
1.
2.
Substrates comply with requirements in the Section where the substrate and related
materials and construction are specified.
Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose
scale, incompatible primers, incompatible paints, incompatible encapsulants, or other
APPLIED
FIREPROOFING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
078100 - 8
3.
4.
foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fire-resistive materials with substrates
under conditions of normal use or fire exposure.
Objects penetrating fire-resistive material, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and
similar items, are securely attached to substrates.
Substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and other suspended
construction that will interfere with applying fire-resistive material.
B.
Verify that concrete work on steel deck has been completed.
C.
Verify that roof construction, installation of roof-top HVAC equipment, and other related work
are completed.
D.
Conduct tests according to fire-resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations to
verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond.
E.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fire-resistive materials during
application.
B.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fire-resistive material, including dirt,
oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, and incompatible primers,
paints, and encapsulants.
C.
Prime substrates where recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer unless compatible
shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive SFRM.
D.
For exposed applications, repair substrates to remove surface imperfections that could affect
uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of SFRM. Remove minor projections
and fill voids that would telegraph through fire-resistive products after application.
3.3
APPLICATION, GENERAL
A.
Comply with fire-resistive material manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials,
application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and spray on fire-resistive
material, as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fireresistance ratings indicated.
B.
Apply SFRM that is identical to products tested as specified in Part 1 "Quality Assurance"
Article and substantiated by test reports, with respect to rate of application, accelerator use,
sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling, water overspray, or other materials and procedures
affecting test results.
C.
Install metal lath and reinforcing fabric, as required, to comply with fire-resistance ratings and
fire-resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations for conditions of exposure and
intended use. Securely attach lath and fabric to substrate in position required for support and
reinforcement of fire-resistive material. Use anchorage devices of type recommended in writing
APPLIED
FIREPROOFING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
078100 - 9
by SFRM manufacturer. Attach accessories where indicated or required for secure attachment
of lath and fabric to substrate.
D.
Coat substrates with bonding adhesive before applying fire-resistive material where required to
achieve fire-resistance rating or as recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer for material
and application indicated.
E.
Extend fire-resistive material in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected.
Unless otherwise recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer, install body of fire-resistive
covering in a single course.
F.
Spray apply fire-resistive materials to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying
operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method
recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer.
G.
For applications over encapsulant materials, including lockdown (post-removal) encapsulants,
apply SFRM that differs in color from that of encapsulant over which it is applied.
H.
Where sealers are used, apply products that are tinted to differentiate them from SFRM over
which they are applied.
3.4
APPLICATION, CONCEALED SFRM
A.
Apply concealed SFRM in thicknesses and densities not less than those required to achieve fireresistance ratings designated for each condition, but apply in greater thicknesses and densities if
specified in Part 2 "Concealed SFRM" Article.
B.
Apply water overspray to concealed sprayed-fiber fire-resistive material as required to obtain
designated fire-resistance rating.
C.
Cure concealed SFRM according to product manufacturer's written recommendations.
D.
Apply sealer to concealed SFRM.
E.
Apply topcoat to concealed SFRM.
3.5
APPLICATION, EXPOSED SFRM
A.
Apply exposed SFRM in thicknesses and densities not less than those required to achieve fireresistance ratings designated for each condition, but apply in greater thicknesses and densities if
indicated.
1.
2.
For steel beams and bracing, provide a thickness of not less than 1 inch.
For metal floor or roof decks, provide a thickness of not less than 1/2 inch.
B.
Provide a uniform finish complying with description indicated for each type of material and
matching Architect's sample or, if none, finish approved for field-erected mockup.
C.
Apply exposed cementitious SFRM to produce the following finish:
APPLIED
FIREPROOFING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
078100 - 10
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
3.6
Spray-textured finish with no further treatment.
Even, spray-textured finish, produced by rolling flat surfaces of fire-protected members
with a damp paint roller to remove drippings and excessive roughness.
Skip-troweled finish with leveled surface, smoothed-out texture, and neat edges.
Smooth, troweled finish with surface markings eliminated and edges squared.
Cure exposed SFRM according to product manufacturer's written recommendations.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special
inspection and prepare reports:
1.
B.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare
test reports.
1.
C.
SFRM.
Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested
work complies with or deviates from requirements.
Tests and Inspections: Testing and inspecting of completed applications of SFRM shall take
place in successive stages, in areas of extent and using methods as follows. Do not proceed
with application of SFRM for the next area until test results for previously completed
applications of SFRM show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or exceed
values indicated and required for approved fire-resistance design.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Thickness for Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: For each 1000-sq. ft. area, or partial
area, on each floor, from the average of 4 measurements from a 144-sq. in. sample area,
with sample width of not less than 6 inches per ASTM E 605.
Thickness for Structural Frame Members: From a sample of 25 percent of structural
members per floor, taking 9 measurements at a single cross section for structural frame
beams or girders, 7 measurements of a single cross section for joists and trusses, and 12
measurements of a single cross section for columns per ASTM E 605.
Density for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Frame Members: At frequency and from
sample size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and
structural framing member, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A,
Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method."
Bond Strength for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Framing Members: For each
10,000-sq. ft. area, or partial area, on each floor, cohesion and adhesion from one sample
of size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and structural
framing member, per ASTM E 736.
a.
b.
APPLIED
FIREPROOFING
Field test SFRM that is applied to flanges of wide-flange, structural-steel members
on surfaces matching those that will exist for remainder of steel receiving fireresistive material.
If surfaces of structural steel receiving SFRM are primed or otherwise painted for
coating materials, perform series of bond tests specified in UL's "Fire Resistance
Directory." Provide bond strength indicated in referenced UL fire-resistance
criteria, but not less than 150 lbf/sq. ft. minimum per ASTM E 736.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
078100 - 11
5.
If testing finds applications of SFRM are not in compliance with requirements, testing
and inspecting agency will perform additional random testing to determine extent of
noncompliance.
D.
Remove and replace applications of SFRM that do not pass tests and inspections for cohesion
and adhesion, for density, or for both and retest as specified above.
E.
Apply additional SFRM, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results indicate that
thickness does not comply with specified requirements, and retest as specified above.
3.7
CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIR
A.
Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of
Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean
exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.
B.
Protect SFRM, according to advice of product manufacturer and Installer, from damage
resulting from construction operations or other causes so fire protection will be without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
C.
Coordinate application of SFRM with other construction to minimize need to cut or remove fire
protection. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect SFRM and patch any
damaged or removed areas.
D.
Repair or replace work that has not successfully protected steel.
**END OF SECTION**
APPLIED
FIREPROOFING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
078100 - 12
SECTION 078413
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fireresistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing
penetrating items.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: For penetrations through the following fire-resistance-rated constructions, including
both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration
firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to
requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fireresistance rating of construction penetrated.
1.
2.
B.
Fire-resistance-rated walls including fire walls, fire partitions, fire barriers, and smoke
barriers.
Fire-resistance-rated horizontal assemblies including floors, floor/ceiling assemblies, and
ceiling membranes of roof/ceiling assemblies.
Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings
determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479:
1.
2.
F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated,
but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated.
T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop
systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, where systems protect penetrating
items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas:
a.
b.
PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
Penetrations located outside wall cavities.
Penetrations located outside fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
078413 - 1
C.
For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical
damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions
both during and after construction.
1.
2.
3.
D.
1.4
For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moistureresistant through-penetration firestop systems.
For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches in width and exposed to
possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads
involved, either by installing floor plates or by other means.
For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems
not requiring removal of insulation.
For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread
and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per
ASTM E 84.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, show each type of construction
condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and type of penetrating item.
Include firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency that evidences
compliance with requirements for each condition indicated.
1.
2.
C.
Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting
agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop system configuration for
construction and penetrating items.
Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting
agency's illustration for a particular through-penetration firestop condition, submit
illustration, with modifications marked, approved by through-penetration firestop system
manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fireresistance-rated assembly.
Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each through-penetration
firestop system, along with the following information:
1.
2.
3.
Types of penetrating items.
Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where applicable,
thicknesses of construction penetrated.
Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identified by firestop design
designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
D.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
E.
Product Certificates:
manufacturer.
F.
Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating through-penetration firestop
system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products.
PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
For through-penetration firestop system products, signed by product
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
078413 - 2
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991,
"Approval of Firestop Contractors."
B.
Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing through-penetration firestop systems
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted
in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the
necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified
requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its through-penetration firestop system
products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer
qualification on buyer.
C.
Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems and fireresistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer.
D.
Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration
and construction condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer.
E.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply
with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements"
Article:
1.
2.
Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A
qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing testing and
follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard
referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated systems
complying with the following requirements:
a.
b.
Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of
qualified testing and inspecting agency.
Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to
through-penetration firestop system designations listed by the following:
1)
F.
1.6
UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."
Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened
containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and
manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life if applicable, qualified testing and
inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project, curing time, and mixing
instructions for multi-component materials.
PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
078413 - 3
B.
1.7
Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their
deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when ambient
or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system
manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B.
Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural
means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration
firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.
B.
Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate
through-penetration firestop systems.
C.
Notify Owner's inspecting agency at least seven days in advance of through-penetration firestop
system installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations.
D.
Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed
behind other construction until each installation has been examined by Owner's inspecting
agency and building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, through-penetration firestop
systems that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those systems
indicated in the Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule at the end of Part 3 or on
Drawings that are produced by one of the following manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.
Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn.
Hilti, Inc.
Johns Manville.
Nelson Firestop Products.
3M; Fire Protection Products Division.
Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division (basis-of-design products).
USG Corporation.
PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
078413 - 4
2.2
FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL
A.
Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one
another; with the substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, penetrating throughpenetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by
through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B.
Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed
to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use
only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved
by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. Accessories include,
but are not limited to, the following items:
1.
Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation.
Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to
prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.
Fire-rated form board.
Fillers for sealants.
Temporary forming materials.
Substrate primers.
Collars.
Steel sleeves.
FILL MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide through-penetration firestop systems containing the types of fill materials
indicated in the Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule at the end of Part 3 (unless
noted otherwise below) by referencing the types of materials described in this Article. Fill
materials are those referred to in directories of referenced testing and inspecting agencies as
"fill," "void," or "cavity" materials.
B.
Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Tremco Fyre-Can intumescent device for combustible pipe
penetrations in 2 hour rated floor slab. Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place
concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a
radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and
a neoprene gasket. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s installation recommendations.
C.
Acrylic Sealants: Tremco Tremstop Acrylic High Performance firestop sealant for metallic
pipe, insulated pipe, steel studs, construction joints, and head of wall applications. Install in
accordance with manufacturer’s installation recommendations.
D.
Firestop Devices: TREMstop D pre-fabricated intumescent collar device for combustible pipe
penetrations in 2 hour rated floor slab. Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel
and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. Install in
accordance with manufacturer’s installation recommendations.
PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
078413 - 5
E.
Intumescent Wrap Strips: Tremco Tremstop WS graphite based intumescent highly flexible
laminate wrap strip. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s installation recommendations.
F.
Intumescent Wall Sleeve: Tremco Fyre-Can Prefabricated Wall Sleeve, 26 gauge metallic
sleeve with fold-in tabs on both ends and a centered stainless steel hose clamp attachment with
WS intumescent wrap strip for specific pipe diameter from 1 ½” to 12”. Install in accordance
with manufacturer’s installation recommendations.
G.
Mortars: Tremco Tremstop Fire Mortar Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of
inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing
with water at Project site to form a non-shrinking, homogeneous mortar. Install in accordance
with manufacturer’s installation recommendations.
H.
Pillows/Bags: Tremco Tremstop PS re-usable moisture resistant durable heat expanding
fiberglass bags filled with intumescent material including a combination of mineral fiber, water
insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Install in accordance with
manufacturer’s installation recommendations.
I.
Silicone Sealant: Tremco Fyre-Sil single component neutral cure high performance elastomeric
silicone sealant capable of 25% movement for steel, copper, EMT pipe, fiberglass pipe, jacketed
cables, bus ducts, and construction joints. Silicone sealant to be used on concrete or cmu, and
gypsum drywall.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.4
Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal
surfaces, and non-sag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a
non-slumping, gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to non-sag
grade for both opening conditions.
Grade for Horizontal Surfaces: Pourable self-leveling formulation for openings in floors
and other horizontal surfaces.
Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Gun grade Non-sag formulation for openings in vertical and
other surfaces.
Install in accordance with manufacturer’s installation recommendations.
MIXING
A.
For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through-penetration
firestop system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials,
water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers,
mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with
optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting
performance of work.
PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
078413 - 6
1.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration
firestop systems to comply with firestop system manufacturer's written instructions and with the
following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials
that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems.
Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable
of developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems. Remove loose
particles remaining from cleaning operation.
Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
B.
Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop
system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine
primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from
contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would
otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to
remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without
disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates.
3.3
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance
Requirements" Article and with firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions
and published drawings for products and applications indicated.
B.
Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support
fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional
shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
1.
C.
After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible
forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of
firestop systems.
Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:
1.
2.
3.
Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and
penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
078413 - 7
3.4
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify through-penetration firestop systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach
labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of edge of the firestop
systems so that labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop
systems. Use mechanical fasteners for metal labels. For plastic labels, use self-adhering type
with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed
and, in combination with label material, will result in partial destruction of label if removal is
attempted. Include the following information on labels:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.5
The words "Warning - Through-Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. Notify
Building Management of Any Damage."
Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
Date of installation.
Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name.
Installer's name.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified, independent inspecting agency to inspect
through-penetration firestops. Independent inspecting agency shall comply with ASTM E 2174
requirements including those related to qualifications, conducting inspections, and preparing
test reports.
B.
Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems so they
comply with requirements.
C.
Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction only after
inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements.
3.6
CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A.
Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system
manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that
through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove
damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new
materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.
PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
078413 - 8
3.7
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM SCHEDULE
CONCRETE FLOORS
TYPE OF PENETRANT
CIRCULAR BLANK OPENINGS
SINGLE METAL PIPES OR CONDUIT
SINGLE OR BUNDLED CABLES
CABLE TRAY
SINGLE INSULATED PIPES
NON-INSULATED MECHANICAL
DUCTWORK WITHOUT DAMPERS
MIXED PENETRANTS
CONCRETE OR BLOCK WALLS
TYPE OF PENETRANT
CIRCULAR BLANK OPENINGS
SINGLE METAL PIPES OR CONDUIT
SINGLE OR BUNDLED CABLES
CABLE TRAY
SINGLE INSULATED PIPES
NON-INSULATED MECHANICAL
DUCTWORK WITHOUT DAMPERS
F-RATING
(HR)
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
F-RATING
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
UL-CLASSIFIED SYSTEM
(PRIMARY/SECONDARY)
FA 0005/CAJ 0055
FA 1016/CAJ 1226
FA 3007/CAJ 3095
CAJ 4054/CAJ 4035
FA 5017/ CAJ 5091
CAJ 7051/CAJ 7046
CAJ 8096/CAJ 8056
UL-CLASSIFIED SYSTEM
(PRIMARY/SECONDARY)
CAJ 0055
CAJ 1226/CAJ 1184
WJ 3036/CAJ 3139
CAJ 4054/CAJ 4035
CAJ 4035
WJ 5042/CAJ 5091
CAJ 5091
WJ 7021/WJ 7022
CAJ 7051
MIXED PENETRANTS
PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
1
2
3
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
CAJ 8096/CAJ 8056
CAJ 8056
078413 - 9
GYPSUM WALLBOARD ASSEMBLIES
TYPE OF PENETRANT
METAL PIPES OR CONDUIT
SINGLE OR BUNDLED CABLES
CABLE TRAY
INSULATED PIPES
NON-INSULATED MECHANICAL
DUCTWORK WITHOUT DAMPERS
MIXED PENETRANTS
F-RATING
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
UL-CLASSIFIED SYSTEM
WL 1054/WL 1058
WL 3111/WL 3065
WL 4034/WL 4011
WL 5029
WL 7040
WL 8019/ WL 8013
** END OF SECTION **
PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
078413 - 10
SECTION 078446
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.3
Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Product Schedule: For each fire-resistive joint system. Include location and design designation
of qualified testing agency.
1.
1.4
Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing agency's illustration
for a particular fire-resistive joint system condition, submit illustration, with
modifications marked, approved by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's fireprotection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated
assembly.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B.
Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating fire-resistive joint systems have been installed in
compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.
C.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for fire-resistive joint systems.
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire-resistive joint systems when ambient or substrate
temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers or when
substrates are wet.
FIRE-RESISTIVE
JOINT SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
078446 - 1
B.
1.6
Install and cure fire-resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions using natural
means of ventilation or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed
according to specified requirements.
B.
Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
A.
Where required, provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist
spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and
maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which fire-resistive joint
systems are installed. Fire-resistive joint systems shall accommodate building movements
without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases.
B.
Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide fire-resistive joint systems
with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079:
1.
2.
3.
Joints include those installed in or between fire-resistance-rated floor or floor/ceiling
assemblies.
Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of construction
they will join (1-hour typical)
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
C.
A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.
CEMCO.
Fire Trak Corp.
Grace Construction Products.
Hilti, Inc.
Johns Manville.
Nelson Firestop Products.
NUCO Inc.
Passive Fire Protection Partners.
RectorSeal Corporation.
Specified Technologies Inc.
3M Fire Protection Products.
Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group.
USG Corporation.
VOC Content: Fire-resistive joint system sealants shall comply with the following limits for
VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
FIRE-RESISTIVE
JOINT SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
078446 - 2
1.
2.
3.
D.
Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming
materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only
components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified
testing agency for systems indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint systems to
comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following
requirements:
1.
2.
3.
Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with
adhesion of fill materials.
Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum
bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.
Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
B.
Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint system
manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers
to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint system from
contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that
would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods
used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire-resistive joint
system's seal with substrates.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation
instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.
B.
Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during
their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to
achieve fire ratings indicated.
FIRE-RESISTIVE
JOINT SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
078446 - 3
1.
C.
Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the
following results:
1.
2.
3.
3.4
After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible
forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of fireresistive joint system.
Fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to achieve fireresistance ratings indicated.
Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints.
For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A.
Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers and
that do not damage materials in which joints occur.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure fireresistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If
damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fireresistive joint systems complying with specified requirements.
**END OF SECTION**
FIRE-RESISTIVE
JOINT SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
078446 - 4
SECTION 079200
JOINT SEALANTS
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Joint sealant.
Division 07 Section "Fire Resistive Joint Systems" for sealing joints in fire resistance
rated construction.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants
showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C.
Joint Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Joint sealant application, joint location, and designation.
Joint sealant manufacturer and product name.
Joint sealant formulation.
Joint sealant color.
D.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
E.
Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer.
F.
Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer,
indicating the following:
1.
2.
Materials forming joint substrates and joint sealant backings have been tested for
compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
JOINT SEALANTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
079200 - 1
G.
Preconstruction Field Adhesion Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation
methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in
"Preconstruction Testing" Article.
H.
Field Adhesion Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.
I.
Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of units required for this Project.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single
manufacturer.
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.6
When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint
sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
When joint substrates are wet.
Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed
from joint substrates.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or
replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in
this Section within specified warranty period.
1.
B.
Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint sealant
manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with
performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1.
C.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
Warranty Period: Twenty years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from
the following:
1.
2.
Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design
or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's
written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.
Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
JOINT SEALANTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
079200 - 2
3.
4.
Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric
contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by joint sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B.
VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the
weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
1.
2.
3.
Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
C.
Liquid Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for
each liquid applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920
classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
D.
Stain Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be non-staining to porous
substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have
not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
E.
Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full nonstandard range to match adjacent materials. Provide actual samples in building joint for
Architect inspection and approval matching adjacent material color for all material applications.
2.2
SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C
920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT adjacent to non-painted surfaces (countertops.)
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
2.3
Pecora Corporation; 898
or equal.
LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade
NF adjacent to painted surfaces (door frames.)
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
JOINT SEALANTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
079200 - 3
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.4
BASF Building Systems; Sonolac.
Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 600.
May National Associates, Inc.
Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.
Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200.
Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealant substrate
tests and field tests.
B.
Cleaners for Non-porous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants
and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or
harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to
promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C.
Masking Tape: Non-staining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting jointsealant performance.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint
sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a
combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing
optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning
operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil free compressed air.
Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
JOINT SEALANTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
079200 - 4
4.
Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do
not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants.
B.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer or as
indicated by preconstruction joint sealant substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint
sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or
by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
without disturbing joint seal.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A.
General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B.
Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C.
Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1.
2.
3.
Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and
replace them with dry materials.
D.
Install bond breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants
and backs of joints.
E.
Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
Tooling of Non-sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form
smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure
contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1.
2.
Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
JOINT SEALANTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
079200 - 5
3.
4.
5.
Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise
indicated.
Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193.
Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per
Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193.
a.
3.4
Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.
CLEANING
A.
3.5
Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of
products in which joints occur.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage
or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately
so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
**END OF SECTION**
JOINT SEALANTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
079200 - 6
SECTION 081100
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES (HOLLOW METAL)
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Furnish hollow metal work as shown on the contract drawings and as specified in this section.
The General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Custom fabricated non-rated and fire rated hollow metal doors and frames.
Borrowed lights and sidelights.
Door louvers and vision panels.
Hardware reinforcing, anchors and accessories.
Owner’s supply of door frames in inventory.
Division 06 Section “Rough and Finish Carpentry” for installation of steel doors and
frames.
Division 08 Section "Flush Wood Doors."
Division 08 Section "Finish Hardware."
Division 08 Section “Glazing.”
Division 09 Section "Painting."
REFERENCE
A.
ANSI A115 – Preparation of doors and frames for finish hardware.
B.
ASTM A653 – Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated by Hot dipped process.
C.
ASTM E90 – Measurement of airborne sound transmission loss.
D.
ASTM E152 – Methods of fire test of door assemblies.
E.
NAAMM HMMA 810-87 – Hollow metal doors.
F.
NAAMM HMMA 820-87 – Hollow metal frames.
G.
NAAMM HMMA 890-99 – Technical Summary.
H.
NFPA 80 1999 – Fire Doors and Windows.
STEEL DOORS AND
FRAMES (HOLLOW METAL)
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
081100 - 1
I.
UL 10 B – Fire test of door assemblies.
J.
IBC – 2009 – International Building Code.
K.
UCC – 2009 – Uniform Construction Code.
1.4
PERFORMANCE
A.
1.5
Acoustic Rating for door and frame assemblies per ASTM E 90, minimum rating of STC 47 if
listed in door Schedule.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Provide hollow metal work from single source manufacturer specializing in this type of work.
B.
Labeled doors and frames shall be provided for those openings that require fire ratings as
determined and scheduled by the Architect. Such doors and frames shall be constructed as
tested and approved by Intertek Testing (WHI), U.L or other recognized testing agency having a
factory testing service.
C.
If any door or frame cannot qualify for appropriate labeling because of design or size, the unit
shall be label certified by manufacturer.
D.
For special doors, suitable data in the form of laboratory test or certification shall be provided to
substantiate performance relative to acoustics.
1.6
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit manufacturer’s specifications for fabrication and recommended installation data.
B.
Submit (6) six copies of all necessary shop drawings for fabrication and installation. Include
details of each frame type, elevations door design, condition at opening, location, anchor details,
and joint connections for oversized frames. Provide schedules of doors and frames using the
same reference as those used on the contract drawings.
C.
Samples:
1.
2.
3.
4.
A sample door showing edge, top and bottom construction, core materials, hinge
reinforcement.
A sample of a typical frame showing welded corner joint, welded hinge reinforcing plate,
dust covers, and all anchors.
All samples submitted shall be of the same production type and shall represent in all
respects the quality of work to be furnished by the manufacturer. No work represented by
the samples shall be fabricated until samples are approved and any downgrading of
quality demonstrated by the samples may be cause for rejection of the work.
All physical samples shall be submitted at the same time as the written documents and
shall remain in the Architects possession until substantial completion or work.
STEEL DOORS AND
FRAMES (HOLLOW METAL)
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
081100 - 2
1.7
SCHEDULING AND SEQUENCING
A.
1.8
Coordinate Work with other trades, reference Division 1, Summary of Work.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Delivery, storage and handling of custom hollow metal work shall be accomplished in such a
manner as required to prevent damage including deterioration of Prime Coat Finish.
B.
Doors shall be stored in an up-right position in a protected and dry area. Place bottom of doors
on wood strips over the ground or floor. Doors shall also be shimmed to provide at least ¼”
inch space between units.
1.9
WARRANTY
A.
1.10
Provide a (1) one year manufacturers warranty under the provisions of Section 017300. This
warranty period shall be effective at the substantial completion date specified by the Architect.
OWNER’S INVENTORY OF STEEL FRAMES
A.
The Owner will make available the existing (8) knocked down frames in inventory for use in
this renovation. Frames are typically used for 3’x7’ doors and are designated by letter/number
from previous fit-outs.
B.
Contractor must determine the suitability (damage) and frame-hand prior to installation and use.
C.
The following doors may be reviewed for use: A038, A120, A177, A181A, A210, B119, B149,
B152, and B153.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Subject to compliance with the requirements of this specification, provide steel metal doors and
frames from one of the following HMMA or SDI members.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
de La Fontaine Industries, Inc.
Curries Co.
Steelcraft Corporation
Republic Manufacturing
MATERIALS
A.
Interior doors and frames:
STEEL DOORS AND
FRAMES (HOLLOW METAL)
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
081100 - 3
1.
B.
Door faces:
1.
C.
Interior doors, 18 Gauge.
Frames:
1.
2.3
Galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A653, designation Z075 with a minimum
thickness of .25 oz per sq./foot total both sides.
Interior frames 16 Gauge, frames over 4’0” wide 14 Gauge.
STEEL DOOR CONSTRUCTION
A.
Doors shall be made of commercial quality, level, hot dipped galvanized metal in accordance
with ASTM A653 and shall be free of scale, pitting or surface defects.
B.
All doors shall be of the type and size shown on drawings and shall be lock seam on edge (no
visible seams on face) or continuous welded seam. Door thickness shall be 1 ¾” unless noted
different on plans.
C.
Doors shall be strong, rigid and neat in appearance free of warp, twist and buckle. Corner bends
shall be true, straight and of minimum radius for the gauge of metal specified.
D.
For interior doors, cores shall be glued honeycomb core compatible with fire rated requirements
spanning the full thickness of the interior spaces steel stiffened using 20 gauge stiffeners spaced
maximum 6” on center and loose mineral wool.
E.
Tops and bottoms of the doors shall have an inverted channel made of 16 gauge galvanized steel
spot welded 5” on center to the face skins.
F.
Doors shall be beveled 1/8” in 2” on both stiles.
G.
Hardware Reinforcements:
1.
2.
Doors shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at the factory for fully template
hardware only, in accordance with the approved hardware schedule and templates
provided by hardware supplier. Where surface-mounted hardware is used doors shall be
reinforced only, drilling and tapping shall be done in the field.
Minimum gauge reinforcing plates are as follows:
a. Hinges and Pivots: 10 gauge.
b. Lock Face, Flush Bolts and Closers: 12 gauge.
c. All other reinforcements: 16 gauge.
H.
Glass moldings:
1.
I.
Manufacturers standard sandwich type kit.
Louvers shall be welded fixed blade type of fusible link type for fire doors providing the free air
as specified by the Architect. Louvers pierced in the face sheets will not be acceptable.
STEEL DOORS AND
FRAMES (HOLLOW METAL)
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
081100 - 4
J.
Labeled Fire doors: See 2.6 of this specification.
K.
Finish: After fabrication, all tool marks and surface imperfections shall be dressed filled and
sanded. Doors shall then be primed using a rust-inhibitive baked on primer, which is fully
cured before shipping.
2.4
STEEL DOOR PANELS
A.
2.5
Provide metal panels manufactured using the same materials, workmanship and finish as the
hollow metal doors in the section.
STEEL DOOR FRAME CONSTRUCTION
A.
Hollow metal frames shall be made of commercial quality, level, hot dipped galvanized metal in
accordance with ASTM A653 and shall be free of scale, pitting or surface defects.
B.
Frames shall be of the types and sizes shown of drawings and shall be Knock Down (u.n.o) with
integral trim for Interior Doors. Exterior frames to be Welded.
C.
All finished work shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, square, true.
D.
Jamb depths, trim profile and backbends shall be as scheduled in the drawings by the Architect.
E.
Corner joints shall have trim faces mitered, all contact edges closed tight, with interlocking tabs.
F.
When shipping limitations so dictate, frames for large openings shall be fabricated in sections
for field splicing.
G.
Hardware reinforcements:
1.
2.
Frames shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at the factory for fully template
hardware only, in accordance with the approved hardware schedule and the templates
supplied by the hardware supplier. Where surface-mounted hardware is used frames
shall be reinforced only, drilling and tapping shall be done in the field.
Minimum gauge reinforcing plates are as follows:
a. Hinge and pivot reinforcements: 10 gauge.
b. All other hardware reinforcements: 12 gauge.
H.
Floor Anchors:
1.
I.
Floor anchors shall be securely welded to the inside of each jamb, with two holes
provided for floor anchorage. Minimum gauge is 16 gauge.
Jamb Anchors:
1.
For installation in stud partitions, use a minimum of 3 welded “Z” type (18 gauge min.)
anchors per jamb leg for up to 7’0” high frames. Add an additional anchor per 2’0”
portion thereafter.
STEEL DOORS AND
FRAMES (HOLLOW METAL)
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
081100 - 5
2.
For installation in previously placed concrete, masonry or structural steel , use prepared
opening anchors that are full width and that are flush with the inside dimension of the
face. Fasteners are provided by others except when frame is a Fire Rated frame.
J.
Dust cover boxes shall be used in all masonry to protect all hardware cutouts from dust and
masonry. They shall be made of minimum 22 Gauge materials. Dust boxes shall also be used
to cover the back of the strike reinforcements on all frames including stud partition installations.
K.
Welded frames shall have temporary spreader bars tack welded at the bottom of each leg to
serve as a brace during shipping and handling. These are to be removed before final
installation.
L.
Loose glazing stops shall be made of a minimum 18 Gauge galvanized steel butted at the
corners and secured to the frames using countersunk zinc-plated screws.
M.
Finish: After fabrication, remove all tool marks, surface imperfections, all exposed surfaces
shall be sanded smooth, dressed and shall be primed using a rust-inhibitive baked on primer that
is fully cured before shipping.
2.6
LABELED DOORS AND FRAMES
A.
Labeled doors and frames shall be provided for those openings requiring fire protection ratings
as determined and scheduled by the Architect. Such doors and frames shall be constructed as
tested and approved by Intertek Testing Laboratories (WHI) U.L or other nationally recognized
testing agency having a factory inspection service.
B.
For any door or frame specified or shown on drawings that cannot qualify as fire rated because
of its design or other reasons, the Architect must be advised before bid date. As addendum shall
be provided at the time.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SITE STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
3.2
All scratches caused by shipping or handling shall be touched up with a rust-inhibitive primer.
Materials shall be stored on blocks 3” minimum, in a dry location and covered to protect them
from damage and the elements.
INSTALLATION
A.
Prior to installation all frames must be verified for correctness in size, swing, square, alignment,
twist and plumb. Permissible tolerances shall not exceed the following and shall not exceed
HMMA standards:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Square +/- 1/16”: Measured on a line at 90 degree.
Alignment +/- 1/16”: Measured on horizontal line.
Twist +/- 1/16”: Measured at face corners.
Plumb +/- 1/16”: Measured on the jamb at the floor.
STEEL DOORS AND
FRAMES (HOLLOW METAL)
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
081100 - 6
B.
Proper door clearances:
1.
Fit NON fire rated doors with the following clearances:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Jambs and heads: 1/8” max.
Meeting edges at pairs: 1/8” max.
Bottom: ¾” max, where NO thresholds is used; 3/8” max, where thresholds are
used.
Fit fire rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA80.
**END OF SECTION**
STEEL DOORS AND
FRAMES (HOLLOW METAL)
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
081100 - 7
SECTION 081416
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
WORK INCLUDES
A.
Standard flush and fire rated wood doors.
B.
Factory machining.
C.
Factory finishing.
D.
Flush doors; rated & non-rated.
E.
Owner’s inventory of flush wood doors.
1.3
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute: Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards –
Illustrated, 8th Edition Version 1.0.2003.
B.
ANSI/HPVA HP-1-2000 – American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood
C.
NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows
D.
NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Door Assemblies
E.
IBC – 2003 – International Building Code.
F.
Underwriters' Laboratories - UL 10C (positive pressure) - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies which
ever applies.
G.
ITS (Warnock Hersey) - Certification Listings for Fire Doors
H.
ASTM E90-90 - Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions
1.4
SUMMARY
A.
Specifications for both fire rated and non-rated solid core flush wood doors.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
081416 - 1
B.
Factory pre-fitting, pre-machining for hardware, and factory prefinishing.
C.
Related sections to include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.5
Division 06 Section “Rough Finish and Carpentry” for installation of steel frames.
Division 08 Section "Steel Frames."
Division 08 Section "Finish Hardware."
Division 08 Section “Glazing.”
Division 09 Section "Painting."
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.6
All doors shall be, at a minimum, in accordance with AWI: Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards, Eighth Edition, Version 1.0.2003, Section 1300 Architectural Flush
Doors, Premium Grade except for veneer specifications shown which is specified in 2.2C below.
All doors to have core, 2 stiles and 2 rails securely bonded together and entire unit
abrasively sanded prior to application of faces to assure even thickness of all components.
No voids permitted.
Non-Fire Rated Wood Doors - All solid core flush wood doors shall be Premium Grade
PC-5 (Particle Core) core.
Fire Rated Wood Doors: Where fire-resistance classifications are shown or scheduled,
provide doors which are like the non-fire rated doors above but comply with the
appropriate parts of the above AWI standards for fire rated doors. All doors to be
Premium Grade. Doors will meet the requirements of NFPA No. 80 "Standard for Fire
Doors and Windows". Fire rated doors shall bear the label of an independent testing
agency having approval of the local building authorities.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit door manufacturer's product construction data, and specifications for
each type of wood door, including details of core and edge construction, trim detail for lite
openings and similar components.
B.
Specific Product Warranty: The door shall be warranted by the manufacturer to be free of
manufacturing defects for the life of the original installation. Warranty shall provide for repair
or replacement of the door as originally furnished. Manufacturer shall elect to repair or replace
defective door(s), and will assume reasonable costs associated with same. Manufacturer may,
per its discretion, elect to use either its own or third party resources to resolve warranty claims.
C.
Shop Drawings: Provide the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Door type and size.
Fire Rating. Positive pressure - UL 10C/UBC7-2-97
Hardware types and locations.
Location of Hardware blocking where specified.
Vision panel or louver cutout size and location.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
081416 - 2
6.
D.
Samples:
1.
2.
1.7
Prefinish system type and approved color(s).
Color samples for factory prefinishing. Manufacturer must submit samples of not less
than 3 - 5" x 8" size on specified veneer species. The sample should reasonably represent
the color range of the veneer species selected.
Construction samples. Supply door sections showing door faces, stiles, and core
representative of each door type specified. Samples to be not less than 5" x 5".
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in Section 1.3 above,
with a minimum of five years documented door building experience. All doors must be supplied
through one Company.
B.
Quality Standard: Doors to comply with AWI latest revision of Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards Illustrated Section 1300 for Architectural Flush Doors, and Section 1500 for
Factory Finish as noted above in 1.5 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS.
C.
Fire Ratings Compliance: Fire-rated wood doors to comply with NFPA-80 requirements
according to building code standards having local jurisdiction. Positive Pressure Testing UBC
7-2-97 or UL10C.
D.
Fire Label: All doors requiring fire-rating will carry either UL or ITS (Warnock Hersey) label.
Manufacturer's construction certification labels may be used for door size variations outside the
approved sizes range, if approved by AHJ (Authority Having Jurisdiction).
E.
Delivery/Storage/Handling: Store and protect doors in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.8
Store doors flat and off the floor on a level surface in a dry, well-ventilated building. Do
not store on edge. Protect doors from dirt, water and abuse.
Certain wood species are light sensitive. Protect all doors from exposure to light
(artificial or natural) after delivery.
Do not subject interior doors to extremes in either heat or humidity. HVAC systems
should be operational and balanced, providing a temperature range of 50 to 90 degrees
Fahrenheit and 25% to 55% relative humidity.
When handling doors, always lift and carry. Do not drag across other doors or surfaces.
Handle with clean hands or gloves.
Each door will be marked on top rail with the opening number.
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer's signed warranty covering manufacturing or material defects for life of original
installation, including repair, replacement, machining, detailing and/or prefinishing, is a
required part of the manufacturer's warranty for interior doors. No warranty required for exterior
applications.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
081416 - 3
1.9
OWNER’S INVENTORY OF FLUSH WOOD DOORS
A.
The Owner will make available the existing inventory of flush wood doors for use in this
renovation. Doors are typically 3’-0 wide x 7’-0 high and are designated by letter/number from
previous fit-outs.
B.
The following doors (with the type designated) may be reviewed for use: B266 (FL), B101
(DL, C-Label), B152 (FL), B149 (FL), A120A (NG), A117 (FL), A137A (Pair DL), B115 (DL),
A656A (FG), and A239 (FL).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Other manufacturers are subject to evaluation and inclusion by architect/specifier. Listed below
are acceptable primary manufacturers of 5 Ply – High Performance wood doors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
Eggers Industries.
Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite company.
VT Industries Inc.
DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A.
General Door Grade Specifications: Refer to or AWI for grade definitions and 1.5
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS above.
B.
Veneer and Veneer Matching:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Veneer Species: White Maple
Veneer Cut: Plain sliced
Veneer Face Grade AWI 1300-G-17: Grade “A”, as described in HPVA tables AWI
section 1300 and ANSI/HPVA-1-2000, August 2000.
Nominal Minimum Width of Face Components: 5”. Definition of “nominal width”
variation shall not be more than ¼” narrower than minimum width shown.
Matching Between Leaves: Book
Veneer match AWI 1300-G-13: Assembly of Spliced Veneer on Face will be Running
Match
Pair Match all pairs and Set Match all pairs within 10 feet of each other when doors are in
the closed position to provide pleasing appearance for grain and color.
Non Fire Rated Door:
1.
Core will be Particleboard Core (PC-5). Core will be securely bonded to the stiles and
rails with Type I Adhesive. Particleboard Core (PC-5) to comply with the minimum
physical properties shown in ANSI Standard. A208.1-1993 for Low Density Grades
(LD-1 or LD-2), with screw holding power face minimum of (90lbs.). Type II water
resistant glue is permitted.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
081416 - 4
a.
2.
Crossbands are to be hardwood veneer or High Density Fiberboard (HDF) with a
minimum thickness of 1/16". Minimum properties include internal bond minimum of 220
psi.
3.
Stiles (Vertical Edges) Matching: Compatible to face veneer. Outer stile minimum width
to be 1/4”. Vertical Edges can be one piece or laminated hardwood lumber, but the
visible portion must be same species as face veneer or recognized compatible species.
The matching or outer layer of lumber must be a minimum of 1/4” or thicker after trim.
Total dimension of stile after trimming must be a minimum of 1” on the hinge edge and
13/16” on the lock edge.
Rails (Horizontal Edges): Rails must be present on all doors. Rails are SCL or solid
lumber - hardwood or softwood.
Transoms and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed
surfaces, and finish specified for associated doors.
4.
5.
a.
D.
Matching Requirements: Continuous
Fire-Rated Doors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
E.
All Particle Core doors having door closers or other surface mounted hardware
shall have a 5” top block made of lumber or SCL material having minimum screw
withdrawal of 400 psi per TM6. All door(s) with exit devices shall have (2) two
each 4” x 16” blocks to support the application. This action will eliminate the need
for through bolts.
Construct using AWI Five (5) Ply construction described above except where it conflicts
with label requirements See door schedule for specific Time (20 min, 45 min, 60 min or
90 min) requirement by opening; Positive Pressure Smoke label is required.
For Positive Pressure Specify Category: A. Instructions for installation will be included
with the doors when delivered.
Category A Positive Pressure openings will have all the intumescence required for
compliance contained within or on the door and require no additional installation of
intumescent strips on the frame.
Core: Will be same as for non-rated doors unless a special mineral core is required to
label at the desired fire protection levels. (Mineral Core is a non-combustible mineral
composite material that is necessary for higher hourly ratings per manufacturer’s
approval(s).)
Stiles (Vertical Edges): Provide manufacturer's standard solid or laminated edge
construction approved for each fire protection level. Special treated stiles must be
covered with matching veneer or veneer compatible to the face veneer species.
Rails (Horizontal Edges): Rails are solid lumber or other material contained in
manufacturer's fire door approvals.
Mineral Blocking: Required for doors with particle core and mineral core construction
when required for surface mounted hardware. Minimum 5” Top and 5”Bottom blocking
required for all fire doors having surface mounted hardware which eliminates the need to
through bolt hardware.
Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed
surfaces, and finish specified for associated doors with matching labels and the
construction to allow compliance to the fire label requirements.
Door Vision Panels:
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
081416 - 5
1.
2.3
Door vision panels where indicated, lead glass vision panels shall be manufactured for
doors, with lead equivalency equal to door in which it is installed. Cutouts in doors will
be fitted with lead lined metal vision kits, or wood trim will be supplied, as specified.
For label doors, the maximum glass area is per Manufacturer’s approval.
DOOR FABRICATION
A.
Factory Prefit and Bevel Doors 3q bevel or bevel to suit frame sizes indicated, with 3/16" prefit
in width, + 0"/- 1/32", tolerances. Prefit top of door 1/8" +1/16"/-0", and undercut as designated
by floor condition. For fire-rated doors comply with NFPA 80 for prefiting and undercutting.
B.
Factory Pre-Machine Doors for Hardware that is not surface applied. Locations and hole
patterns to comply with specified hardware manufacturers template and requirements of NFPA
80 if it applies. Comply with door manufacturer's requirements to maintain full warranty.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Factory Preparation for Light Openings and Louvers: Cut and trim openings through doors to
comply with NFPA 80 requirements where indicated; and to maintain door manufacturer's
warranty. See door schedule for location and type. All lite openings sizes shown are for
dimension of visible glass. No cutout sizes are listed.
1.
2.
D.
2.4
Specific locations for hardware will be coordinated between frame and door
manufacturer. Location of hardware will be placed to assure the door warranty is not
voided. Manufacture defined light-lock conflicts are to be followed to maintain both
Warranty and Fire Label requirements.
Specific hardware preps will be per hardware schedule(s) provided unless in conflict with
Warranty or Fire Label. Hardware preps to be neatly and cleanly squared as required per
hardware templates.
Metal astragals and metal channels to be supplied where fire-ratings will not allow metalfree edge(s). Astragals and metal channels to be “veneer wrapped with compatible
species veneer.
Wood beads and wood louvers to be of compatible species face veneer. Profiles and
installation per door manufacturer's standard(s).
Metal vision panels and louvers supplied primed and/or painted (Substitute “veneer
wrapped of compatible species veneer” if desired).
Surface Applied Mouldings: Factory applied moulding frames to be compatible with face
veneer. Profile and configuration per door manufacturer’s standard. Moulding frames to be
applied with glue and free of nails unless fire label has other requirements.
FINISHING
A.
Finish Location:
1.
Factory Finishing: All doors (including lite beads and mouldings) to be finished at the
factory, with performance properties equivalent to AWI Acrylated UV Cureable Epoxy
for both Transparent and Opaque finishes as per AWI Section 1500. Factory pre-finished
doors to be individually Poly-wrapped at the factory to protect finish during shipping.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
081416 - 6
B.
Finish Type:
1.
Finish to match Architect’s sample for up to two transparent stained finishes.
locations of stain types on doors, see architectural drawings.
For
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Confirm that frames comply with type, size, location and swing requirements and that they are
installed plumb and square.
B.
Inspect doors prior to installation for any damage, manufacturing defects or prefinish
inconsistency, e.g. wrong color or poor finish.
C.
If frames and doors pass inspections ,proceed to installation. If there are any issues in either
frames or doors, do not proceed to installation. Contact appropriate supplier to correct
unsatisfactory conditions, and proceed with installation only after corrections have been made.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
3.3
Installation of wood doors to comply with door manufacturer’s specific instructions, and NFPA
80.
ADJUSTING AND PROTECTING
A.
After installation of door in frame, operate doors to ensure that they swing freely and that all
hardware functions correctly. If not, make adjustments as required to provide a correct and
operable opening.
B.
Protect doors following installation from damage that may occur as a result of project
completion.
**END OF SECTION**
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
081416 - 7
SECTION 088000
GLAZING
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those
specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this
Section:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Doors.
Glazed curtain walls.
Interior borrowed lites.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as
defined in referenced glazing publications.
B.
Glass Thicknesses:
ASTM C 1036.
C.
Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a
specified gas.
D.
Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the
manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining
and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include
peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.
E.
Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to
the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for
maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions.
Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of
glass.
1.4
Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind
and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage
GLAZING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
088000 - 1
attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of
sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other
defects in construction.
B.
Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only.
Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass
lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than
thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following
criteria:
1.
Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300,
according to the following requirements:
a.
Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from
basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour at 33 feet above grade, according to
ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures":
Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above
grade indicated on Drawings.
1)
2)
3)
b.
Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set
vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action.
1)
c.
C.
For monolithic-glass lites heat treated to resist wind loads.
For insulating glass.
Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm.
Thickness of Tinted and Heat-Absorbing Glass: Provide the same thickness for
each tint color indicated throughout Project.
Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the
following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass
framing members and glazing components.
Base engineering calculation on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1.
D.
Load Duration: 60 seconds or less.
Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported on all 4
edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind
pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or 1 inch, whichever is less.
1)
2)
d.
e.
Basic Wind Speed: 90
Importance Factor: 1.00.
Exposure Category: B.
Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties
specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures
indicated below:
1.
GLAZING
For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
088000 - 2
2.
3.
For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall
unit and for each lite.
Center-of-Glass Values: Based on using LBL-44789 WINDOW 5.0 computer program
for the following methodologies:
a.
b.
c.
1.5
U-Factors: NFRC 100 expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F.
Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200.
Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B.
Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch-square Samples for glass and of
12-inch-long Samples for sealants. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material
representative in color of the adjoining framing system.
C.
Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch-square Samples for glass.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Each color of tinted float glass.
Ceramic-coated spandrel glass.
Fire-resistive glazing products.
For each color (except black) of exposed glazing sealant indicated.
One-way tempered mirror/glass.
D.
Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in
preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.
E.
Qualification Data: For installers.
F.
Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: From glazing sealant manufacturer
indicating glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates and
for compatibility with glass and other glazing materials.
G.
Product Test Reports: For each of the following types of glazing products:
1.
2.
3.
4.
H.
1.6
Coated float glass.
Insulating glass.
Glazing sealants.
Glazing gaskets.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass
installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass
installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified
Glass Installer Program.
GLAZING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
088000 - 3
B.
Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain the following through one source from a single
manufacturer for each glass type: clear float glass, coated float glass, glass-clad polycarbonate
and insulating glass.
C.
Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories through one source
from a single manufacturer for each product and installation method indicated.
D.
Glass Product Testing: Obtain glass test results for product test reports in "Submittals" Article
from a qualified testing agency based on testing glass products.
1.
2.
E.
Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Testing: Obtain sealant test results for product test reports
in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant
formulations within a 36-month period.
1.
2.
F.
Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience
and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency accredited
according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.
Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified
according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E 548.
Test elastomeric glazing sealants for compliance with requirements specified by
reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.
Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to elastomeric glazing sealant
manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of each glazing material type, tape sealant,
gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member that will contact or affect elastomeric
glazing sealants:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation
techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass,
tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.
Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates,
shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
For materials failing tests, obtain sealant manufacturer's written instructions for
corrective measures, including the use of specially formulated primers.
Testing will not be required if elastomeric glazing sealant manufacturers submit data
based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility
with, glazing materials matching those submitted.
G.
Glazing for Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply with NFPA 80
and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to
NFPA 252.
H.
Glazing for Fire-Rated Window Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply with
NFPA 80 and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to
NFPA 257.
GLAZING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
088000 - 4
I.
Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and, for wired
glass, ANSI Z97.1.
1.
2.
J.
Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers
and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these
publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1.
K.
2.
3.
1.7
Insulating Glass Certification Council.
Associated Laboratories, Inc.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
M.
IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "Glazing Guidelines for
Sealed Insulating Glass Units."
Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least
one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following testing and
inspecting agency:
1.
2.
L.
Subject to compliance with requirements, obtain safety glazing products permanently
marked with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another
certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Where glazing units, including Kind FT glass and laminated glass, are specified in Part 2
articles for glazing lites more than 9 sq. ft. in exposed surface area of one side, provide
glazing products that comply with Category II materials, for lites 9 sq. ft. or less in
exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category I
or II materials, except for hazardous locations where Category II materials are required
by 16 CFR 1201 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
Build glass mockups by installing the following kinds of glass in mockups specified in
Division 08 Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls" to match glazing systems
required for Project, including glazing methods:
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to
prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct
exposure to sun, or other causes.
B.
For insulating-glass units that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with
insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid
hermetic seal ruptures.
GLAZING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
088000 - 5
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when
glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
1.
1.9
Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions
are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form,
made out to Owner and signed by coated-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace coated-glass
units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to
Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.
1.
B.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out
to Owner and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace insulating-glass units
that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project
site, within specified warranty period indicated below.
1.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1.
2.
2.2
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
GLASS PRODUCTS
A.
Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality-Q3; of class,
kind, and condition indicated.
1.
2.
GLAZING
Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion
parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed float glass where
needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
088000 - 6
3.
4.
5.
B.
Ceramic-Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition B (spandrel glass, one surface
ceramic coated), Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3, and complying with other
requirements specified.
1.
C.
and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance
Requirements" Article.
For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A.
For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other uncoated
glass).
Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS (heatstrengthened) float glass where safety glass is indicated.
Fallout Resistance: Provide spandrel units identical to those passing the falloutresistance test for spandrel glass specified in ASTM C 1048.
Insulating-Glass Units, General: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass
separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units
and with requirements specified in this Article and in Part 2 "Insulating-Glass Units" Article.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed
to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to
comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements"
Article.
Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) glass lites where safety glass is indicated.
Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated for insulatingglass units are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly
from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge.
Sealing System: Dual seal, with primary and secondary sealants as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
5.
2.3
Manufacturer's standard sealants.
Polyisobutylene and polysulfide.
Polyisobutylene and silicone.
Polyisobutylene and hot-melt butyl.
Polyisobutylene and polyurethane.
Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.
FIRE-RATED GLAZING PRODUCTS
A.
Monolithic Ceramic Glazing Material: Proprietary product in the form of clear flat sheets of
3/16-inch nominal thickness weighing 2.5 lb/sq. ft., and as follows:
1.
2.
GLAZING
Fire-Protection Rating: As indicated for the fire window in which glazing material is
installed, and permanently labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
Product: "Premium FireLite" (polished on both surfaces) by Nippon Electric Glass Co.,
Ltd., and distributed by Technical Glass Products.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
088000 - 7
2.4
HALF-SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRRORS (One-Way Mirrors)
A.
Mirrors, General: ASTM C 1503; manufactured using copper-free, low-lead mirror coating
process.
B.
Tempered Glass Mirrors: Mirror Glazing Quality for blemish requirements and complying with
ASTM C 1048 for Kind FT, Condition A, tempered float glass before silver coating is applied;
clear.
1.
2.
C.
2.5
Nominal Thickness: 1/4 inch.
Tint Color: Gray.
Safety Glazing Products: For tempered mirrors, provide products that comply with 16 CFR
1201, Category II.
GLAZING GASKETS
A.
Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below,
complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile
and hardness required to maintain watertight seal:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of
material indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and
hardness required to maintain watertight seal:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
2.6
Neoprene, ASTM C 864.
EPDM, ASTM C 864.
Silicone, ASTM C 1115.
Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, ASTM C 1115.
Any material indicated above.
Neoprene.
EPDM.
Silicone.
Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber.
Any material indicated above.
Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames
with molded corner units and zipper lock-strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black.
GLAZING SEALANTS
A.
General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:
1.
GLAZING
Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with
other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units,
and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
088000 - 8
2.
3.
B.
Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at
time of installation.
Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range.
Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for
each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing
ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint
substrates.
1.
Single-Component Neutral- and Basic-Curing and Neutral-Curing Silicone Glazing
Sealants GS-1:
a.
Products:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
b.
c.
d.
e.
Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
Class: 50.
Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
Uses Related to Glazing Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing
substrates indicated, O.
1)
2.
Use O Glazing Substrates: Coated glass, color anodic aluminum, aluminum
coated with a high-performance coating, galvanized steel and wood.
Class 25 Neutral-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant GS-2:
a.
Products:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
b.
c.
d.
GLAZING
Dow Corning Corporation; 790.
GE Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700.
Tremco; Spectrem 1 (Basic).
< GE Silicones; SilPruf SCS2000.
Pecora Corporation; 864.
Pecora Corporation; 890.
Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-641.
Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc.; Omniseal.
Tremco; Spectrem 3.
Dow Corning Corporation; 799.
GE Silicones; UltraGlaze SSG4000.
GE Silicones; UltraGlaze SSG4000AC.
Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-631.
Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM5731 Poly-Glaze Plus.
Tremco; Proglaze SG.
Tremco; Spectrem 2.
Tremco; Tremsil 600.
Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag).
Class: 50.
Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic).
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
088000 - 9
e.
Uses Related to Glazing Substrates:
substrates indicated, O.
1)
C.
2.7
M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing
Use O Glazing Substrates: Coated glass, color anodic aluminum, aluminum
coated with a high-performance coating, galvanized steel and wood.
Glazing Sealants for Fire-Resistive Glazing Products:
assemblies to obtain fire-protection rating.
Identical to products used in test
GLAZING TAPES
A.
Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids
content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with
or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for
application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with
ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive
on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with
AAMA 800 for the following types:
1.
2.
2.8
AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.
AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous
pressure.
AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous
pressure.
Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of
liquid sealant.
MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application
indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B.
Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C.
Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5.
D.
Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness
required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E.
Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).
GLAZING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
088000 - 10
F.
Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and
density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant
performance.
G.
Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used in test assembly to
obtain fire-resistance rating.
2.9
FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A.
Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and
face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of
product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance
requirements.
B.
Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces
square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with outdoor and indoor faces.
C.
Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.
2.10
A.
MONOLITHIC FLOAT-GLASS UNITS
Uncoated Clear Float-Glass Units: Class 1 (clear) Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass.
1.
2.
2.11
A.
Thickness: 6.0 mm.
Self-Cleaning, Low-Maintenance Coating: Pyrolytic coating on first surface.
INSULATING-GLASS UNITS
Ceramic-Coated Spandrel Insulating-Glass Units:
1.
2.
Construction: Provide units that comply with requirements specified for insulating-glass
units designated IG-1 except for indoor lite.
Indoor Lite: Ceramic-coated spandrel glass.
a.
b.
c.
Kind HS (heat strengthened).
Ceramic Coating Location: Fourth surface.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:
1.
2.
GLAZING
Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and
offsets at corners.
Presence and functioning of weep system.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
088000 - 11
3.
4.
B.
3.2
Minimum required face or edge clearances.
Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
GLAZING, GENERAL
A.
Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
referenced glazing publications.
B.
Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass,
minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable
tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.
C.
Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from
Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or
other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and
appearance.
D.
Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.
E.
Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F.
Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G.
Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches as follows:
1.
2.
Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.
Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and
glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances
and to comply with system performance requirements.
Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of
tape.
H.
Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways
in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to
requirements in referenced glazing publications.
I.
Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
GLAZING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
088000 - 12
J.
Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket
on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is
subjected to movement.
K.
Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by
gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with
sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
3.4
TAPE GLAZING
A.
Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush
with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B.
Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to
make them fit opening.
C.
Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover
horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
D.
Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.
Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E.
Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed.
F.
Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.
G.
Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense
compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.
Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
H.
Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
3.5
GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A.
Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings
exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
B.
Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place
with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C.
Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket
by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of
removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass.
Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
D.
Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
GLAZING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
088000 - 13
3.6
SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A.
Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass
lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding
into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and
backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance
for optimum sealant performance.
B.
Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond
of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C.
Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
3.7
LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING
A.
3.8
Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions.
supplementary wet seal and weep system, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers
to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
B.
Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do
come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass
manufacturer.
C.
Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum,
alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
D.
Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from
natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
E.
Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date
scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as
recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
**END OF SECTION**
GLAZING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
088000 - 14
SECTION 088113.1
DECORATIVE GLASS FILM
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes the following: Decorative for interior film applications:
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Division 08 Section "Glazing" for standard glass products.
PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A.
Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing film material type for
adhesion to and compatibility with glass.
1.
2.
3.
1.4
Submit no fewer than four Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates,
shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
For materials failing tests, obtain manufacturer's written instructions for corrective
measures.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each decorative-glass film product indicated.
installation details.
B.
Samples: For the following products, 12 inches square:
1.
Show fabrication and
Each decorative film overlay on each type of glass.
C.
Product Schedule: For decorative glass. Use same designations for locations of doors and
windows indicated on Drawings.
D.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and fabricator.
E.
Product Certificates: For each type of decorative film, from manufacturer.
DECORATIVE GLASS
FILM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
088113.1 - 1
F.
Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Reports:
Based on evaluation and
comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for glass with decorative film
overlay.
G.
Maintenance Data: For each type of decorative film overlay to include in maintenance manuals.
H.
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who
are certified under NGA's Certified Glass Installer Program.
B.
Source Limitations for Decorative Film: Obtain each type of decorative film from single source
from single manufacturer.
C.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1.
2.
D.
1.6
Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect decorative glass film and glazing materials according to manufacturer's written
instructions and as needed to prevent damage to surfaces and edges.
B.
Retain packaging and sequencing numbers for decorative-glass film.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install decorative film until spaces are enclosed
and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is
operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels
during the remainder of the construction period.
B.
Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings and construction contiguous with
decorative glass by field measurements before fabrication.
DECORATIVE GLASS
FILM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
088113.1 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
DECORATIVE GLASS FILM TYPES
A.
Decorative Glass: Glass with decorative film overlay. Use translucent, dimensionally stable,
cast PVC film, 2-mil-minimum thickness, with pressure-sensitive, clear adhesive back for
adhering to glass and releasable protective backing.
1.
2.
Basis-of-Design: Decorative Films, LLC; Solyx, full range of film selection.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Avery Dennison, Graphics;
FDC Graphic Films, Inc.; Intermediate Frosted Crystal.
FDC Graphic Films, Inc.; Premium Frosted Etched Glass.
3M; Scotchcal.
Glass Types: Existing insulated units.
Glass Thickness: 1 inch, 1/4 inch thick interior panel.
Use: Suitable for interior/exterior applications.
Patterns: To match existing film at SSG glass along walkway at column lines ‘D’, 10, or
‘B’.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine -glass framing members and surfaces, with Installer present, for compliance with the
following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
3.2
Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and
offsets at corners.
Minimum required face or edge clearances.
Cleanliness for surfaces for adhered film..
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
DECORATIVE-GLASS FILM INSTALLATION
A.
Decorative Film Overlay: Apply squarely aligned to glass edges, uniformly smooth, and free
from tears, air bubbles, wrinkles, and rough edges, in single sheet completely overlaying the
back face of clean glass, according to manufacturer's written instructions, including surface
preparation and application temperature limitations.
B.
Set decorative-glass units in each series true in line with uniform orientation, pattern, draw,
bow, and similar characteristics.
C.
Set glass lites with proper orientation so that each outer surface faces the direction indicated on
Drawings.
DECORATIVE GLASS
FILM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
088113.1 - 3
D.
3.3
3.4
Set decorative glass film locations indicated on Drawings.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Protect decorative glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed
streamers to framing and held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface.
Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
B.
Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with
glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
C.
Remove and replace glass and film that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is
damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
D.
Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date
scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as
recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
DECORATIVE FILM APPLICATION SCHEDULE
Drawing Reference
A-103
Location
First Floor
Item/Location
Exterior curtainwall; column line 5 typical
**END OF SECTION**
DECORATIVE GLASS
FILM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
088113.1 - 4
SECTION 092116.23
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies for the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Shaft-wall enclosures.
Chase enclosures.
Horizontal enclosures.
Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for head-of-wall assemblies that
incorporate gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each gypsum board shaft-wall assembly indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies
with fire-resistance ratings determined according to ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting
agency.
B.
STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies
tested according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a testing and
inspecting agency.
C.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures
for installing gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fasteners proposed for anchoring nonstructural steel framing to building structure.
Sprayed fire-resistive materials applied to structural steel framing.
Elevator equipment, including hoistway doors, elevator call buttons, and elevator floor
indicators.
Wiring devices in shaft-wall assemblies.
GYPSUM BOARD
SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
092116.23 - 1
5.
6.
7.
1.5
Doors and other items penetrating shaft-wall assemblies.
Items supported by shaft-wall-assembly framing.
Mechanical work enclosed within shaft-wall assemblies.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials in original packages, containers, and bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B.
Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes.
C.
Stack panels flat on leveled supports off floor or slab to prevent sagging.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or with gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B.
Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C.
Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
1.
2.
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape.
Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
American Gypsum Company.
BPB America Inc.
G-P Gypsum.
Lafarge North America Inc.
National Gypsum Company.
PABCO Gypsum.
Temple-Inland Forest Products Corporation.
USG Corporation.
GYPSUM BOARD
SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
092116.23 - 2
2.2
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES, GENERAL
A.
Provide materials and components complying with requirements of fire-resistance-rated
assemblies indicated.
1.
2.
2.3
Provide panels in maximum lengths available to eliminate or minimize end-to-end butt
joints.
Provide auxiliary materials complying with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly
manufacturer's written recommendations.
PANEL PRODUCTS
A.
Gypsum Liner Panels: Comply with ASTM C 442.
1.
Type X: Manufacturer's proprietary liner panels with moisture-resistant paper faces.
a.
b.
Core: 1 inch thick.
Long Edges: Double bevel.
B.
Gypsum Board: As specified in Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board."
C.
Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board:
Board."
D.
Cementitious Backer Units: As specified in Division 09 Section "Tiling."
2.4
As specified in Division 09 Section "Gypsum
NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING
A.
Framing Members: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
B.
Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise
indicated.
2.5
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced product standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B.
Trim Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes specified in
Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" that comply with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly
manufacturer's written recommendations for application indicated.
C.
Gypsum Board Joint-Treatment Materials:
Board."
D.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
GYPSUM BOARD
SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
As specified in Division 09 Section "Gypsum
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
092116.23 - 3
E.
Track Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand loading
conditions imposed on shaft-wall assemblies without exceeding allowable design stress of track,
fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded.
1.
2.
F.
Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing),
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
wool, or rock wool.
1.
G.
2.6
Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to
sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per
ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing agency.
Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated,
fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a
load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted
by a qualified testing agency.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies:
assembly.
Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of
Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: As indicated on Drawings by design designation of a qualified testing
agency.
B.
Fire-Resistance Rating: As indicated.
C.
STC Rating: As indicated.
D.
Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members, corner and end members, and
fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.
1.
2.
E.
Runner Tracks: Manufacturer's standard J-profile track with long-leg length as standard with
manufacturer, but at least 2 inches long and in depth matching studs.
1.
F.
Depth: As indicated.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs.
Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with
movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated;
in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
1.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
Dietrich Metal Framing; The System by Metal-Lite, Inc.
Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak attached to studs with Fire Trak Slip Clip.
GYPSUM BOARD
SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
092116.23 - 4
G.
Jamb Struts: Manufacturer's standard J-profile strut with long-leg length of 3 inches, in depth
matching studs, and not less than 0.0329 inch thick.
H.
Room-Side Finish: Gypsum board.
I.
Shaft-Side Finish: As indicated.
J.
Insulation: Sound attenuation blankets.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates to which gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies attach or abut, with Installer
present, including hollow-metal frames, elevator hoistway door frames, cast-in anchors, and
structural framing. Examine for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold
damaged.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: Coordinate with gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies so both
elements of Work remain complete and undamaged. Patch or replace sprayed fire-resistive
materials removed or damaged during installation of shaft-wall assemblies to comply with
requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Applied Fireproofing."
1.
B.
3.3
Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling
runner tracks to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where
offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure
not more than 24 inches o.c.
After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove only to extent necessary for
installation of gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies and without reducing the fire-resistive
material thickness below that which is required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated.
Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fireresistance-rated assemblies indicated, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and the
following:
1.
2.
ASTM C 754 for installing steel framing except comply with framing spacing indicated.
Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for applying and finishing panels.
GYPSUM BOARD
SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
092116.23 - 5
B.
Do not bridge architectural or building expansion joints with shaft-wall assemblies; frame both
sides of expansion joints with furring and other support.
C.
Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies around openings and as
required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment,
services, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar items that cannot be supported directly by shaftwall assembly framing.
D.
At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft-wall assembly by installing
supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes
containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items.
E.
Isolate perimeter of gypsum panels from building structure to prevent cracking of panels, while
maintaining continuity of fire-rated construction.
F.
Firestop Tracks: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated.
G.
Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations
approved by Architect, while maintaining fire-resistance rating of gypsum board shaft-wall
assemblies.
H.
Seal gypsum board shaft walls with acoustical sealant at perimeter of each assembly where it
abuts other work and at joints and penetrations within each assembly. Install acoustical sealant
to withstand dislocation by air-pressure differential between shaft and external spaces; maintain
an airtight and smoke-tight seal; and comply with ASTM C 919 requirements or with
manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.
I.
Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than
1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
3.4
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B.
Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
1.
2.
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape.
Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
**END OF SECTION**
GYPSUM BOARD
SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
092116.23 - 6
SECTION 092216
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.).
Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.).
Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for head-of-wall joint systems
installed with non-load-bearing steel framing.
Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies" for non-load-bearing metal
shaft-wall framing, gypsum panels, and other components of shaft-wall assemblies.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate nonload-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in
assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B.
STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical
to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to
ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A.
Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
NON-STRUCTURAL
METAL FRAMING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
092216 - 1
1.
2.
2.2
Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless
otherwise indicated.
Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise
indicated.
SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A.
Tie Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch-diameter wire, or
double strand of 0.0475-inch-diameter wire.
B.
Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch diameter.
C.
Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538
inch and minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges.
1.
D.
Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
Furring Channels (Furring Members):
1.
2.
Steel Studs: ASTM C 645.
Resilient Furring Channels:
transmission.
a.
E.
Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.
Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main
beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.3
1/2-inch deep members designed to reduce sound
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems.
Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Furring System.
USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.
STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A.
Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
1.
2.
B.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following:
1.
C.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch deep
flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer
runner sized to friction fit inside runner.
Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with
movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly
NON-STRUCTURAL
METAL FRAMING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
092216 - 2
indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of
studs.
1.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
D.
Flat Strap and Backing Plate:
indicated.
1.
E.
Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch.
Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.
Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch wide
flanges.
1.
2.
3.
2.4
Depth: 1-1/2 inches .
Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches thick, galvanized steel.
Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound
transmission.
1.
H.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch.
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1.
2.
G.
Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width
Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch wide
flanges.
1.
2.
F.
Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak attached to studs with Fire Trak Slip Clip.
Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.
Depth: 3/4 inch.
Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum baresteel thickness of 0.0312 inch.
Tie Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch diameter wire, or
double strand of 0.0475-inch diameter wire.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
1.
Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding
power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
NON-STRUCTURAL
METAL FRAMING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
092216 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames,
cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions
affecting performance.
1.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of
overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building
structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that
hangers will develop their full strength.
1.
B.
Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:
1.
2.
3.3
Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in
advance of time needed for coordination and construction.
Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling
runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where
offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure
not more than 24 inches o.c.
After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary
for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fireresistive materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect
adjacent fire-resistive materials from damage.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated.
1.
Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply
to framing installation.
B.
Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim,
grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
C.
Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D.
Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing
members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
NON-STRUCTURAL
METAL FRAMING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
092216 - 4
3.4
INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A.
Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not less
than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly
components indicated.
B.
Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by
building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
C.
Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
1.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
a.
2.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension
system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of
trapezes or equivalent devices.
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by referenced installation standards.
Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to
inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for
substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts
that extend through forms.
Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
D.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.
E.
Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.
F.
Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems
meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other
and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
G.
Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet
measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between
parallel members that will receive finishes.
3.5
INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A.
Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior
walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
NON-STRUCTURAL
METAL FRAMING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
092216 - 5
B.
Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
1.
Space studs as follows:
a.
b.
c.
C.
Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural
supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to
terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above
ceiling.
1.
2.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to
produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished
assemblies.
Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames;
install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch
clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished
assembly.
Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead
structure.
Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required
for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to
match framing required above door heads.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to
underside of solid structure.
a.
Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistancerated assembly indicated.
Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.
Curved Partitions:
a.
b.
D.
Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
Tile backing panels: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.
Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along
arcs. On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6
inches o.c.
Direct Furring:
1.
2.
Screw to wood framing.
Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment,
or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.
NON-STRUCTURAL
METAL FRAMING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
092216 - 6
E.
Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than
1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
**END OF SECTION**
NON-STRUCTURAL
METAL FRAMING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
092216 - 7
SECTION 092900
GYPSUM BOARD
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.3
Interior gypsum board.
Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and furring that supports
gypsum board.
Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for insulation and vapor retarders installed in
assemblies that incorporate gypsum board.
Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for head-of-wall assemblies that
incorporate gypsum board.
Division 09 Section "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and
suspension systems that support gypsum board.
Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies" for metal shaft-wall
framing, gypsum shaft liners, and other components of shaft-wall assemblies.
Division 09 Section "Tiling" for cementitious backer units installed as substrates for
ceramic tile.
Division 09 painting Sections for primers applied to gypsum board surfaces.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples: For the following products:
1.
1.4
Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch-long length for each trim accessory
indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.
GYPSUM BOARD
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
092900 - 1
B.
STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical
to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to
ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
C.
Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in
surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and
execution.
1.
Install mockups for the following:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
1.5
Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.
Each texture finish indicated.
Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on
exposed surfaces for review of mockups.
Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
1.6
Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat
to prevent sagging.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B.
Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C.
Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold
damaged.
1.
2.
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PANELS, GENERAL
A.
Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area
and that correspond with support system indicated.
GYPSUM BOARD
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
092900 - 2
2.2
INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A.
General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to
type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
B.
Type X:
1.
2.
C.
Thickness: 1/2 inch
Long Edges: Tapered.
Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces.
1.
2.
2.3
Thickness: As required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated on Drawings.
Long Edges: Tapered.
Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board.
1.
2.
E.
Thickness: 5/8 inch.
Long Edges: Tapered.
Type C:
1.
2.
D.
American Gypsum Co.
BPB America Inc.
G-P Gypsum.
National Gypsum Company.
USG Corporation.
Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.
Long Edges: Tapered.
TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1.
2.
Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced
galvanized steel sheet.
Shapes:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
GYPSUM BOARD
Cornerbead.
Bullnose bead.
LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
Expansion (control) joint.
Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
092900 - 3
B.
Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
2.4
Fry Reglet Corp.
Gordon, Inc.
Pittcon Industries.
Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of
ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5.
Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials
specified.
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 475.
B.
Joint Tape:
1.
C.
Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.5
Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas,
use setting-type taping compound.
Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping
compound.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B.
Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering
gypsum panels to continuous substrate.
C.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.
For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by
panel manufacturer.
GYPSUM BOARD
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
092900 - 4
D.
Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag
wool, or rock wool.
1.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies:
assembly.
Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of
E.
Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
F.
Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation."
G.
Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames
and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A.
Comply with ASTM C 840.
B.
Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid
abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels
not less than one framing member.
C.
Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with
not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D.
Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not
make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E.
Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F.
Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,
etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1.
2.
Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke
ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.
Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
GYPSUM BOARD
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
092900 - 5
3.
Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof
slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow
1/4- to 3/8-inch-wide joints to install sealant.
G.
Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations, and trim
edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and
abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H.
Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to
open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
I.
STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings
and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both
faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with
manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking
paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
3.3
APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A.
Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Type X: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
Type C: Where required for specific fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.
Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.
Abuse-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.
Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.
Single-Layer Application:
1.
2.
On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest
extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless
otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end
joints.
a.
b.
3.
C.
Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses
of panels.
At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
Multilayer Application:
1.
On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on
walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to
framing members and offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches minimum,
from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistancerated assembly.
GYPSUM BOARD
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
092900 - 6
2.
3.
D.
3.4
On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers
vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring
member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer
joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger
joints on opposite sides of partitions.
Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers with screws; fasten face layers with adhesive and
supplementary fasteners.
Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate
(other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum
board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels
until fastening adhesive has set.
INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations
approved by Architect for visual effect.
C.
Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1.
2.
3.5
Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A.
General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for
decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B.
Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C.
Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended
for tape.
D.
Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM
C 840:
1.
2.
3.
Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.
Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile
Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated.
a.
E.
Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections.
Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions
for use as exposed soffit board.
GYPSUM BOARD
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
092900 - 7
F.
Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels:
instructions.
G.
Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.6
Finish according to manufacturer's written
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B.
Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1.
2.
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
**END OF SECTION**
GYPSUM BOARD
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
092900 - 8
SECTION 093000
CERAMIC TILING
Renovation for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Ceramic mosaic tile.
Waterproof membrane for thin-set tile installations.
Crack-suppression membrane for thin-set tile installations.
Metal edge strips installed as part of tile installations.
Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for removing existing finishes.
Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and
isolation joints in tile surfaces.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Module Size: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499) plus joint
width indicated.
B.
Facial Dimension: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499).
C.
Facial Dimension: Nominal tile size as defined in ANSI A137.1.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the
following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028:
1.
2.
3.
Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6.
Step Treads: Minimum 0.6.
Ramp Surfaces: Minimum 0.8.
CERAMIC TILING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
093000 - 1
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and
locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished
tile surfaces.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include Samples of
accessories involving color selection.
D.
Samples for Verification:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.
Assembled samples with grouted joints for each type and composition of tile and for each
color and finish required, at least 12 inches square and mounted on rigid panel. Use grout
of type and in color or colors approved for completed work.
Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required.
Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths.
Metal edge strips in 6-inch lengths.
E.
Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile
manufacturer and Installer.
F.
Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.
G.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
H.
Material Test Reports: For each tile-setting and -grouting product and special-purpose tile.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain all tile of same type from one source or producer.
1.
Obtain tile from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties for each contiguous area.
B.
Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality
for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate
from one source or producer.
C.
Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this
Section through one source from a single manufacturer for each product:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Waterproofing.
Joint sealants.
Cementitious backer units.
Metal edge strips.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.
CERAMIC TILING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
093000 - 2
1.
2.
3.
E.
1.7
Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation.
Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact
until time of use. Comply with requirement in ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.
B.
Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
C.
Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
D.
Store liquid latexes and emulsion adhesives in unopened containers and protected from
freezing.
E.
Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces
from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile,
remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.9
Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in
referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount
installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for
product selection:
CERAMIC TILING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
093000 - 3
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each tile type is based on the product named.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a
comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.
PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for
Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
1.
2.
Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated.
For facial dimensions of tile, comply with requirements relating to tile sizes specified in
Part 1 "Definitions" Article.
B.
ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI
standards referenced in "Setting and Grouting Materials" Article.
C.
Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile,
grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other
appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the following
requirements:
1.
As indicated on drawings.
D.
Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample
submittals, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same
range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.
E.
Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard
with manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
F.
2.3
Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or edge-mounted tile
assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is
suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance.
Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect
exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating with continuous
film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces.
TILE PRODUCTS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
B.
Royal Mosa to match existing.
Unglazed Paver Tile CT-1 through CT-3: Flat tile as follows:
CERAMIC TILING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
093000 - 4
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.4
Composition: Porcelain
Facial Dimensions: 12 x 12 inches
Thickness: .32 inches
Face: Pattern of design indicated, with square edges.
Coefficient of friction: Dry 0.69-0.70, Wet .064- .067
Composition to include 17.75% of recycled content
Basis-of-Design Product: Royal Mosa Global collection.
Colors must match adjoining floor tile.
WATERPROOFING AND CRACK-SUPPRESSION MEMBRANES FOR THIN-SET TILE
INSTALLATIONS
A.
General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.10, selected from the
following.
B.
Corrugated-Polyethylene Product: Corrugated polyethylene with dovetail-shaped corrugations
for adhering to latex-portland cement mortar and with anchoring webbing on the underside; 39
inches wide by 3/16-inch nominal thickness.
1.
C.
Product: Schluter Systems L.P.; DITRA. No substitutions allowed.
Latex-Portland Cement Product: Flexible mortar consisting of cement-based mix and acryliclatex additive.
1.
Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.5
Boiardi Products Corporation; Elastiment 323.
MAPEI Corporation; PRP 315.
Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Southcrete 1100.
TEC Specialty Products Inc.; TA-324, Triple Flex.
SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Bonsal, W. R., Company.
LATICRETE International Inc.
Summitville Tiles, Inc.
Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4, consisting of the following:
1.
2.
Prepackaged dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive
to which only water must be added at Project site.
Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber
liquid-latex additive.
a.
CERAMIC TILING
For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar that complies with Paragraph F4.6.1 in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
093000 - 5
C.
2.6
Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A.
General: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base
polymer and characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements in Division 07
Section "Joint Sealants."
1.
Use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B.
Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed
joints, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25;
Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with
fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that
are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures.
1.
Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
D.
Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P; Class 25;
Uses T, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
1.
Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.7
Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786.
GE Silicones; Sanitary 1700.
Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant.
Tremco, Inc.; Tremsil 600 White.
Laticrete, Latasil
Bostik; Chem-Calk 550.
Mameco International, Inc.; Vulkem 245.
Pecora Corporation; NR-200 Urexpan.
Tremco, Inc.; THC-900.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based
formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations
indicated.
B.
Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or
combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications,
nickel silver exposed-edge material. Include Schluter thresholds.
CERAMIC TILING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
093000 - 6
C.
Temporary Protective Coating: Either product indicated below that is formulated to protect
exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and
grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile.
1.
2.
D.
2.8
Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil with
a melting point of 120 to 140 deg F per ASTM D 87.
Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is
specially formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile.
Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and
grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout
manufacturers.
MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A.
Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout
manufacturers' written instructions.
B.
Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
C.
Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and
other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance
characteristics for installations indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of installed tile.
1.
2.
3.
B.
3.2
Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, and
curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108
Series of tile installation standards for installations indicated.
Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical
units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before
installing tile.
Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if
not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil,
or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.
CERAMIC TILING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
093000 - 7
B.
Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thin-set mortar that comply
with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards.
1.
2.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound
according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product
specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.
Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
C.
Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals,
verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package
show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If
not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
D.
Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to
prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous
film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.
3.3
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for
Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to
methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
B.
TCNA Installation Guidelines: TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply
with TCNA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
C.
Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete
covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at
obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
D.
Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring
visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for
straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other
penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
E.
Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when
adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile
fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting.
Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within
tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.
F.
Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
G.
Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,
contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar
beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
1.
Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.
CERAMIC TILING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
093000 - 8
2.
H.
Grout tile to comply with requirements of the following tile installation standards:
1.
2.
3.4
Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section
"Joint Sealants."
For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement; dry-set, commercial portland cement; and
latex-portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10.
For chemical-resistant epoxy grouts, comply with ANSI A108.6.
WATERPROOFING AND CRACK-SUPPRESSION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A.
Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and waterproofing manufacturer's written
instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to
substrate.
B.
Install crack-suppression membrane to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to
produce membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate and covering tile.
C.
Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to
determine that it is watertight.
3.5
FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Floor Tile Installation Schedule,
including those referencing TCNA installation methods and ANSI A108 Series of tile
installation standards.
1.
For installations indicated below, follow procedures in ANSI A108 Series tile installation
standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage.
a.
b.
B.
Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths:
1.
C.
3.6
Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger.
Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.
Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch.
Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets
carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.
CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A.
Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are
free of foreign matter.
1.
2.
Remove epoxy and latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.
Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written
instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners
recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners
CERAMIC TILING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
093000 - 9
3.
are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect
metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean
water before and after cleaning.
Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer
that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it
from clogging drains.
B.
When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed
tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during
construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.
C.
Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is
completed.
D.
Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.
3.7
FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A.
Tile Installation CT-1 through CT-3: Interior floor installation on waterproof and cracksuppression membrane over concrete; thin-set mortar; TCNA F125A and ANSI A108.5.
1.
2.
3.
Tile Type: Porcelain, unglazed paver
Thin-Set Mortar: Unmodified thin-set mortar ANSI 118.1
Grout: Water cleanable epoxy grout, ANSI 118.8.
**END OF SECTION**
CERAMIC TILING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
093000 - 10
SECTION 095113
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings, and
acoustical tiles used with adhesive bonding.
B.
Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling
attachment devices to be cast in concrete at ceilings.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
AC: Articulation Class.
B.
CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class.
C.
LR: Light Reflectance coefficient.
D.
NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
1.
2.
Ceiling suspension system members.
Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
a.
3.
4.
C.
Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment
devices whose installation is specified in other Sections.
Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,
access panels, and special moldings.
Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch = 1 foot.
Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color finishes.
ACOUSTICAL
PANEL CEILINGS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
095113 - 1
D.
Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required,
prepared on Samples of size indicated below.
1.
2.
Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch-square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture.
Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12-inch-long
Samples of each type, finish, and color.
E.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
F.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for each acoustical panel ceiling.
G.
Research/Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling and components and anchor
and fastener type.
H.
Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension
system through one source from a single manufacturer.
1.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following surfaceburning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class B materials as
determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84:
a.
B.
Seismic Standard: Provide acoustical panel ceilings designed and installed to withstand the
effects of earthquake motions according to the following:
1.
2.
C.
1.6
Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with
ASTM E 580.
CISCA's Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings:
Comply with CISCA's
"Recommendations for Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings--Seismic
Zones 0-2."
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
D.
Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in
original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they
ACOUSTICAL
PANEL CEILINGS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
095113 - 2
will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B.
Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and stabilized
moisture content.
C.
Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed
and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project
when occupied for its intended use.
1.
1.8
Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before
beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation.
COORDINATION
A.
1.9
Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
3.
Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.
Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0
percent of quantity installed.
Hold-Down Clips: Equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL
A.
Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated
that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical
ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
B.
Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of
test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface per ASTM E 795.
Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each
product type.
ACOUSTICAL
PANEL CEILINGS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
095113 - 3
1.
C.
2.2
Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern
designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations,
provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply
with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical
performance, edge detail, and size.
Antimicrobial Fungicide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels with face and back surfaces
coated with antimicrobial treatment consisting of manufacturer's standard formulation with
fungicide added to inhibit growth of mold and mildew and showing no mold or mildew growth
when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or
ASTM G 21.
ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable
product to the following (Refer to Reflected Ceiling Plans for location of all APC-1 through
APC-8 ceiling systems):
1.
C.
APC-1:
24” x 24” x 3/4” Armstrong Cirrus #589 ceiling panels in 9/16” Supra Fine
exposed suspension system.
APC-1 Cirrus #589 Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type,
form, and pattern as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
2.3
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
BPB USA.
Chicago Metallic Corporation.
Ecophon CertainTeed, Inc.
USG Interiors, Inc.
Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 1, nodular.
Pattern: E (lightly textured); I (embossed).
Color: White.
LR: Not less than 0.85
NRC: Not less than 0.70.
CAC: Not less than 35.
Edge/Joint Detail: Beveled, Tegular.
Thickness: 3/4 inch.
Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches.
Antimicrobial Treatment: Fungicide based.
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A.
Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal
suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with
applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.
ACOUSTICAL
PANEL CEILINGS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
095113 - 4
B.
Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for
Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.
1.
C.
High-Humidity Finish:
Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for "Coating
Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes are
indicated.
Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
"Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
1.
Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops
for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a
load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per
ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and
inspecting agency.
a.
b.
2.
D.
Type: Postinstalled expansion anchors.
Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition.
Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application
indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory
devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by
testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1.
2.
Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft
temper.
Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635,
Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than
0.135-inch-diameter wire.
E.
Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04-inch-thick,
galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G90 coating designation; with bolted
connections and 5/16-inch-diameter bolts.
F.
Seismic Stabilizer Bars:
Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to
accommodate seismic forces.
G.
Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic
forces.
H.
Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical
panels in-place.
I.
Hold-Down Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced
24 inches o.c. on all cross tees.
ACOUSTICAL
PANEL CEILINGS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
095113 - 5
J.
2.4
Impact Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard impact-clip system designed to
absorb impact forces against acoustical panels.
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a comparable
product to the following:
1.
C.
Armstrong Suprafine 9/16” (ACP-1).
Suprafine 9/16”: Narrow-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and
cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated,
or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653, not less than G30 coating designation, with
prefinished 9/16-inch-wide metal caps on flanges.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.5
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
BPB USA.
Chicago Metallic Corporation.
Ecophon CertainTeed, Inc.
USG Interiors, Inc.
Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.
End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type.
Face Design: Flat, flush.
Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet.
Cap Finish: Painted white.
METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM
A.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
BPB USA.
Chicago Metallic Corporation.
Fry Reglet Corporation.
Gordon, Inc.
USG Interiors, Inc.
Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not
indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with
seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that
used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.
1.
Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and
suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners,
unless otherwise indicated.
ACOUSTICAL
PANEL CEILINGS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
095113 - 6
2.
3.
2.6
For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms
reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at
exposed suspension member.
For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter
required to fit penetration exactly.
ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a.
b.
2.
Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.
USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
a.
b.
c.
OSI Sealants, Inc.; Pro-Series SC-175 Rubber Base Sound Sealant.
Pecora Corporation; BA-98.
Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical
panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified
in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel
ceilings.
1.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply
with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design
requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems
Handbook."
ACOUSTICAL
PANEL CEILINGS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
095113 - 7
1.
B.
Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
C.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces
by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces
by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a
minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts,
eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not
deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing
members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and
appropriate for both structure to which hangers are attached and type of hanger involved.
Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age,
corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten
hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or
power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.
When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required,
install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.
Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from
hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of
each member.
Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.
Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Fire-Rated Assembly: Install fire-rated ceiling systems according to tested fire-rated
design.
Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of
moldings before they are installed.
Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more
than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8
inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.
Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
ACOUSTICAL
PANEL CEILINGS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
095113 - 8
E.
Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system
runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat,
precise fit.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.4
For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of
suspension system runners and moldings.
For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of
reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.
For reveal-edged panels on suspension system members with box-shaped flanges, install
panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension system surfaces and panel
faces flush with bottom face of runners.
Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed
panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel
manufacturer.
Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having
jurisdiction; space as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions, unless
otherwise indicated.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following
special inspections and prepare reports:
1.
2.
Suspended ceiling system.
Hangers, anchors and fasteners.
B.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections
and prepare test reports.
C.
Remove and replace acoustical panel ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners that do not pass
tests and inspections and retest as specified above.
3.5
CLEANING
A.
Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and
touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be
successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
**END OF SECTION**
ACOUSTICAL
PANEL CEILINGS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
095113 - 9
SECTION 096513
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Resilient base.
Resilient molding accessories.
Division 09 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring" for resilient floor tile.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size
Samples but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern
required.
D.
Product Schedule: For resilient products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1.
B.
Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
Mockups: Provide resilient products with mockups specified in other Sections.
RESILIENT BASE
AND ACCESSORIES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
096513 - 1
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.6
Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with
ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time
periods:
1.
2.
3.
48 hours before installation.
During installation.
48 hours after installation.
B.
Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
C.
Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
1.7
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each
type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
RESILIENT BASE <RB-1>
A.
Resilient Base:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
Johnsonite.
Mondo Rubber International, Inc.
Roppe Corporation, USA.
Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.
1.
Material Requirement: Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic).
RESILIENT BASE
AND ACCESSORIES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
096513 - 2
2.
3.
Manufacturing Method: Group II (layered).
Style: Cove (base with toe).
C.
Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch.
D.
Height: 4 inches.
E.
Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.
F.
Outside Corners: Job formed or preformed.
G.
Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed.
H.
Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
I.
Colors and Patterns: Match Architect's sample/existing base used on floors 3 through 7.
2.2
RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY
A.
Resilient Molding Accessory:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc.
Flexco, Inc.
Johnsonite.
R.C.A. Rubber Company (The).
Roppe Corporation, USA.
VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division.
B.
Description: Cap for cove resilient floor covering, Carpet bar for tackless installations, Carpet
edge for glue-down applications, Nosing for carpet, Nosing for resilient floor covering, Reducer
strip for resilient floor covering, Joiner for tile and carpet and Transition strips.
C.
Material: Rubber.
D.
Profile and Dimensions: As indicated.
E.
Colors and Patterns: Match Architect's sample.
2.3
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or
blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for
applications indicated.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and
substrate conditions indicated.
RESILIENT BASE
AND ACCESSORIES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
096513 - 3
1.
Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a.
b.
Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.
Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.
C.
Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to
protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.
D.
Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by resilient stair
tread manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in
other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign
deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of
resilient products.
B.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
C.
Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to
be installed.
1.
D.
3.3
Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed
at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before
installation.
RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B.
Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
RESILIENT BASE
AND ACCESSORIES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
096513 - 4
C.
Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
D.
Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E.
Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
F.
On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient
base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
G.
Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.
3.4
RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.
B.
Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates
throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet and resilient floor
covering that would otherwise be exposed.
3.5
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient
products.
B.
Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:
1.
2.
3.
Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C.
Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D.
Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from resilient stair treads
before applying liquid floor polish.
1.
E.
Apply two coats.
Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.
**END OF SECTION**
RESILIENT BASE
AND ACCESSORIES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
096513 - 5
SECTION 096519
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Vinyl composition floor tile.
Division 09 Section "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base, reducer strips,
and other accessories installed with resilient floor coverings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns,
doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.
1.
Show details of special patterns.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor tile indicated.
D.
Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.
E.
Product Schedule: For floor tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
F.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
G.
Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are
competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation indicated.
RESILIENT TILE
FLOORING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
096519 - 1
1.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1.
C.
Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by
manufacturer for installation techniques required.
Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
Build mockups for floor tile including resilient base and accessories.
a.
1.5
Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. for each type, color, and pattern in locations directed by
Architect.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.6
Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient
temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50
deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods:
1.
2.
3.
48 hours before installation.
During installation.
48 hours after installation.
B.
Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
C.
Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.
D.
Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.
E.
Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
1.7
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and
pattern of floor tile installed.
RESILIENT TILE
FLOORING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
096519 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Basis-of-Design: Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Standard Excelon Imperial Texture
at first floor corridors to match existing product line.
B.
Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2, through-pattern tile.
C.
Wearing Surface: Smooth.
D.
Thickness: 0.125 inch.
E.
Size: 12 by 12 inches.
F.
Colors and Patterns: To be selected by Architect from full product range.
1.
2.
3.
2.2
VCT-1: 12” x 12” Imperial Excelon.
VCT-2: Natural Creations Woods Collection.
VCT-3: Natural Creations Earth Cuts.
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or
blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for
applications indicated.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate
conditions indicated.
1.
Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a.
b.
C.
Vinyl Composition Floor Tile Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.
Rubber Floor Tile Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.
Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
RESILIENT TILE
FLOORING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
096519 - 3
B.
Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in
other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign
deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of
resilient products.
B.
Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and
that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by
manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed
with installation only after substrates pass testing.
Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with
installation only after substrates pass testing.
C.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D.
Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.
1.
E.
3.3
Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed
at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before
installation.
FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.
B.
Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor
offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using
cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
1.
C.
Lay tiles in pattern indicated.
Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as
manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed
tiles.
1.
Lay tiles with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles (basket-weave pattern).
RESILIENT TILE
FLOORING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
096519 - 4
D.
Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent
fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E.
Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles
to center of door openings.
F.
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent,
nonstaining marking device.
G.
Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers,
and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern
between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to
substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.
H.
Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to
produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
3.4
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile.
B.
Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:
1.
2.
3.
Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C.
Protect floor tile products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D.
Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile surfaces
before applying liquid floor polish.
1.
Apply two coats.
E.
Joint Sealant: Apply sealant to resilient terrazzo floor tile perimeter and around columns, at
door frames, and at other joints and penetrations.
F.
Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.
**END OF SECTION**
RESILIENT TILE
FLOORING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
096519 - 5
SECTION 096813
TILE CARPETING
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes modular, tufted carpet tile.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for removing existing floor
coverings.
Division 09 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring" for resilient wall base and accessories
installed with carpet tile.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on
physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations
for each type of substrate.
1.
B.
Fiber Verification: Certification from the fiber producer verifying use of the premium
branded, type 6,6 or type 6 fiber in the submitted carpet product. Premium branded fibers
are identified as Invista, Solutia, HONEYWELL or Aquafil.
Shop Drawings: Show the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where
cutouts are required in carpet tiles.
Existing flooring materials to be removed.
Existing flooring materials to remain.
Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot.
Type of subfloor.
Type of installation.
Pattern of installation.
Pattern type, location, and direction.
Pile direction.
Type, color, and location of insets and borders.
Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips.
Transition details to other flooring materials.
TILE CARPETING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
096813 - 1
C.
Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label
each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation
indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
1.
2.
Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample.
Exposed Edge, Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch long Samples.
D.
Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
E.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
F.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency.
G.
Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1.
2.
H.
1.4
Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and
procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.
Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer:
1.
2.
3.
The carpet manufacturer shall have no less than fifteen years of production experience
with modular carpet similar to type specified. Published product literature of carpet
manufacturer must clearly indicate compliance of products with requirements of this
section.
Commitment to Quality: Carpet manufacturer must provide verification of its
registration to the ISO 9001/9002 Quality Management System.
Commitment to Sustainability: Carpet manufacturer must demonstrate environmental
responsibility through programs to source reduction, recycling, reuse and conservation
and registration to the ISO 14001 Environmental Management System.
B.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering
Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program
requirements.
C.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification
indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an
independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Mockups: Before installing carpet tile, build mockups to verify selections made under sample
submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and
execution.
1.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undamaged at time of
Substantial Completion.
TILE CARPETING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
096813 - 2
E.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures
related to carpet tile installation including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
1.5
Review delivery, storage, and handling procedures.
Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.6
Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and
Section 7.12, "Ventilation."
B.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tiles until wet work in spaces is complete and
dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use.
C.
Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to
bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile
manufacturer.
D.
Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles,
install carpet tiles before installing these items.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees
to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic,
failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.
Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge
raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, dimensional stability, excess static
discharge, and delamination.
Warranty Period: 15 years (non-prorated) from date of Substantial Completion.
Provide the following written warranties by carpet manufacturer for a period of not less than 15
years:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Wear: Surface fiber wear shall not be more than 10% by weight in 15 years. (Note:
Wear warranty shall not require use of chair pads)
Static: Static generation at less than 3.0 kV at 70° F, and 20% R.H.
No delamination.
No edge ravel.
TILE CARPETING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
096813 - 3
5.
6.
No dimensional instability (i.e., shrinkage, curling and doming) which adversely affect
the ability of the tile to lay flat.
Mergeability: Carpet that is of the same style/color, but from different dyelots and/or
manufacturing dates, may be merged and used interchangeably, both at initial installation
and at later selective replacement, to create continuous carpeted surface with no tile
appearing out of place.
C.
Submit manufacturer’s NVLAP certified test results to show that carpet meets or exceeds
product performance specification criteria for carpet testing requirements under Section 2.1
hereof.
D.
Installation provided shall warrant for (1) year following substantial completion that all
installation services have been performed in a workmanlike manner, and shall promptly reperform all services not meeting this warranty.
1.8
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products
installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.
1.
Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated,
but not less than 10 sq. yd.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CARPET TILE
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following as Basis-of-Design:
1.
B.
Interface
Color & Pattern: Two (2) colors as selected by Architect.
1.
2.
CPT-1: Folio 5781 Brown.
CPT-2: Scenic Route 5778 Mint.
C.
Yarn System: 100% Invista Type 6,6, Solutia Type 6,6 HONEYWELL Type 6 (Eco Solution
Q) or Aquafil Type 6 Nylon (Note: Bidder may propose yarn with a % of biobased material
with satisfactory explanation of modification)
D.
Dye Method: 100% Solution Dyed or Solution Dyed/Yarn Dyed combinations.
E.
Mergeability: Carpet that is of the same style/color, but from different dyelots and/or
manufacturing dates, may be merged and used interchangeably, both at initial installation and at
later selective replacement, to create a continuous carpeted surface with no tile appearing out of
place.
F.
Construction: Tufted
TILE CARPETING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
096813 - 4
G.
Patterning: Integrated (topical application or wet patterning not allowed)
H.
Texture: Textured Loop
I.
Density: 6500 oz/cu. yd.
J.
Gauge/Stitch: Minimum 1/10
K.
Pile Height: Minimum .148
L.
Pile Weight: Maximum 18-22 oz per yard (lower face weights are preferable if equal or
superior performance can be substantiated by Appearance Retention Testing)
M.
Primary Backing: Must be non-woven. Woven primary backings not allowed.
N.
Secondary Backing: Fiberglass Reinforced Thermoplastic or Thermoplastic Polyolephin
Composite containing not less than 39% post consumer and/or post industrial material content.
Secondary backing must be 100% recyclable at the end of its useful life.
O.
Size: 18 by 18 inches or 24 by 24 inches.
P.
Soil/Stain Resistance: Application by fiber producer and manufacturer required.
Q.
Antimicrobial: (AATCC 171 Washed) (ASTM E2471-05). Must receive a minimum of PI
(high) rating to pass.
R.
Random Installation Method: All product must be designed for random installation, meaning
that each and every tile can be installed in any of the four possible directions without regard to
pile direction, pattern or orientation of any adjacent tiles while still creating a finished carpet tile
assembly that appears to be a visually continuous carpeted surface with no tile appearing out of
place or improperly positioned.
S.
Recycled Yarn Content: Minimum 25%
T.
Performance Characteristics: As follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 lbf (445 N) per ASTM D 2646.
Tuft Bind: Not less than 5 lbf (22 N) per ASTM D 1335.
Delamination: Not less than 4 lbf/in. per ASTM D 3936.
Dimensional Tolerance: Within 1/32 inch of specified size dimensions, as determined by
physical measurement.
Dimensional Stability: 0.2 percent or less per ISO 2551 (Aachen Test).
Resistance to Insects: Comply with AATCC 24.
Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, per AATCC 165.
Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 60 AFU (AATCC fading units) per
AATCC 16, Option E.
Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 2-mm halo of inhibition for gram-positive bacteria;
not less than 1-mm halo of inhibition for gram-negative bacteria; no fungal growth; per
AATCC 174.
Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 2.5 kV per AATCC 134.
TILE CARPETING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
096813 - 5
12.
VOC Limits: Provide carpet tile that complies with the following limits for VOC content
when tested according to ASTM D 5116:
a.
b.
c.
d.
13.
Carpet Flammability:
a.
b.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
2.2
Total VOCs: 0.5 mg/sq. m x h.
4-PC (4-Phenylcyclohexene): 0.05 mg/sq. m x h.
Formaldehyde: 0.05 mg/sq. m x h.
Styrene: 0.4 mg/sq. m x h.
Pill Test: ASTM D2859 or CPSC FF-1-70.
Radiant Panel Test: ASTM E648.
Smoke Density: ASTM E662, less than 450 Flaming Mode.
Dimensional Stability: Aachen Method Din 54318, less than 0.1% change.
Static Generation at 70° F: AATCC 134 with neolite, less than 2.5 kV at 20% R.H.
Lightfastness: AATCC 16E, 4.0 after 60 hours.
Gas Fade: AATCC 23, 4.
Ozone Fade: AATCC 109, 4.
Antibacterial: ASTM E 2471-05, CI, CIZ or minimum PI high for Serratia.
Antifungal: ASTM E 2471-05, CI, CIZ or minimum of PI high rating.
Soil/Stain Protection: AATCC 175-1991, greater than 8.0 on the Red 40 Stain Scale
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based
formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit
products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for
installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.
1.
VOC Limits: Provide adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content
when tested according to ASTM D 5116:
a.
b.
c.
Total VOCs: 10.00 mg/sq. m x h.
Formaldehyde: 0.05 mg/sq. m x h.
2-Ethyl-1-Hexanol: 3.00 mg/sq. m x h.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other
conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and
potential defects.
TILE CARPETING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
096813 - 6
B.
Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
1.
2.
3.
C.
3.2
Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness
characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile
manufacturer.
Subfloor finishes comply with requirements generally for "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for
slabs receiving carpet tile.
Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with
carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to
receive carpet tile installation.
B.
Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks,
holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch, unless more
stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical
methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
1.
2.
Carpet tile manufacturer requires removal of 75% of existing adhesives, which can be
achieved without shot blast and with power operated scrapers.
Tests for adhesive compatibility are the Contractor’s responsibility as is the use of any
required primers, at no additional cost or increase in schedule duration to the Owner.
D.
Clean metal substrates of grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if directed by adhesive
manufacturer. Rough sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum
surfaces, to remove metal oxides, immediately before applying adhesive.
E.
Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile
manufacturer's written installation instructions.
1.
2.
Install carpet according to carpet manufacturer’s printed instructions and in accordance
with the Carpet and Rug Institute’s Installation Standard.
“Chair Pads” shall not be recommended or required within installation instructions.
B.
Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
C.
Utilize carpet piles with a mergeable dye lot.
TILE CARPETING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
096813 - 7
D.
Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in
furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut
edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
E.
Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable
flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
F.
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking
device.
G.
Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
H.
Stagger joints of carpet tiles so carpet tile grid is offset from access flooring panel grid. Do not
fill seams of access flooring panels with carpet adhesive; keep seams free of adhesive.
3.4
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:
1.
2.
3.
Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner
recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface.
Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.
B.
Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor
Installations."
C.
Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and
fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or
recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
**END OF SECTION**
TILE CARPETING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
096813 - 8
SECTION 099123
INTERIOR PAINTING
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following
interior substrates:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Steel.
Galvanized metal.
Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).
Wood.
Gypsum board.
Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this
Section.
Division 06 Sections for shop priming carpentry with primers specified in this Section.
Division 06 Section "Wood Paneling" for surface application of wood stains and
transparent finishes on interior wood substrates.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.
Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
Label each coat of each Sample.
Label each Sample for location and application area.
Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1.
Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas.
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
INTERIOR PAINTING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
Use same
099123 - 1
2.
1.4
Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in
Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
MPI Standards:
1.
2.
B.
Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved
Products List."
Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.
Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish
selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of
each paint system specified in Part 3.
a.
b.
2.
3.
Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services
have been activated.
Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.
a.
1.5
Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.
Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark
samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
1.
2.
1.6
Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are
between 50 and 95 deg F.
B.
Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5
deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
INTERIOR PAINTING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
099123 - 2
1.7
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as
materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1.
Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and
color applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Benjamin Moore & Co.
Duron, Inc.
Sherwin Williams.
PAINT, GENERAL
A.
Material Compatibility:
1.
2.
B.
Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that
comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base,
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) and the following
chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to primers or finishes that are applied in a
fabrication or finishing shop:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.
Nonflat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.
Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by
weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more
benzene rings).
Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Acrolein.
Acrylonitrile.
Antimony.
Benzene.
Butyl benzyl phthalate.
INTERIOR PAINTING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
099123 - 3
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
y.
C.
2.3
Cadmium.
Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate.
Di-n-butyl phthalate.
Di-n-octyl phthalate.
1,2-dichlorobenzene.
Diethyl phthalate.
Dimethyl phthalate.
Ethylbenzene.
Formaldehyde.
Hexavalent chromium.
Isophorone.
Lead.
Mercury.
Methyl ethyl ketone.
Methyl isobutyl ketone.
Methylene chloride.
Naphthalene.
Toluene (methylbenzene).
1,1,1-trichloroethane.
Vinyl chloride.
Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
BLOCK FILLERS
A.
Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI #4.
1.
2.4
Duron: High Performance Acrylic Block Filler
PRIMERS/SEALERS / New UnPainted Drywall A.
Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50.
1.
B.
Duron: New Construction Acrylic High Build Primer
Previously Painted Drywall:
1. Duron: Interior Acrylic Latex Drywall Primer
2.6 METAL PRIMERS
A.
Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79. Hollow Metal Doors / Frames
1.
B.
Duron: Dura Clad Alkyd White Metal Primer
Old Rusted Skylight Metal
1.
Duron:: Rust Inhibitive Polyamide Eoxy Primer
INTERIOR PAINTING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
099123 - 4
C.
New Galvanized Metal
1. Duron: Acrylic Galvanized Metal Primer
2.7
LATEX PAINTS
A.
Interior Latex (Low Sheen): MPI #44 (Gloss Level 2).
1.
B.
Interior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #54 (Gloss Level 5).
1.
C.
Duron: Ultra Deluxe Interior Acrylic Latex Eggshell
Duron: Plastic Kote Interior Acrylic Latex Semi Gloss
High Performance Acrylic Metal ( Semigloss )
1. Duron: Dura Clad Direct to Metal ( DTM ) Semi Gloss Finish
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B.
Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Concrete: 12 percent.
Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
Wood: 15 percent.
Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
C.
Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
D.
Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces
are dry.
1.
3.2
Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and
conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
INTERIOR PAINTING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
099123 - 5
B.
Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted.
If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surfaceapplied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1.
2.
C.
After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and
incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1.
Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required
to produce paint systems indicated.
D.
Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do
not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if
moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's
written instructions.
F.
Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in
writing by paint manufacturer.
G.
Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal
fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that
promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
H.
Aluminum Substrates: Remove surface oxidation.
I.
Wood Substrates:
1.
2.
3.
4.
J.
3.3
Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.
Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic
wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and
sanded smooth.
APPLICATION
A.
Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
INTERIOR PAINTING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
099123 - 6
2.
3.
Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.
Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture
with prime coat only.
Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar
hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
B.
Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of
same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide
sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C.
If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D.
Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
E.
Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and
occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
Mechanical Work:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Electrical Work:
a.
b.
3.4
Uninsulated metal piping.
Uninsulated plastic piping.
Pipe hangers and supports.
Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets
and outlets.
Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering
or other paintable jacket material.
Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field
painting.
Exposed electrical conduit in finished and unfinished spaces (also at exterior
exposed conduit, see Division 09 Section “Exterior Painting.”)
Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field
painting.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any
time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied:
1.
2.
Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials
being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed,
and certified in presence of Contractor.
Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.
INTERIOR PAINTING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
099123 - 7
3.
3.5
Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being
used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplyingpaint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with
rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from
previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are
incompatible.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B.
After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C.
Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.
D.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
3.6
INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A.
CMU Substrates:
1.
Latex System: New Unpainted CMU
a.
b.
c.
2.
Latex System: Existing Painted Block
a.
b.
c.
B.
Prime Coat: Duron High Performance Acrylic Block Filler
Intermediate Coat: Ultra Deluxe Low Luster
Topcoat: Ultra Deluxe Low Luster
Prime Coat: Terminator II Primer Sealer
Intermediate Coat: Ultra Deluxe Low Luster
Topcoat: Ultra Deluxe Low Luster
Steel Substrates:
1.
Latex Over Alkyd Primer System / New Hollow Metal Steel Doors and Trim
a.
b.
c.
2.
Prime Coat: Dura Clad Alkyd White Metal Primer
Intermediate Coat: Plasti Kote Semi Gloss
Topcoat: Plasti Kote Semi Gloss
Latex Over Alkyd Primer System / Old Rusted Steel - Skylights
a.
b.
Prime Coat: Dura Clad #85 Rust Inhibitive Polyamide Epoxy Primer
Intermediate Coat: Dura Clad Direct to Metal ( DTM )
INTERIOR PAINTING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
099123 - 8
c.
C.
Galvanized Metal – New
1.
Ductwork
a.
b.
c.
D.
Topcoat: Dura Clad Direct to Metal ( DTM )
Prime Coat: Dura Clad Alkyd White Metal Primer
Intermediate Coat: Plasti Kote Semi Gloss
Topcoat: Plasti Kote Semi Gloss
Gypsum Board Substrates:
1.
Latex System: New Drywall
a.
b.
c.
2.
Prime Coat: New Construction Acrylic High Build Drywall Primer
Intermediate Coat: Ultra Deluxe Acrylic Low Luster
Topcoat: Ultra Deluxe Acrylic Low Luster
Latex System: Previously Painted Drywall
a.
b.
c.
Prime Coat: Terminator II Primer Sealer
Intermediate Coat: Ultra Deluxe Acrylic Low Luster
Topcoat: Ultra Deluxe Acrylic Low Luster
**END OF SECTION**
INTERIOR PAINTING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
099123 - 9
SECTION 100010
TELEVISION MOUNTS
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following specialties:
1.
B.
1.3
Television Mounts
Extent of each specialty item is shown on drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.4
Coordination: Coordinate specialty item locations with other work to avoid interference.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data for each specialty item, including
installation instructions.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawing for all specialty items. Include color charts for items
requiring color selections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
TELEVISION MOUNTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
100010 - 1
2.2
TELEVISION WALL MOUNTS
A.
Provide double arm type television wall mount with perforated tray. Model No. JMW 2675H as
manufactured by Custom Products & Services, Inc, Inver Grove Hts., MN. Brackets shall be
finished in Scratch Resistant Black Fused Epoxy.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install television wall mount at locations and in accordance with the details on the drawings.
Exact location shall be reviewed with the Architect in the field and coordinated with locations
of casework, etc.
B.
Attachment to steel structure or miscellaneous steel framing shall be with ceiling plates or other
mounting device recommended by television mount manufacturer. Mounting device must meet
or exceed the maximum load capacity of the television ceiling mount.
C.
Install booths in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
D.
Install taping tables in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3.2
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Verify that accessories required for each unit have been properly installed and that operating
units function properly.
B.
Clean units according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
**END OF SECTION**
TELEVISION MOUNTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
100010 - 2
SECTION 101400
SIGNAGE
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Dimensional characters.
Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary Project
identification signs and for temporary information and directional signs.
Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for labels, tags,
and nameplates for plumbing systems and equipment.
Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for labels, tags,
and nameplates for HVAC systems and equipment.
Division 26 Sections for electrical service and connections for illuminated signs.
Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" for labels, tags, and
nameplates for electrical equipment.
Division 26 Section "Interior Lighting" for illuminated Exit signs.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance
Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines."
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs.
1.
2.
3.
SIGNAGE
Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by
others, and accessories.
Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and
Braille, and layout for each sign.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
101400 - 1
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections
of units showing the full range of colors available for the following:
1.
D.
Aluminum.
Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for the full range of color,
texture, and sign material indicated, of sizes indicated:
1.
2.
Dimensional Characters: Full-size Samples of each type of dimensional character (letter,
number, and graphic element).
Accessories: Manufacturer's full-size unit.
E.
Sign Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
F.
Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.
G.
Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.
H.
Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
B.
Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products
similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance.
C.
Source Limitations for Signs: Obtain each sign type indicated from one source from a single
manufacturer.
D.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility
Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.
E.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit installation of signs in exterior locations to be performed according to
manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.
B.
Field Measurements: Verify recess openings by field measurements before fabrication and
indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
SIGNAGE
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
101400 - 2
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
1.8
Coordinate placement of anchorage devices with templates for installing signs.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
Deterioration of metal and polymer finishes beyond normal weathering.
Deterioration of embedded graphic image colors and sign lamination.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26, of alloy and temper recommended by sign manufacturer for
casting process used and for use and finish indicated.
B.
Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum
producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with at least the strength and
durability properties of Alloy 5005-H32.
C.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer
and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with at least the strength and durability
properties of Alloy 6063-T5.
2.2
DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
SIGNAGE
ACE Sign Systems, Inc.
Advance Corporation; Braille-Tac Division.
A. R. K. Ramos.
ASI-Modulex, Inc.
Bunting Graphics, Inc.
Charleston Industries, Inc.
Gemini Incorporated.
Grimco, Inc.
Innerface Sign Systems, Inc.
Metal Arts; Div. of L&H Mfg. Co.
Mills Manufacturing Company.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
101400 - 3
12.
13.
14.
15.
B.
Cast Characters: Produce characters with smooth flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed
lines and profiles, free of pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects. Cast lugs into back of
characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Alloy and temper recommended by sign
manufacturer for casting process used and for use and finish indicated. Comply with the
following requirements.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Mohawk Sign Systems.
Nelson-Harkins Industries.
Signature Signs, Incorporated.
Southwell Company (The).
Character Material: Aluminum.
Thickness: 1/2 inch.
Color: Brushed Aluminum.
Mounting: Concealed studs, noncorroding for substrates encountered.
Dimensional Character Sign Schedule:
1.
Sign Type:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Sign Type:
a.
b.
c.
2.3
Character Size and Font: 5” H; Times New Roman.
Text/Message: ‘LANCASTER COUNTY’ (top line), ‘CHILDREN & YOUTH
AGENCY’ (bottom line)
Location: Lobby 116 (East Wall)
Character Size and Font: 3” H; Times New Roman.
Text/Message: ‘CHILDREN & YOUTH AGENCY’
Location: Corridor 220 (South Wall to the left of Door 201A)
ACCESSORIES
A.
2.4
Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for
exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or
lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set
into concrete or masonry work.
FABRICATION
A.
General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated.
1.
2.
SIGNAGE
Welded Connections: Comply with AWS standards for recommended practices in shop
welding. Provide welds behind finished surfaces without distortion or discoloration of
exposed side. Clean exposed welded surfaces of welding flux and dress exposed and
contact surfaces.
Mill joints to tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water
penetration.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
101400 - 4
3.
4.
2.5
Preassemble signs in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs only as
necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and
installation, in location not exposed to view after final assembly.
Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be
inconspicuous.
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
2.6
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
Clear Anodic Finish: Manufacturer's standard Class 1 clear anodic coating, 0.018 mm or
thicker, over a satin (directionally textured) mechanical finish, complying with AAMA 611.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B.
Verify that items, including anchor inserts, are sized and located to accommodate signs.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and
complying with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
SIGNAGE
Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion
and other defects in appearance.
Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable.
Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent
walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding
objects or standing within swing of door.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
101400 - 5
B.
Dimensional Characters: Mount characters using standard fastening methods to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions for character form, type of mounting, wall construction, and
condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish character spacing
and to locate holes for fasteners.
1.
3.3
Flush Mounting: Mount characters with backs in contact with wall surface.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner.
**END OF SECTION**
SIGNAGE
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
101400 - 6
SECTION 102600
WALL PROTECTION
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
1.3
Corner guards.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions
of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each impact-resistant corner guard unit.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each impact-resistant corner guard unit showing locations and extent.
Include sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of impact-resistant corner guard unit indicated.
1.
D.
Include similar Samples of accent strips and accessories involving color selection.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size
indicated below.
1.
Corner Guards: 12 inches long. Include examples of joinery, corners, end caps, top caps,
and field splices.
E.
Material Test Reports: For each impact-resistant plastic material.
F.
Maintenance Data: For each impact-resistant corner guard unit to include in maintenance
manuals.
1.
G.
Include recommended methods and frequency of maintenance for maintaining optimum
condition of plastic covers under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include
precautions against using cleaning materials and methods that may be detrimental to
plastic finishes and performance.
Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
WALL
PROTECTION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
102600 - 1
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for
testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain impact-resistant wall-protection units through one source from a
single manufacturer.
D.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of impactresistant corner guard units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01
Section "Quality Requirements."
1.
Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory
data to Architect for review.
E.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide impact-resistant, plastic wall-protection units with
surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84,
NFPA 255, or UL 723 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
F.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store impact-resistant corner guard units in original undamaged packages and containers inside
well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and
humidity.
1.
2.
3.
Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F during the period
plastic materials are stored.
Keep plastic sheet material out of direct sunlight.
Store plastic corner guard components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until plastic
material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F.
a.
1.6
Store corner-guard covers in a vertical position.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install impact-resistant corner guard units until
building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work is complete and dry, and HVAC system is
operating and maintaining temperature at 70 deg F for not less than 72 hours before beginning
installation and for the remainder of the construction period.
B.
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, and other construction
contiguous with impact-resistant wall-protection units by field measurements before fabrication
and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
WALL
PROTECTION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
102600 - 2
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of impact-resistant corner guard units that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
1.8
Structural failures.
Deterioration of plastic and other materials beyond normal use.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
B.
Corner-Guard Covers: Full-size plastic covers of maximum length equal to 2 percent of
each type, color, and texture of units installed, but no fewer than two, 4-foot-long units.
Include mounting and accessory components.
production run as installed units.
Replacement materials shall be from same
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1.
2.2
Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each impact-resistant corner guard unit is based
on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the
named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.
MATERIALS
A.
Extruded Rigid Plastic: ASTM D 1784, Class 1, textured, chemical- and stain-resistant, highimpact-resistant PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic with integral color throughout; thickness
as indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
WALL
PROTECTION
Impact Resistance: Minimum 25.4 ft-lbf/in. of notch when tested according to
ASTM D 256, Test Method A.
Chemical and Stain Resistance: Tested according to ASTM D 543.
Self-extinguishing when tested according to ASTM D 635.
Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
102600 - 3
B.
Polycarbonate Plastic Sheet: ASTM D 6098, S-PC01, Class 1 or 2, abrasion resistant; with a
minimum impact-resistance rating of 15 ft-lbf/in. of notch when tested according to
ASTM D 256, Test Method A.
C.
Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and
finish indicated but with not less than strength and durability properties specified in
ASTM B 221 for Alloy 6063-T5.
D.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240.
E.
Brass: ASTM B 249 for extruded shapes and ASTM B 36 for sheet.
F.
Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts,
and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type fasteners where
exposed to view.
G.
Adhesive: Type recommended by manufacturer for use with material being adhered to
substrate indicated.
1.
Use adhesives and sealants that comply with the following limits for VOC content when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a.
b.
c.
2.3
Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.
Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.
Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L.
CORNER GUARDS
A.
Surface-Mounted, Resilient, Plastic Corner Guards CGP-1: Assembly consisting of snap-on
plastic cover installed over continuous retainer; including mounting hardware; fabricated with
90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition.
1.
2.
Basis-of-Design Product: Pawling CG-10.
Cover: Extruded rigid plastic, 0.100-inch wall thickness; as follows:
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
B.
Profile: Nominal 3-inch-long leg and 1/4-inch corner radius.
Height: 8 feet.
Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Retainer: Minimum 0.060-inch-thick, 1-piece, extruded aluminum.
Top and Bottom Caps: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; color matching cover;
field adjustable for close alignment with snap-on cover.
Flush-Mounted, Resilient, Plastic Corner Guards CGP-2, CGP-3: Assembly consisting of snapon plastic cover that is flush with adjacent wall surface, installed over continuous retainer;
including mounting hardware; fabricated with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition;
full wall height.
1.
WALL
PROTECTION
Basis-of-Design Product: Pawling Corp., CGP-7, CGP-75.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
102600 - 4
2.
Cover: Extruded rigid plastic, minimum 0.100-inch wall thickness; in dimensions and
profiles indicated on Drawings.
a.
b.
3.
C.
Retainer: Minimum 0.060-inch-thick, 1-piece, extruded aluminum.
Fire-Rated, Resilient, Plastic Corner Guards CGP-4 Assembly consisting of snap-on plastic
cover that is flush with adjacent wall surface, installed over continuous retainer and intumescent
fire barrier; including mounting hardware; fabricated with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall
condition; full wall height.
1.
2.
3.
Basis-of-Design Product: Pawling Corp., CGF-7:
Fire Rating: Same rating as wall in which corner guard is installed; UL listed and labeled
according to UL 2079.
Cover: Extruded rigid plastic, minimum 0.100-inch wall thickness; in dimensions and
profiles indicated on Drawings.
a.
b.
c.
4.
2.4
Height: 8 feet.
Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Leg: Nominal 3 inches.
Corner Radius: 1/4 inch.
Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Retainer: Minimum 0.070-inch-thick, 1-piece, extruded aluminum.
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate impact-resistant corner guard units to comply with requirements indicated for design,
dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components.
B.
Preform curved semirigid, impact-resistant sheet wall covering in factory for radius and sheet
thickness as follows:
1.
2.
Sheet Thickness of 0.040 Inch: 24-inch radius.
Sheet Thickness of 0.060 Inch: 36-inch radius.
C.
Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly.
Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling.
D.
Fabricate components with tight seams and joints with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces
free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members
and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints.
2.5
METAL FINISHES
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1.
WALL
PROTECTION
Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
102600 - 5
2.
Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish
indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.
B.
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter
and leave surfaces chemically clean.
C.
Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, t